ADVANTEST

ADVANTEST CORPORATION

R4131 Series

Spectrum Analyzer

Operation Manuai

MANUAL NUMBER FOE-8324154N01

Applicable models
R4131C
R4131CN
R4131D
R4131DN

(C) 1988 ADVANTEST CORPORATION F irst prin tin g February 17,1988

AH rights reserved. Printed in Japan
 ADVANTEST
MANUAL CHANGES
ADVANTEST CORPORATI ON

Date Sep 5 / 9 6

Ma n ua l No. Ma nu a l C h a n g e No. EMC- 0 1

Parts of t h e O p e r a t i o n Ma n u a l was c h a n g e d a s f o l l o w s .

Pa g e 8 - 6 : Using a mb i e n t conditions was c h a nge d .

\.

Using ambient conditions

: Less t h a n 0°C t o 50°C and 8 5 % RH

Using ambient conditions

: 0° C t o 50 °C and l e s s than 85% RH

1*
 No. ESIOO

Safety Summary
To ensure thorough understanding o f all functions and to ensure efficient use of this instrum ent, please read the
m anual carefully before using. N ote that A dvantest bears absolutely no responsibility for the result of operations
caused due to incorrect or inappropriate use o f this instrum ent.

Tf the equipm ent is used in a m anner not specified by A dvantest, the protection provided by the equipm ent may
be im paired.
• Warning Labels

W arning labels arc applied to A dvantest products in locations w here specific dangers exist. Pay
careful attention to these labels during handling. Do not rem ove or tear these labels. If you have
any questions regarding w arning labels, please ask your nearest A dvantest dealer. O ur address
and phone num ber are listed al the end o f this m anual.

S ym bols o f those w arning labels are shown below together with ihcir m eaning.

DANGER: Indicates an im m inently hazardous situation w hich will result in death or serious
personal injury.

WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation w hich w ill result in death or serious
personal injury.

CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation w hich will result in personal injury or
a dam age to property including the product.
• Basic Precautions

Please observe the follow ing precautions to prevent fire, bum , electric shock, and personal inju­
ry-

• Use a pow er cable rated for the voltage in question. Be sure how ever to use a pow er cable
conform ing to safety standards o f your nation when using a product overseas.

• W hen inserting the plug into the electrical outlet, first turn the pow er sw itch O FF and then
insert the plug as far as it will go.

• W hen rem oving the plug from the electrical outlet, first turn the pow er sw itch O FF and then
pull it out by gripping the plug. Do not pull on the pow er cable itself. M ake sure your hands
are dry at this time.

• B efore turning on the pow er, be sure to check that the supply voltage m atches the voltage
requirem ents of the instrum ent.

• C onnect the pow er cable to a pow er outlet th at is connected to a protected ground term inal.
G rounding w ill be defeated if you use an extension cord w hich does not include a protected
ground term inal.

• Be sure to use fuses rated for the voltage in question.

• Do not use this instrum ent with the case open.

• Do not place anything on the product and do not apply excessive pressure to the product. Al­
so, do not place flow er pots or other containers containing liquid such as ch em icals near this

Safety-1
Safety Summary

product.

• W hen the product has ventilation outlets, do not stick or drop m etal or easily flam m able ob­
jects into the ventilation outlets.

• W hen using the product on a cart, fix it with belts to avoid its drop.

• W hen connecting the product to peripheral equipm ent, turn the pow er off.

• Caution Symbols Used Within this Manual

Sym bols indicating item s requiring caution w hich arc used in this m anual arc shown below to­
gether with their meaning.

DANGER: Indicates an item w here there is a danger o f serious personal injury (death or seri­
ous injury).

WARNING: Indicates an item relating to personal safety or health.

CAUTION: Indicates an item relating to possible dam age to the product or instrum ent or relat­
ing to a restriction on operation.

• Safety Marks on the Product

The follow ing safety m arks can be found on A dvantest products.

A T T E N T IO N - R efer to m anual.
&

P rotcclivc ground (earth) icrm inal.

D A N G E R - H igh voltage.
f -

C A U T IO N - Risk of electric shock.

• Replacing Parts with Limited Life

The follow ing parts used in the instrum ent are m ain parts w ith lim ited life.
R eplace the parts listed below before their expected lifespan has expired to m aintain the perfor­
mance and function of the instrument.
N ote that the estim ated lifespan for the parts listed below m ay be shortened by factors such as
the environm ent w here the instrum ent is stored or used, and how often the instrum ent is used.
The parts inside are not user-replaceable. For a part replacem ent, please contact the A dvantest
sales office for servicing.

Each product may use parts w ith lim ited life.

For more inform ation, refer to the section in this docum ent w here the parts with lim ited life are
described.

Safcty-2
 Safety Summary

M ain Paris with L im ited L ife

Part nam e Life

U nit pow er supply 5 years

Fan motor 5 years

E lectrolytic capacitor 5 years

LCD display 6 years

LCD backlight 2.5 years

Floppy disk drive 5 years

M em ory backup battery 5 years

• Hard Disk Mounted Products

The operational w arnings are listed below.

• Do not move, shock and vibrate the product w hile the pow er is turned on.
R eading or writing data in the hard disk unit is perform ed w ith the m em ory disk turning at a
high speed. It is a very delicate process.

• Store and operate the products under the follow ing environm ental conditions.
A n area w ith no sudden tem perature changes.
An area away from shock or vibrations.
An area free from m oisture, dirt, or dust.
A n area aw ay from m agnets or an instrum ent w hich generates a m agnetic field.

• M ake back-ups o f im portant data.

The data stored in the disk may becom e dam aged if the product is m ishandled. The hard disc
has a lim ited life span w hich depends on the operational conditions. N ote that there is no
guarantee for any loss o f data.
• Precautions when Disposing of this Instrument

W hen disposing o f harm ful substances, be sure dispose of them properly w ith abiding by the
state-provided law.

H arm ful substances: (1) PCB (polycarbon biphenyl)

(2) M ercury
(3) N i-Cd (nickel cadm ium )
(4) O ther
Item s possessing cyan, organic phosphorous and hexadic chrom ium
and items w hich may leak cadm ium or arsenic (excluding lead in sol­
der).

Exam ple: fluorescent tubes, batteries

Safeiy-3
 Environmental Conditions
This instrum ent should be only be used in an area which satisfies the follow ing conditions:

• An area free from corrosive gas

• An area away from direct sunlight

• A dust-free area

• An area free from vibrations

• A ltitude o f up to 2000 m

O perating position

A d e a r space of 10 centim eters or more The instrum ent must be used in a hor­
must be kept around the air vents. izontal position.
A cooling fan, w hich prevents the in­
Front ternal tem perature from rising, is
equipped w ith the instrum ent.
The air vents on the case m ust be un­
blocked.

Figure-2 O perating Position

Storage position

Front This instrum ent should be stored in a horizontal

position.
W hen placed in a vertical (upright) position for
storage or transportation, ensure the instrum ent is
stable and secure.

1 1----------- -Ensure the instrum ent is stable.

-Pay special attention not to fall.

Figure-3 Storage Position

• The classification o f the transient over-voltage, w hich exists typically in the m ain pow er supply, and
the pollution degree is defined by 1EC61010-1 and described below.
Im pulse w ithstand voltage (over-voltage) category 11 defined by 1EC60364-4-443

Pollution D egree 2

Safely-4
 Types of Power Cable
Replace any references to the pow er cable type, according to the follow ing table, w ith the appropriate pow er cable
type for your country.

Rating, color M odel num ber

Plug configuration Standards
and length (Option num ber)

PSE: Japan 125 V at 7 A Straight: A 0 1402

Black
( D l n 0 E lectrical A ppliance and 2 m (6 ft) Angled: A 0 1412
\ e r' M aterial Safely Law
lo)

UL: U nited States of A m erica 125 V a t 7 A Straight: A 0 1403

B lack (O ption 95)
( D l n Q CSA: Canada 2 m (6 ft) Angled: A 0 1413
\ E /
\ o /

CEE: E urope 250 V at 6 A Straight: AO 1404

D EM K O : D enm ark Gray (Option 96)
N EM K O : N orw ay 2 m (6 ft) A ngled: AO 1414
(b e
VDE: G erm any
KEM A ; The N etherlands
CEBEC: B elgium
OV E: A ustria
F1MKO: Finland
SEM K O : Sw eden

SEV: Sw itzerland 250 V at 6 A Straight: AO 1405

Gray (Option 97)
2 m (6 ft) Angled: AO 1415
< h 4>

SAA: A ustralia, N ew Zealand 250 V at 6 A Straight: AO 1406

Gray (Option 98)
2 m (6 ft) Angled: ----------

( § | )

BS: U nited K ingdom 250 V at 6 A Straight: AO 1407

r \ B lack (O ption 99)
(^Um\ 2 m (6 ft) Angled: A 01417
J ______ )

C C C :C hina 250 V at 10 A Straight: A 1 14009

Black (Option 94)
2 m (6 ft) Angled: A 114109
/ ® ® \
\ n® @ y

Safety-5
 Certificate of Conformity

This is to certify, that

_____ Spectrum Analyzer ___

R4131 Series______
instrum ent, type, designation

complies with the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC in accordance with
EN50081-1 and EN50082-1 and Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC in accordancc with
EN61010.

ADVANTEST Corp. ROHDE&SCHWARZ

Tokyo, Japan E ngineering and Sales GmbH
Munich, Germany

4131.00
 No. ECA01

Table of Power Cable Options

T here are six pow er cable options (refer to follow ing table).

O rder pow er cable options by M odel number.

Rating, color M odel num ber

Plug configuration Standards
and length (O ption num ber)

JIS: Japan 125 V at 7 A Straight: A 01402

B lack
L aw on E lectrical A ppliances 2 m (6 ft) A ngled: AO 1412

UL: U nited States o f A m erica 125 V at 7 A Straight: A 0 1403

Black (O ption 95)
CSA : C anada 2 m (6 ft) A ngled: AO 1413

CEE: E urope 250 V at 6 A Straight: A 01404

D EM K O: D enm ark Gray (O ption 96)
N EM K O : N orw ay 2 m (6 ft) A ngled: AO 1414
VDE: G erm any
KEM A: The N etherlands
CEB EC : B elgium
OVE: A ustria
FIM K O : F inland
SEM KO: Sw eden
SEV: Sw itzerland 250 V at 6 A Straight: AO 1405
Gray (O ption 97)
2 m (6 ft) A ngled: A01415

SA A : A ustralia, N ew Zealand 250 V at 6 A Straight: A 0 1406

Gray (O ption 98)
2 m (6 ft) A ngled: ----------

BS: U nited K ingdom 250 V at 6 A Straight: A 01407

Black (O ption 99)
2 m (6 ft) A ngled: A 01417

Cable-1*
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Preface

PREFACE

This Instruction Manual describes the following spectrum analyzers

collectively:

Spectrum analyzers: R4131C, R4131CN

R4131D, R4131DN

The R4131C, R4131CN, R4131D, R4131DN suits safety Class I of the IEC
Publication 348 (safety Publication of the electronic measurement
instrument).

The description of product outline views, screen displays, etc. in this

manual refers to the R4131D unless otherwise clearly indicated.
All information contained in this manual that refers to the R4131 or the
equipment is common to each of the R4131C/CN/D/DN.
In several parts of this manual, the term ATT. refers to "attenuator."

Preface May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................... ..1 - 1

1.1 How to Use this Operation Manual ............................... ..1 - 2
1.2 Outline of Products ............................................. ..1 - 3
1.3 Before Starting the Use ......................................... ..1 - 4
1.3.1 Appearance Check and Accessory Check ....................... ..1 - 4
1.3.2 Environmental Conditions for Use ........................... .1 - 5
1.3.3 Before turning This Analyzer ............................... ..1 - 5
(1) Power Supply Condition ...................................... .1 - 5
(2) Check for Fuse .............................................. .1 - 6
(3) Check for Power Supply Cable ............................... .1 - 7
(4) Maximum Input ............................................... ..1 ~ 8

2. USING R4131 FOR THE FIRST TIME .....................................2 - 1

2.1 Screen of Spectrum Analyzer ..................................... .2 - 2
2.2 Basic Operating Procedure ....................................... .2 - 3
(1) Initialization Screen ....................................... .2 - 3
(2) Input of Measurement Signal ................................ .2 - 3
(3) Setting of Center Frequency ................................ .2 - 4
(4) Setting of Frequency Span ....................................2 - 5
(5) Setting of Reference Level ...................................2 - 6
(6) How to Use the MARKER Key ....................................2 - 8
(7) How to Improve Frequency Accuracy According to
the Correction Routine ...................................... .2 - 9
(8) Warm-up Time ................................................ .2 - 9

3. DESCRIPTION OF PANEL SURFACE AND CRT DISPLAY ..................... .3 - 1

3.1 Description of Front Panel ...................................... .3 - 2
3.2 Description of Each Key (in the NORMAL mode) ................... .3 - 5
3.3 Description of Each Key (in the SHIFT mode) .................... .3 - 6
3.4 Description of Rear Panel ....................................... .3 - 7
3.5 How to Read CRT Display Indication ............................. .3 - 10

4. OPERATING METHOD .................................................. .4 - 1

4.1 Initialization .................................................. .4 - 2
4.2 Center Frequency ................................................ .4 - 4
4.3 Function to Improve Center Frequency Accuracy .................. .4 - 6
(1) AFC Function (only in R4131D/DN) ........................... .4 - 6
(2) ZERO CALibration ............................................ .4 - 6
(3) CF CALibration .............................................. .4 - 6
(4) CF ADJustment ............................................... .4 - 7
4.4 Frequency Span .................................................. .4 - 9
(1) What Is Zero Span (Displayed in the Time Axis)? ........... .4 - 9
4.5 Interlocking Function (AUTO) .....................................4 - 10
4.6 Resolution Bank Width (RBW) ......................................4 - 11
4.7 Reference Level and Ordinate Axis Scale ........................ .4 - 12
(1) Reference Level ............................................. .4 - 12

C - 1 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Table of Contents

(2) Quadrature Axis Scale (dB/DIV) ............................. ..4 - 12

(3) Reference Level Step Width (COARSE/FINE) ................... ..4 - 14
(4) Unit (UNITS) ................................................ ..4 - 14
(5) Calibration of Ordinates Axis Level ........................ ..4 - 14
4.8 RF Input Attenuator ............................................. ..4 - 15
4.9 Display Line .......................................................4 - 16
4.10 Marker Function ................................................ ..4 - 17
(1) Display of Marker ........................................... ..4 - 17
(2) Erasing of Marker ........................................... ..4 - 17
(3) PEAK Search ................................................. ..4 - 17
(4) MarKer Center Frequency ................................. ..4 - 18
(5) SIGnal TRacK ................................................ ..4 - 19
(6) MARKER PAUSE ................................................ ..4 - 20
(7) Measurement of NOISE/Hz ..................................... ..4 - 21
4.11 Video Filter Band Width (VIDEO FiLTeR) ........................ ..4 - 22
4.12 Setting of Sweep Time .......................................... ..4 - 23
4.13 Selection of Sweep Mode/Trigger Mode .......................... ..4 - 24
4.14 Display Detection Mode ......................................... ..4 - 25
(1) SAMPLE DETection ............................................ ..4 - 25
(2) POSi PeaK DETection ......................................... ..4 - 25
(3) NORMAL DETection (POSI/NEGA DET) ........................... ..4 - 26
4.15 Selection of Trace Mode ........................................ ..4 - 28
(1) WRITE ..........................................................4 - 28
(2) STORE ..........................................................4 - 28
(3) VIEW ......................................................... ..4 - 2 8
(4) WRITE and VIEW (2-screen display) .......................... ..4 - 29
(5) MAX HOLD .......................................................4 - 31
4.16 Setting Conditions and SAVE/RECALL of Displayed Waveform ..... ..4 - 3 3
(1 ) SAVE ......................................................... ..4 - 34
(2) RECALL .........................................................4 - 35
4.17 Automatic Setting at Power ON ....................................4 - 36
4.18 Electric Field Intensity Measurement (dBu/m) .................. ..4 - 37
4.19 QP Value Measurement (Quasi-peak Value Measurement) .......... ..4 - 39
4.20 Normalize .........................................................4 - 42
4.21 Occupied Frequency Band Width (OBW)
Measurement (only for R4131D) ....................................4 - 47
4.22 3dB DOWN,3dB DOWN LOOP,NEXT PEAK Function
(only for R4131D) .............................................. ..4 - 49
4.23 Plotter Output ................................................. ..4 - 52

5. APPLIED MEASURING METHOD .......................................... ..5 - 1

5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency and Index of AM Signal .... ..5 - 2
5.1.1 Measurement of AM Wave When the Modulation Frequency Is Low
and Modulation Index Is Large .............................. ..5 - 3
5.1.2 Measurement of AM Wave When Modulation Frequency is High and
Modulation Index is Small .....................................5 - 7
5.2 Measurement of FM Wave .......................................... ..5 - 10
5.2.1 Measurement of FM Wave When Modulation Frequency Is Low .... 5 - 1 0
5.2.2 Measurement of FM Wave for High Modulation Frequency ...... ..5 - 1 3
5.2.3 Measurement of Peak Deviation ( f peak) of FM Wave ........ .5 - 15
5.2.4 How to Obtain Modulation Index m when FM Modulation Index m
Is Small ......................................................5 - 17

C - 2 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Table of Contents

6. GPIB CONNECTION AND ITS PROGRAMMING .............................. .6 - 1

6.1 Outline of GPIB ............................................... .6 - 2
6.2 Standards .........................................................6 - 4
6.2.1 GPIB Specifications ......................................... .6 - 4
6.2.2 Interface Function .......................................... .6 - 5
6.3 GPIB Handling Method ............................................ .6 - 6
6.3.1 For Connection to Component Devices ........................ .6 - 6
6.3.2 Setting of ADDRESS S W ......... ............................. ..6 - 6
6.3.3 Programming ................................................. ..6 - 7
6.4 Setting of Each Function ........................................ ..6 - 8
6.4.1 Setting of Center Frequency ................................ ..6 - 9
(1) When the Center Frequency Is Set Using the Command
for Setting the TUNING Knob ................................ ..6 - 9
(2) When the Value of Center Frequency is Set D i r e c t l y ........ .6 - 1 0
6.4.2 Setting of Frequency Span ....................................6 - 11
(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Key
on Front Panel .............................................. .6 - 11
(2) When the Value of Frequency Span Is Set D i r e c t l y .......... .6 - 12
6.4.3 Setting of Reference Level ....................................6 - 12
(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Key
on Front Panel .............................................. ..6 - 13
(2) When the Value of the Reference Level Is Set Directly ..... ..6 - 14
6.4.4 Setting of Marker ........................................... ..6 - 14
(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Data Knob ..... ..6 - 14
(2) When the Value of Marker Frequency Is Set Directly ........ ..6 - 15
6.4.5 Setting of Resolution Band Width ........................... ..6 - 16
(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the K e y ..............6 - 16
(2) When the Resolution Band Width Is Set D i r e c t l y ...............6 - 17
6.4.6 Setting of VIDEO FiLTeR Band Width ......................... ..6 - 18
(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the K e y ..............6 - 18
(2) When the Value of VIDEO FiLTeR Band Width Is Set Directly .. 6 - 1 9
6.4.7 Setting of Sweep Time (SWEEP TIME/DIV) ..................... ..6 - 19
(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the K e y ..............6 - 20
(2) When the Sweep Time Is Set Directly ........................ ..6 - 2 1
6.5 Output of Setting Conditions ......................................6 - 22
6.5.1 "OP" Command ................................................ ..6 - 22
6.5.2 Format of Output Data ....................................... ..6 - 23
(1) Header .........................................................6 - 24
(2) Block Delimiter ............................................. ..6 - 2 6
6.5.3 Mode String ................................................. ..6 - 2 7
6.6 Input/Output of Trace Data ...................................... ..6 - 30
6.6.1 Output of Trace Data ........................................ ..6 - 31
(1) Method to Output the Trace Data with ASCII C o d e ..............6 - 31
(2) Method to Output Data with the Binary C o d e ................. ..6 - 32
6.6.2 Input of Trace Data ......................................... ..6 - 34
(1) Method to Input the Trace Data with the ASCII C o d e ........ ..6 - 3 4
(2) Method to Input the Trace Data with the Binary Code ....... ..6 - 3 5
6.7 Service Request ................................................. ..6 - 3 7
(1) Status Byte ................................................. ..6 - 37
(2) Output of Status Byte ....................................... ..6 - 38

C - 3 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Table of Contents

6.8 Notes in Programming ............................................ ..6 - 39

(1) Noteworthy Points in Sending a Command ..................... ..6 - 39
(2) Noteworthy Points in Spectrum Analysis when the Frequency
Span Is Made Narrower ....................................... ..6 - 39
(3) Noteworthy Points for the Setting of Center Frequency
When the Frequency Span Is Less Than 10 MHz ................ ..6 - 40
6.9 List of GPIB Codes .............................................. .6 - 41

7. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ........................................ ..7 - 1

7.1 Defects and Abnormal stresses ....................................7 - 2
7.2 Notes in Storing and Shipping this Equipment ................... ..7 - 3

8. TECHNICAL DATA OF FUNCTION AND ACCESSORIES ....................... .8 - 1

8.1 Technical Data of Function ...................................... .8 - 2
(1) Frequency Specification ..................................... .8 - 2
(2) Amplitude Specification ..................................... .8 - 3
(3) Sweep Specification ......................................... .8 - 5
(4) Input Specification ......................................... .8 - 5
(5) Display Unit Specification ...................................8 - 5
(6) Output Specification ........................................ .8 - 6
(7) General Specifications ...................................... .8 - 6
8.2 Accessories .......................................................8 - 7

9. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ............................................ .9 - 1

9.1 Outline .......................................................... .9 - 2
9.1.1 Basic Operations ............................................ .9 - 2
9.1.2 R4131 Series Configuration ................................. .9 - 5
9.2 RF Block ......................................................... .9 - 7
9.2.1 First Mixer ................................................. .9 - 8
(1) 3.6 GHz Low-pass Filter ..................................... .9 - 8
(2) 4.0 GHz Band Pass Filter .....................................9 - 8
(3) First Mixer ................................................. .9 - 8
9.2.2 Second Mixer ................................................ .9 - 8
(1) 4.0 GHz Band Pass Filter .....................................9 - 9
(2) Second Local Oscillator ..................................... .9 - 9
(3) Second Mixer ................................................ .9 - 9
9.2.3 Third and Fourth Mixers ..................................... .9 - 9
(1 ) 226.42 MHz Preamplifier ..................................... .9 - 9
(2) Third Mixer ................................................. .9 - 9
(3) 200 MHz Crystal Oscillator ...................................9 - 10
(4) Gain Control Amplifier ...................................... .9 - 10
(5) 30 MHz Crystal Oscillator ....................................9 - 11
9.3 YT0_C0NT/IF Board ............................................... .9 - 12
9.3.1 IF Filter ................................................... .9 - 1 2
(1) Input 3.58 MHz Band Pass Filter ............................ .9 - 13
(2) Gain Adjust Amplifier ....................................... .9 - 13
(3) Crystal Filter .............................................. .9 - 15
(4) LC Filter ................................................... .9 - 15
(5) Step Amplifier .............................................. .9 - 16

C - 4 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Table of Contents

9.3.2 YTO Controller and AFC ...................................... 9 - 17

(1 ) YTO Controller .............................................. 9 - 18
(2) AFC .......................................................... 9 - 2 9
9.4 Analog Board .................................................... 9 - 21
9.4.1 Log Amplifier ............................................... 9 - 21
9.4.2 Ramp Generator .............................................. 9 - 24
(1 ) Current Source .............................................. 9 - 25
(2) Ramp Generator .............................................. 9 - 26
9.4.3 A/D Converter ............................................... 9 - 2 8
(1) X-axis A/D Converter ................................... . 9 - 39
(2) Y-axis A/D Converter ........................................ 9 - 39
9.4.4 Analyzer Test ............................................... 9 - 3 0

10. CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS ....................................... 10 - 1

10.1 Preparation .................................................... 10 - 2
10.2 A/D Adjustment (Analog Board) (BLR-015117) .................... 10 - 4
10.3 LOG Amplifier Adjustment (Analog Board) (BLR-015117) ......... 10 - 6
10.4 IF Filter Adjustment (YTO_CONT/IF Board ....................... 10 - 8
10.4.1 3.58 MHz BPF Adjustment .................................... 1 0 - 8
10.4.2 Crystal Filter Adjustment .................................. 10 - 9
10.4.3 LC Filter Adjustment ....................................... 10 - 11
10.4.4 Resolution Bandwidth Level Adjustment ..................... 10 - 12
10.4.5 Step Amplifier Adjustment ................................. 10 - 13
10.5 YTO_CONT Adjustment (YTO_CONT/IF Board) (BLR-015116) ......... 10 - 15
10.6 RF Block Adjustment ............................................ 10 - 19
10.6.1 Third Local Oscillator Adjustment ......................... 10 - 19
10.6.2 Second Local Oscillator Adjustment ........................ 10 - 19
10.6.3 Fourth Local Oscillator Adjustment ........................ 10 - 19
10.7 Location Diagram of YTO CONT/IF Board ......................... 10 - 20
10.8 Location Diagram of Analog Board .............................. 10 - 21

11 . PERFORMANCE TESTING ............................................... 11 -1

11.1 preparation ................................................... 11 -2
11.2 General Precautions ........................................... 11 -3
11.3 Frequency Span Accuracy ....................................... 11 -4
11.4 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy ............................ 11 - 10
11.5 Residual F M ................................................... 11 - 12
11.6 Noise Sidebands ............................................... 11 - 15
11.7 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy ................................ 11 - 17
11.8 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity ............................. 11 - 22
11.9 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Accuracy ...................... 11 - 24
11.10 LOG Linearity and LIN L i n e a r i t y ........................ . 11 - 26
11.11 Reference Level Accuracy ..................................... 11 - 29
11.12 Residual Responses ........................................... 11 - 31
11.13 Gain Compression ............................................. 11 - 32
11.14 Frequency Response ........................................... 11 - 34
11.15 Average Noise Level .......................................... 11 - 37
11.16 Sweep Time A c c u r a c y .......................................... 11 - 39
11.17 Calibrated Output Accuracy ................................... 11 - 42

C - 5 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Table of Contents

12. MAINTENANCE DATA .................................................. 12 -1

12.1 preparation .................................................... 12 -2
12.2 Location Diagram (Top & Bottom) ....... ........................ 12 -4
12.3 Location Diagram for RF ........................................ 12 -6
12.4 Block Diagram .................................................. 12 -7
12.5 Self Test ....................................................... 12 -8

APPENDIX
A .1 Explanation of Terminologies .................................... A -2
A. 2 Level Conversion Table .......................................... A -9
A.3 Parts Location and Circuit Diagrams ............................ A - 10

List of Figures ........................................................ F -1

List of Tables ......................................................... T -1

List of E x a m p l e s ..... ................................................. E -1

External View

C - 6* Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

List of Figures

LIST OF FIGURES

No. Title_________________________ Page

1-1 Check for Fuse ...................................... ....... 1

1-2 Plug and Adaptor of Power Supply Cable ............ ....... 1 - 7
1-3 Input of Excessive Signal Level .................... ....... 1 - 8

2-1 Screen of Spectrum Analyzer ........................ ....... 2 - 2

2-2 Initialization screen .............................. ....... 2 - 3
2-3 Input the Calibration Signal ....................... ....... 2 - 4
2-4 Setting Center Frequency to 200 MHz ....................... 2 - 5
2-5 Setting the Frequency Span to 2 MHz ....................... 2 - 6
2-6 Setting the Reference Level to -30 dB ..................... 2 - 7
2-7 Setting the Marker to the Peak of the
Measured Signal ............................................ 2 - 8

3-1 Description of Front Panel ......................... ....... 3 - 2

3-2 Description of Each Key in the NORMAL Mode ........ ....... 3 -5
3-3 Description of Each Key in the SHIFT Mode ......... ....... 3 -6
3-4 Rear Panel .......................................... ....... 3 - 7
3-5 Indication of CRT Display .......................... ....... 3 - 10

4-1 Initial Screen ............................................. 4 - 3

4-2 Change in Center Frequency ......................... ....... 4 - 5
4-3 CF ADJ .............................................. ....... 4 - 7
CF ADJ (cont'd) ............................................ 4 - 8
4-4 Making the Frequency Span Narrow and
Spectrum Expand ............................................ 4 - 9
4-5 ZERO SPAN Mode ...................................... ....... 4 - 10
4-6 Change in Resolution Band Width .................... ....... 4 - 1 1
4-7 Change in Reference Level .......................... ....... 4 - 12
4-8 Ordinates Axis Scale ............................... ....... 4 - 13
4-9 Input Attenuator Displaying Position ...................... 4 - 1 5
4-10 Display Line ........................................ ....... 4 - 16
4-11 Operation of Marker ................................ ....... 4 - 17
4-12 PEAK Search ......................................... ....... 4 - 18
4-13 M a r K e R — > Center Frequency ......................... ....... 4 - 19
4-14 SIGnal TRacK ........................................ ....... 4 - 20
4-15 MARKER PAUSE ........................................ ....... 4 - 21
4-16 Setting of NOISE/Hz ................................ ....... 4 - 21
4-17 VIDEO F i L T e R ........................................ ....... 4 - 22
4-18 Sweep Time .......................................... ....... 4 - 23
4-19 SAMPLE DET (R4131) ................................. ....... 4 - 26
4-20 POSI PK DET (R4131) ................................ ....... 4 - 26
4-21 NORMAL DET (R41 31B/BN/D/DN) ........................ ....... 4 - 27
4-22 Setting the Measured Signal to the
Center Frequency ........................................... 4 - 29
4-23 Two-screen Display with a New WRITE Waveform ...... ....... 4 - 3 0

F - 1 Sep 27/93
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

List of Figures

No. ________________________ Title_________________________ Page

4-24 Two-Screen Display of Secondary Harmonic Wave and

STORE W a v e f o r m ............................................. 4 - 30
4-25 MAX HOLD ............................................ ....... 4 - 31
4-26 Two-screen Display of the Maximum Hold Contents
and WRITE W a v e f o r m ................................. ....... 4 - 32
4-27 SAVE/RECALL Waveform M e m o r y ........................ ....... 4 - 34
4-28 SAVE Screen ......................................... ....... 4 - 34
4-29 RECALL Screen ....................................... ....... 4 - 35
4-30 Relationship between Frequency and Calibration Factor
in the half-wave dipole antenna .................... ....... 4 - 41
4-31 Direct Connection between Tracking Generator
and System .......................................... ....... 4 - 42
4-32 Moving the through W a v e f o r m ........................ ....... 4 - 43
4-33 Moving the Display Line ............................ ....... 4 - 43
4-34 Normalize ........................................... ....... 4 - 44
4-35 Connection of Measured Cable ....................... ....... 4 - 45
4-36 Cable Loss Characteristic .......................... ....... 4 - 4 5
4-37 Reading the Characteristic of Waveform from the
Marker Display ............................................. 4 - 46
4-38 Example of OBW Measurement ......................... ....... 4 - 48
4-39 PLOT Function Selection Screen ..................... ....... 4 - 5 2

5-1 AM Signal Wave ...................................... ....... 5 - 2

5-2 Set-up in Measurement of Modulation W a v e .......... ....... 5 - 3
5-3 Setting the Center Frequency to the Frequency of
the Measured Signal ................................ ....... 5 - 3
5-4 Setting the Ordinates Axis Scale to LINEAR ........ .......5 - 4
5-5 Reading the Time Display of Marker ................. ....... 5 - 5
5-6 Reading the Difference from the Time Indication of
the Adjacent Peak .................................. ....... 5 - 6
5-7 Reading the Emax ........................................... 5 - 6
5-8 Reading the Emin ........................................... 5 - 6
5-9 Measurement of AD Wave When Modulation Frequency is
High and Modulation Index is Small ........................ 5 - 7
5-10 Relationship Between the Value of (Sideband Level
Egg - Carrier Level E q ) and Modulation
Index m (%) ......................................... ....... 5 - 9
5-11 Measurement of FM Wave When Modulation Frequency
I s Low .............................................. ....... 5 - 11
5-12 Putting the Marker on the Peak of Demodulation Wave
and Reading Its Time Indication .................... ....... 5 - 1 2
5-13 Obtaining the Time Interval T(s) of
Demodulation Wave .................................. ....... 5 - 13
5-14 Measurement of FM Wave When Modulation Frequency
Is High ............................................. ....... 5 - 14
5-15 Reading the Modulation Frequency by Indication of
the Marker .......................................... ....... 5 - 14
5— 16 Waveform When Afpeak is Small ...................... ....... 5 - 15

F - 2 Oct 20/89
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

List of Figures

No. ________________________ Title_________________________ Page

5-17 Waveform When Afpea^ is Large ...................... 5- 16

5-1 8 How to Obtain Modulation Index m When FM Modulation
Index m Is Small .................................... 5 - 18

6-1 Outline of GPIB ..................................... 6 - 3

6-2 Signal Line Termination ............................ 6 - 4
6-3 GPIB Connector Pins Assignment Diagram ............ 6-5
6-4 ADDRESS Switch ...................................... 6- 7
6-5Correlation Between Screen Grids and Trace Data .... 6-30
6-6 GPIB Code for each Key ............................. 6 - 43

9-1 Block Diagram of This Equipment .................... 9 - 4

9-2 RF Block ............................................ 9 - 7
9-3 First Mixer Block Diagram .......................... 9 - 8
9-4 Second Mixer Block Diagram ......................... 9 - 8
9-5 Second Local Oscillator ............................ 9 - 9
9-6 Double-balanced Mixer .............................. 9 - 10
9-7 Gain Control Amplifier ............................. 9 - 10
9-8 IF Filter ........................................... 9 - 12
9-9 Gain Adjust Amplifier .............................. 9 - 14
9-10 Crystal Filter ...................................... 9 - 15
9-1 1 LC Filter ........................................... 9 - 15
9-12 Step Amplifier ...................................... 9 - 16
9-13 YTO Controller & AFC ............................... 9 - 17
9-14 SAMP & HOLD ......................................... 9 - 19
9-15 Flowchart for AFC ................................... 9 - 20
9-16 Log Amplifier Schematic D i a g r a m .................... 9 - 21
9-17 One Stage of 10 dB Amplifier ....................... 9 - 22
9-18 Block Diagram ....................................... 9 - 24
9-19 Current Source Circuit ............................. 9 - 25
9-20 Ramp Generator ...................................... 9 - 26
9-21 A/D Converter ...... ................................ 9 - 28
9-22 Analyzer Test ....................................... 9 - 30
9-23 Analyzer Test Display .............................. 9 - 31

10-1 Log Amplifier Adjustment ........................... ......10 - 6

10-2 3.58 MHz BPF Adjustment ............................ ......10 - 8
10-3 Waveform of 3.58 MHz BPF ........................... ......1 0 - 9
10-4 Crystal Filter Adjustment .......................... ...... 10 - 9
10-5 Waveform of Crystal Filter ......................... ...... 10 - 10
10-6 LC Filter Adjustment ............................... ...... 10 - 11
10-7 Step AMP Adjustment ................................ ...... 10 - 13
10-8 Analyzer Test Display .............................. ...... 10 - 15
10-9 Adjustment for Main Span ........................... ...... 10 - 16
10-1 0 Location Diagram of YTO CONT/IF B o a r d ....................10 - 20
10-11 Location Diagram of Analog Board ................... ...... 1 0 - 2 1

F - 3 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

List of Figures

No. ________________________ Title_________________________ Page

1-1 Frequency Span 4 GHz Test ................................. 11 - 5

1-2 Frequency Span Test S e t u p .................................11 - 6
1-3 Frequency Span 500 MHz Test ........................ ......11 - 7
7-4 Frequency Span 200 kHz Test ........................ ......11 - 9
1-5 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Setup ...... ...... 1 1 - 1 0
1-6 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test ............. ......1 1 - 1 1
1-7 Residual FM Test S e t u p .............................. ......11 - 12
1-8 Residual FM Test .................................... ......11 - 13
1-9 Residual FM to AM Conversion D i s p l a y ............... ......11 - 14
1-10 Noise Sidebands Test S e t u p ......................... ......11 - 15
1-11 Noise Sidebands Measurement ........................ ......11 - 16
1-12 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Setup ........... ......1 1 - 1 8
1-13 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy T e s t ................. ...... 11 - 19
1-14 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Setup ..............11 - 22
1-15 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Accuracy Test Setup . 11-24
1-16 LOG/LIN Linearity Test S e t u p ....................... ......11 - 27
1-17 Reference Level Accuracy Test Setup ................ ......1 1 - 2 9
1-18 Gain Compression Test Setup ........................ ......11 - 33
1-19 Frequency Response Test Setup ...................... ......11 - 35
1-20 Frequency Response (100 kHz - 3.6 GHz) ............. ......11 - 3 6
1-21 Maximum Noise ....................................... ......11 - 38
1-22 Average Noise Level Test ..................................11 - 38
1-23 Sweep Time Accuracy Test S e t u p ..................... ......11 - 40
1-24 Sweep Time Accuracy Test ............................ ......11 - 41
1-25 Calibrated Output Accuracy Test Setup ....................1 1 - 4 3

2-1 Location Diagram (Bottom View) ..................... ......12 - 4

2-2 Location Diagram (Top View) ...............................12 - 5
2-3 Location Diagram for RF ...................................12 - 6
2-4 Block Diagram ....................................... ......12 - 7

A— 1 IF Bandwidth ........................................ A - 2
A-2 Noise Sideband ...................................... A - 4
A-3 Bandwidth Selectivity ............................... A- 5
A-4 Bandwidth Switching Accuracy ....................... A- 6
A-5 Reference Level ..................................... A - 6
A-6 V.S.W.R............................................... A - 7
A-7 Spurious Response ................................... A- 8
A-8 Level Conversion Table .............................. A- 9

F - 4* Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

List of Tables

LIST OF TABLES

No. ________________________ Title_________________________ Page

1-1 Major Function of R4131 ................................... 1 ~ 3

1-2 R4131C/D Standard Accessories ............... ....... ...... 1 - 4
1-3 R4131CN/DN Standard Accessories .................... ...... 1 _ 4
1-4 Power Supply Conditions ................................... 1 - 6

4-1 Initialization Condition .................................. 4 - 2

4-2 SAVE/RECALL Enabled Panel Setting .................. ...... 4 - 33
4-3 Screen Stored in Each Trace Mode ................... ...... 4 - 34
4-4 CISPR Standards for QP Value Measurement Basic
Characteristic ...................................... ...... 4 - 3 9
4-5 PLOT TYPE of Each Plotter ................................. 4 - 53

6-1 Interface Function .................................. ...... 6 - 5

6-2 Standard Bus Cables (To Be Purchased Separately) ... 6 -6
6-3 Setting of ADDRESS Switch ................................. 6 - 7
6-4 List of GPIB Codes .................................. ...... 6 - 41
6-5 GPIB Code Corresponding to Each Key ................ ...... 6 -42
6-6 Direct Set GPIB Codes ............................... ...... 6 - 44
6-7 Unit Display GPIB Codes ................................... 6 - 44
6-8 Numeric Value Code in Setting Condition Input ..... ...... 6 -45
6-9 Mode String ......................................... ...... 6 - 45
6-10 Status Byte ......................................... ...... 6 - 45

9-1 Tune Voltage Data ................................... ...... 9 - 18

10-1 Equipment and Tools Required for Calibration

and Adjustment ...................................... ...... 10 - 2
10-2 Maintenance Tools Required for Calibration
and Adjustment ...................................... ...... 10 - 2
10-3 TR20, TP21, TP22 Voltage Adjustment Values ............... 1 0 - 4
10-4 Step Amplifier Adjustment .......................... ...... 10 - 14

11-1 Equipment Required for Performance Testing ........ ...... 11 - 2

11-2 Frequency Span 500 MHz to 500 kHz Test ............. ...... 11 - 8
11-3 Tests for Frequency Spans of 200 kHz or Less ............. 1 1 - 9
11-4 Resolution Bandwidth Test 1 MHz to 10 kHz .......... ...... 11 - 20
11-5 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 3 kHz to 1 kHz .. 11-21
11-6 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty .................... ...... 11 - 25
11-7 LOG Linearity ....................................... ...... 11 - 28
11-8 Reference Level Accuracy ............................ ...... 11 - 30
11-9 Sweep Time Accuracy ................................ ...... 11 - 4 0

12-1 Equipment and Tools Required For ................... ...... 1 2 - 2

12-2 Maintenance Tools Required for Troubleshooting .... ...... 1 2 - 3

T - 1* May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

List of Examples

LIST OF EXAMPLES

No. ________________________ Title_________________________ Page

6-1 Setting the Center Frequency to 500 MHz and

Frequency Span to 2 MHz ............................ 6 - 8
6-2 Setting the Center Frequency to 1 GHz .............. 6-9
6-3 Setting the Center Frequency to 1 GHz Directly .... 6-10
6-4 Setting the Frequency Span to 20 MHz ............... 6-11
6-5 Setting the Frequency Span to 20 MHz Directly ..... 6-12
6-6 Setting the Reference Level to -30 d B m ............. 6-13
6-7 Setting the Reference Level to -30 dBm Directly .... 6-14
6-8 Setting the Marker Frequency to 1 GHz ............. 6-14
6-9 Setting the Marker Frequency to 1 GHz Directly .... 6-15
6-10 Setting the Resolution Band Width to 10 kHz ....... 6-16
6-11 Setting the Resolution Band Width to
10 kHz Directly ..................................... 6 - 17
6-12 Making the Resolution Band Width into the Automatic
Setting Mode ........................................ 6 - 17
6-13 Setting the VIDEO FiLTeR Band Width to 100 Hz ..... 6-18
6-14 Setting VIDEO FiLTeR Band Width to 100 Hz Directly . 6-19
6-15 Setting the Sweep Time to 200 ms/DIV................ 6-20
6-16 Setting the Sweep Time to 200 ms/DIV Directly ..... 6-21
6-17 Setting the Value of the Center Frequency and
Reference Level, and Making These Data Display
by Reading It from This Equipment .................. 6-23
6-18 Setting the Header to OFF and Fetching the Value of
Center Frequency as a Character String. Next,
Setting the Header to ON and Fetching the Value of
Center Frequency as a Character String............. 6-25
6-19 Detecting the Value of Attenuator by Making the Mode
String Output ....................................... 6 - 29
6-20 Output the trace data in memory with ASCII code, and
store in array variable............................. 6-32
6-21 The trace data in the memory is output with the
binary code to be stored in an array variable...... 6-33
6-22 The trace data is assumed to be provided in numeric
array variable A(I). The data in A(I) is then input
to the VIEW screen memory of this equipment with
the ASCII code....................................... 6-34
6-23 The trace data is assumed to be provided in the
numeric array variable A(I). The data in A(I) is
then input in the VIEW screen memory of this
equipment with the binary code...................... 6 - 35
6-24 ZERO CAL is judged to be ended by reading the
status byte.......................................... 6-38

E - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4 73 7 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

List of Examples

No. ________________________ Title_________________________ Page

6-25 A command is delimited with a space (>_<) or comma (,)

and sent to this equipment.......................... 6 - 39
6-26 The frequency span is made narrow up to 50 kHz for
the 200 MHz reference signal........................ 6 - 39
6-27 When the Frequency of the 200 MHz Reference Signal
Is Read ............................................. 6 - 40

E - 2* Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________________________________________________ 1 . General Description

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Information and notes necessary to use this instrument for Operating

Manual safety are written. Read before this instrument is used.

1 - 1 Jan 27/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

___________________________________________1.1 How to Use this Operation Manual

1.1 How to Use this Operation Manual

This manual proceeds from basic knowledge to application so that anyone

can master the abundant functions of this equipment even when using such
an intelligent spectrum analyzer for the first time. Those who are
accustomed to using an intelligent spectrum analyzer can start the
measurement at once merely by referring to [Chapter 4. OPERATING
PROCEDURE]. The functional description of each key is given in [Chapter
3. DESCRIPTION OF PANEL SURFACE LAYOUT AND DISPLAY].

1 - 2 Oct 20/89
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__ 1.2 Outline of Products

1.2 Outline of Products

The R4131 covers a band-width as wide as 10 kHz to 3500 kHz and is

controlled by a microcomputer. This analyzer features easy confirmation
of all measuring conditions, since its
frequency span is 4 GHz to 50 kHz,
resolution is 1 MHz to 1 kHz,
level data resolution by a marker is 0.05 dB,
tube surface dynamic range is 80 dB,
and the setting conditions of the its major functions are shown on its CRT
display.

The panel of this equipment enables its three major functions (center
frequency, frequency span, and reference level) to be independent of each
other, and its layout makes for excellent operability. In addition, the
resolution band, sweep time and input attenuator values are set
automatically by its AUTO feature.

Table 1-1 lists the other major functions of R4131.

Table 1-1 Major Function of R4131

Major function* R4131C R4131D R4131CN R41 31DN

Input impedance so n 75 n
Accuracy in ±10 MHz *100 kHz ±10 MHz *±100 kHz
frequency display
QP value automatic
operation
Antenna factor Standard mounting
automatic operation
GPIB control
Copy Direct plotting with a plotter
SAVE/RECALL function Storing three setting conditions in its non-volatile
memory.
Storing three display waveforms in its non-volatile
memory.
Possible to set automatically at power ON.
Displaying function WRITE and VIEW Screen display
POSI PEAK POST/NEG POSI PEAK POSI/NEG
display display display display
Occupied band-width Standard
—
Configuration

Note: *Where frequency^ 2.5 GHz after zero calibration

1 - 3 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

1.3 Before Starting the Use

1.3 Before Starting the Use

1.3.1 Appearance Check and Accessory Check

After R4131 was received, first check flaws or damage in appearance

that could have occurred during its transportation.

Next, check the standard accessories for their quantity and standards,
referring to Table 1-2 for R4131C/D and to Table 1-3 for R4131CN/DN.
If any flaw, damage, shortage in accessories, etc., is found, contact
the nearest dealer or the sales and support offices.

Table 1-2 R4131 C/D Standard Accessories

No. Name Type name Q'ty Remarks

1 Fuse 218005 2
2 Allen wrench 3 mm 1
3 Input cable A01036-1 500 1 50 ft BNC cable, 1 . 5 m
4 NC-BNC adapter JUG-201A-U 1
5 Power cable 1
6 Instruction manual ER41 31 1 English

*1 ADVANTEST provides the power cables for each country.

Table 1-3 R4131CN/DN Standard Accessories

No. Name Type name Q ’ty Remarks

1 Fuse 21 8005 2
2 Allen wrench 3 mm 1
3 Input cable D3S015 (Black) 1 75 ft BNC cable, 1.5 m
4 NC-BNC adapter BA-A1 65 1
5 C1 5 adapter NCP-NFJ 1 R4131DN only
6 Power cable *1 1
7 Instruction manual ER4131 1 English

*1 ADVANTEST provides the power cables for each country.

Note: Order the addition of the accessory etc. with type name.

1 - 4 Mar 16/96
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________________________ 1.3 Before Starting the Use

1.3.2 Environmental Conditions for Use

(T) Refrain from using this equipment in a place subject to much vibration
direct sunlight, and where corrosive gas is generated.
The unit is designed for indoor use.
Also, do not use it where the ambient temperature is outside Ooc to
50oc an(3 relative humidity is less than 85%.
If may occasionally be subjected to temperatures between (K>c and
-10o q without degradation of its safety.

(2) Since this equipment employs a suction type cooling fan to prevent the
internal temperature from rising, install this equipment 10 cm or more
from the wall, and do not place anything close to its back nor use
this equipment in an incorrect position.

(3) Although the equipment design for noise from the AC power supply line,
use it allows where there is low noise as far as possible, and use a
noise filter for noisy places.

(4) The storage temperature range for this equipment is -200^ to

+700(2^ when this equipment is not used for a long period of time,
store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight, covered with vinyl
or placed in a cardboard box.

1.3.3 Before turning This Analyzer on

----------------------------------- WARNING -------------------------------

1. Before any other connection is made, make sure this instrument has
been properly grounded through the protective conductor of the AC
power cable to a socket outlet provided with protective earth
contact. Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor,
inside or outside the instrument, or disconnection of the protective
earth terminal can result in personal injury.

2. Before turning this analyzer on, make sure that it is set to the
voltage of the power supply (Refer to Table 1-4.).

3. If the fuse rating is not as specified, this unit may be broken.

(1) Power Supply Condition

The power supply conditions of R4131 are given in Table 1-4.

1 - 5 Jan 27/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

1.3 Before Starting the Use

Table 1-4 Power Supply Conditions

Power supply Condition

Input voltage 90 V to 132 V or 198 V to 250 V rmp
Frequency 48 to 66 Hz
Power consumption Less than 120 VA

CAUTION

When the power supply does not conform the conditions given in
Table 1-4, this equipment could break down.

(2) Check for Fuse

The fuse of the power supply AC line is T5 A/250 V for either 90 V to

132 V or 198 V to 250 V in input voltage.
Check the fuse set in the power connector of the rear panel as shown
in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Check for Fuse

-------------------------------- CAUTION ------------------------------

When used with a fuse not in the specified value, this equipment could
break down.

1 - 6 Jan 27/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________________________________ 1.3 Before Starting the Use

(3) Check for Power Supply Cable

Turn OFF the POWER switch on the front panel of this equipment. Next,
connect the attached power supply cable to the AC LINE connector. The
plug is a 3-pin type and the round pin in the middle is the earth.

When using the R4131C, R4131CN, R4131D, R4131DN defend the following.

• Connect power plug with the outlet prepared the protective earth
terminal.
• Do not use extension cable without a protective conductor.

When a 2-pin adaptor is used, be sure to connect either the ground

wire led from the adaptor or the ground terminal located on the rear
panel to the ground.

----------------------------------- - WARNING - — --------------------------

Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the R4131C,

R4131CN, R4131D, R4131DN or disconnection of the protective earth terminal
is likely to make the instrument dangerous.
Intentional interruption is prohibited.

1 - 7 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

1.3 Before Starting the Use

(4) Maximum Input

CAUTION

The maximum level that can be input to the INPUT connector of this
equipment is as follows. When a voltage beyond this level is input,
the input mixer unit, etc., breaks down, entailing heavy repair
expense. When the input signal level might exceed the maximum input
level for this equipment, be sure to lower the signal level
sufficiently by using an external attenuator, etc., and then input it.

R4131 C/D Maximum input level: +20 dBm (INPUT ATT 20 dB or

more)
AC coupe : ±25 VDC max.
R4131CN/DN Maximum input level: + 127 dBjJ (INPUT ATT 20 DB or
more)
AC couple : ±25 VDC

Figure 1-2 Input of Excessive Signal Level

1 - 8* May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________ 2. Using R4131 for the First Time

2. USING R4131 FOR THE FIRST TIME

This chapter describes the fundamentals of operating R4131 for those using
for the first time.

Note: Before turning ON the power for this equipment, read through
Section 1.3, Before Use.

2 - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

2.1 Screen of Spectrum Analyzer

2.1 Screen of Spectrum Analyzer

Figure 2-1 shows the screen of R4131, indicating the relationship among
the center frequency, span width, and reference level.

When the center frequency is changed, the

position of the screen in the horizontal
direction moves right and left.

Center
frequency
1

When the span side is changed, the size of

the screen in the horizontal direction
increases or decreases.

«— Span width
i

When the reference level is changed, the

position of the screen in the vertical
direction moves up and down.

On the screen, the horizontal direction

represents the frequency and its vertical
direction represents the amplitude (level).

Frequency
Figure 2-1 Screen of Spectrum Analyzer

2-2 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

2.2 Basic Operating Procedure

2.2 Basic Operating Procedure

While operating actually using the calibration signal of this equipment,

learn how to use the most important keys.

(1) Initialization Screen

First, turn ON the power.

When the power ON automatic setting function is in operation or a key
SHIFT OFF
is pressed after the power ON, press the Q and Q keys to
initialize the screen as shown Figure 2-2.

Note: See Section 4.17, Power ON Automatic Setting.

Figure 2-2 Initialization screen

(2) Input of Measurement Signal

Referring to Figure 2-3, input the calibration signal of this

equipment to the terminal INPUT.

Calibration signal

R4131C/D Frequency: 200 MHz ±30 kHz

Level : -30 dBm ±0.5 dB

R4131CN/DN Frequency: 200 MHz ±30 kHz

Level : 80 dBu ±0.5 dB

2-3 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

2.2 Basic Operating Procedure

Figure 2-3 Input the Calibration Signal

(3) Setting of Center Frequency

Since the calibration signal is already known to be 200 MHz in

frequency and -30 dBM in output, set the center frequency to 200 MHz.
Turn the data knob counterclockwise to set the spectrum of the input
signal to the center of the CRT.

2-4 Oct 20/89

 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

___________________2.2 Basic Operating Procedure

Turn the data knob, then the waveform moves in the horizontal
direction (Figure 2-4).

Center frequency
i
OdBm 2 0 0 MHz 4GHz
IDdl

- --

—
I,
Jl it\i ilh!
jVitftlA’ JXM !f«U
ST 10ma/ ATT lGdB VF I MHz

Figure 2-4 Setting Center Frequency to 200 MHz

(4) Setting of Frequency Span

Since the frequency span of this equipment is set very wide to 4 GHz
on initialization, change it to 2 MHz.

----------------- c

SI
Press the PL0T key, then the frequency span becomes narrower in steps
of 1-2-5 (Figure 2-5).

2-5 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__________________________________________ 2.2 Basic Operating Procedure

If the spectrum deviates from the center in this case, turn the data
knob to change the center frequency and make it narrower while seizing
the spectrum in the center.

Frequency span
i

Figure 2-5 Setting the Frequency Span to 2 MHz

Since the is selected at initialization in the resolution band

width, it is set to the maximum value automatically according to the
setting condition of the frequency span.

(5) Setting of Reference Level

The reference level of this equipment — the horizontal line on the

top of the screen grid — is set to 0 dB at initialization.
Change it to -30 dB and set the spectrum of the calibration signal to
the reference level.

2-6 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

2.2 Basic Operating Procedure

REFERENCE LEVELL When the REFERENCE LEVEL key is pressed, the

o o reference level goes up and down in steps of 10 dB,
I0 d B / D I V 2 d B/DI V It is set to 10 dB/DIV at initialization.
■ [CClO A R S E
|F I NE
When the COARSE or FINE key is pressed and FINE is
□J selected, the LED on the upper right of this key
lights and the mode is set to FINE.

The 10DB/DIV or 2DB/DIV key is used to change the

o set value in 1-dB steps.
1 0 <J B/ D I V 2 d B/ D I v

I I i«h F3 a

pgnnjgi

REFERENCE LEVEL key

and FINE STEP key

b
o

Reference
level
I

Figure 2-6 Setting the Reference Level to -30 dB

2-7 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

2.2 Basic Operating Procedure

(6) How to Use the MARKER Key

By using the MARKER, you can read the frequency directly at the
displayed marker point and level data.

The following is a description of this procedure:

MARKER
When the Q key is pressed, the LED on its upper lights and the
marker ( O ) appears on the center frequency axis.

Move the marker with the data knob to set the marker to the measured
signal (Figure 2-7). The data of the signal can be read directly
according to the marker frequency and its level.
OFF
When the marker is cleared, press the Q key.

- PEAK search
PEAK
When the Q key is pressed, the marker moves to the maximum level
waveform displayed.

- MarKeR — ► Center Frequency

M KR ►C F
When the Q key is pressed, the marker frequency becomes the
center frequency and the marker returns to the center.

Marker level
Marker frequency
o o •
*0 D -20dBm 200.OOMHz 2MHz
r~1 1Cdk/
MARKER Key and
GkHU
j s MARKER OFF key
D
0-33,
U
k» MkTIK^

O PEAK key and

■0 E3 m
tfMi MKR— *CF key
T3 Jli 0
± \

ST lQma/ VF 1 MHz
3

Figure 2-7 Setting the Marker to the Peak of the Measured Signal

2 - 8 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______ 2.2 Basic Operating Procedure

(7) How to Improve Frequency Accuracy According to the Correction Routine

sh ir t r-j
When the Q , zero cal key is pressed, the frequency correction
routine, ZERO CAL, is executed. (Then, the "ZERO CAL" is displayed on
the bottom right of the CRT.) When the ZERO CAL is executed before
measurement starts, the center frequency accuracy is improved as shown
below:

R4131C/CN Center frequency accuracy 0 to 3.5 GHz : ±10MHz

R4131D/DN Center frequency accuracy 0 to 2.5 GHz : ±100kHz
2.5 GHz to 3.5 GHz: ±10MHz

(8) Warm-up Time

To use this equipment at the specified accuracy, take 30 minutes or

more for its warm-up.

2-9* May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3. Description of
Panel Surface and CRT Display

DESCRIPTION OF PANEL SURFACE AND CRT DISPLAY

This chapter describes each section on the panel and display screen of
this equipment.

3 - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3.1 Description of Front Panel

3.1 Description of Front Panel

Figure 3-1 shows the front panel.

1 Power ON/OFF Switch

The waveform is displayed at power ON and after a self-test

(self-diagnosis).

2 Earphone Jack

This is a jack used for an 8-ohm earphone, to monitor the received

modulated wave with the earphone (TR16191) when this equipment is used
as a fixed tuning receiver.

3 Variable Resistor for Correcting Level Display

This is a variable resistor to correct the level display of this

equipment.

3 - 2 Jan 27/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_____________________________________________3.1 Description of Front Panel

(4) Variable Resistor for Adjusting Brightnesis

This is a variable resistor to correct

the brightness of the CRT display.

(5) Output Connector of Correction Signal

CAL OUT
For R4131C/D 200MHz
-30dBm
Outputs the signal of 200 MHz and -30 dB.

For R4131CN/DN CAL OUT

200MHz
Outputs the signal of 200 MHz and 80 dB. 80dB

(§) Input Connector

For R4131C/D
INPUT 5 0 A
The maximum input level is +20 dBm and 10kHz-3. 5GHz
±25 VDC max. when the input attenuator is + 20dBm MAX
more than 20 dB. ± 25VDC MAX

For R4131CN/DN INPUT 75 n

10kHz-3.5GHz
The maximum input level is +127 dB]j and 127 d B MAX
±25 VDC max. when the input attenuator is ± 25VDC MAX
more than 20 dB.

----------------------------- — CAUTION -----------------------------

Note that the 75 ft input connector is vulnerable when using

R4131CN/DN. Unless the 75 ft NC-BNC type is used for the BNC adaptor,
the input connector breaks down very easily.

(7) Analyzer Control Key

Three basic keys of the spectrum analyzer — center frequency, span

width, and amplitude level — and this equipment are separated into
three sections to be independent of each other for excellent
operability.

3 - 3 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3.1 Description of Front Panel

o
CTR FREQ The center frequency can be set with the data

CD
knob

The frequency span width can be set with the

BED E E I

IEFERINCC

This key can set the reference level.

Also, pressing the SHIFT key sets the SHIFT mode and executes the
function whose name is inscribes in blue immediately below the next
key you press.

3 - 4 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3.2 Description of Each Key (in the NORMAL mode)

3,2 Description o f Each Key {in the NORMAL mode)

Automatically sets, resolution band width (RBW),
The function of each key is the NORMAL mode sweep time and VIDEO FILTER band.width according
is as described in Figure 3-2. to the frequency span. (Indicated with LED.)
Selects the resolution band width setting mode.
Selects the FREQUENCY SPAN SET
(Indicated with LED.) mode. (Indicated with LED.)
LOCAL mode setting: Interrupts the external control
to enable the key input. (In­ Selects the CENTER FREQUENCY SET
dicated with LED in the REMOTE
mode. (Indicated with LED.)
mode.)

Sets the frequency

span and RBW.
Displays the marker.
(Indicated with LED.)
Rewrites the displayed
waveform for each sweeping,
(Indicated with LED.) Erases the marker.
(Indicated with LED.)
Makes the waveform
stand still and
stores it. Sets the data knob: center fre­
quency and the marker frequency.
Displays the stored
waveform. (Indi­
cated with LED.)
Clears the tuning error of the
internal tuning transmitter.

Puts the analyzer into the Sets the marker frequency to

RECALL mode and displays the the center frequency.
memory select screen.

Moves the marker to the highest

Sets the SHIFT mode. level peak on the screen.
(Indicated with LED.)

Sets the input attenuator.

Repeats the START or Sets the reference level.

RESET in the SINGLE
TRIGGER mode.

Selects the level unit.

Changes the reference

Figure 3-2 Description of Each Key
level step. in the NORMAL Mode
Selects the TRIGGER mode.
(The selected trigger mode Sets the sweep tirpe.,
Sets the VIDEO FILTER band width. 3-5 Oct 20/89
is indicated with the LED.)
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3.3 Description of Each Key
(in the SHIFT mode)

3.3 Description of Each Key (in the SHIFT mode)

The function of each key in the SHIFT mode Indicates the display line.
Puts the analyzer into the
is as described in Figure 3-3.
Executes the ZERO SPAN. OPERATION mode of the occupied
Excutes the band width. (RU131D only)

Sets the NORMALIZE mode. Sets the NOISE/H

Sets the initialization condition

Displays the plotter Executes ZERO

output menu screen. CAL.

Draws the display waveform

as MAX HOLD. (Indicated with
LED.) Operates the SIGNAL
TRACK function.

Turn ON/OFF the AFC

mode (RU131D/DN only)

Displays the memory selection

screen as the SAVE mode. Sets the INPUT
ATT. to 0 dB.

Sets the QP VALUE

MEASUREMENT mode. Sets the scale of the
axis of ordinates
to 2 dB/DIV.

Sets the scale of the

axis of ordinates to
10 dB/DIV.

Sets the scale of the

axis ordinates to
LINEAR.
Selects the DISPLAY Selects the DISPLAY Selects the DISPLAY DETECTION
DETECTION mode to DETECTION mode to mode to POS/NEGA PK DT (for
SAMPLE DET. POS PK DT. R4131D/DN only). POS PK DT
for the RU131C/CN. Figure 3-3 Description of Each Key
in the SHIFT Mode

3 _ 6 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________ 3,4 Description of Rear Panel

3.4 Description of Rear Panel

The rear panel is as described in Figure 3-4.

(7) Serial No.

A serial No. of this equipment is printed.

______________________ — ---- Japan only --- -------------------- — — — -----

(2) Ground terminal

Used to connect the unit frame to the ground when neither 3-pin nor
2-pin power cable connector cannot be used.

(3) Connector for AC Power Cable

This connector is a 3-pin type, and the center pin is a terminal for
grounding.
When the upper lid is drawn out, the power fuse can be taken out.

(4) Cool ing Fan

This is a suction type cooling fan.

3-7 Jan 27/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3.4 Description of Rear Panel

(5) Connector for Slope Correction

This connector is used to output the slope correcting voltage 2 V/GHz

for the tracking generator.

((T) Output Connector to XY Recorder of WRITE Waveform

Y. OUT ... approx. 0 to 4 V, and output impedance approx. 220 ft

(7) Output Connector to XY Recorder of WRITE Waveform

X. OUT — approx. -5 V to +5 V, and output impedance approx. 10 Kft

(8) Connector for Probe Power

This is the power supply for accessories, e.g., active probe, etc.

3 POWER
2 1
g
NC
GND
3 -15V
1 4 +15 v

(9) GPIB Connector

This is a terminal used when this equipment is connected to an

external controller or plotter with the GPIB cable.

(£0) Address Switch for GPIB

The GPIB address is set using 1- to 5-digit switches.

(fj) Output Connector to External CRT Display and VIDEO Plotter, etc.

Output impedance ... approx. 75 ft and 1 vp-p, including the

composite signal.

(£2) Output Connector for IF Monitor

This terminal is used to supply IF output 3.58 MHz and approx. 50 ft.
The output level can be set according to the input attenuator and
reference level.

3-8 Sep 27/93

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______ ______________________ 3.4 Description of Rear Panel

{f3) LOCAL OUT Connector for Tracking Generator

1st LOCAL OUT ... more than -5 dBm at 4 GHz to 7.5 GHz

(Q) LOCAL OUT Connector for Tracking Generator

2nd LOCAL COUT ... more than -5 dBm at 3.77 GHz.

--------------------------------- CAUTION ---------------------------------

When connector (f3) and (f|) for the tracking generator is used while
opened, accurate measurement can not be occasionally done.
Connect with the tracking generator or if you do not use the
connector, install attached terminal instrument.

3-9 Sep 27/93

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3.5 How to Read CRT Display Indication

3.5 How to Read CRT Display Indication

Various setting conditions are displayed on the screen. Their indication

and the contents of each indication are shown in Figure 3-5.

UNCAL message
This message is output when the
display data level becomes too
low, in such cases where the sweep­
ing is too fast or the resolution
band width is too narrow compared
Reference level with the frequency span.
Frequency span
Center frequency

-lOdBm 10MHz
Marker Ordinates
frequency" MK f200.01MHz lOdEj!/. ■axis scale
Level---- 3Gk-H2W. -Resolution
PAUSE time- mk p I
a u se : band width

Displayed in Displayed in
the SIGNAL -.SlSfclAL the SAMPLE
TRACK only only in the
detection
mode

Displays the Displayed

level of the during the
display line ZERO cali­
bration

ST 0.5s/ ATT 20dB VF 100Hz\

4
Displayed
during the AFC
operation
(R4131D/DN)
Sweep time Input attenuator video filter band
width

Figure 3-5 Indication of CRT Display

3-10* May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________________________________________________________ 4. Operating Method

4. OPERATING METHOD

This chapter describes the basic operating method of this equipment with
same measuring examples included.

4 - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.1 Initialization

4.1 Initialization
shift □
When the Q , pV eV et key is pressed, the equipment is set to the initial
values as shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Initialization Condition

Set item Initialization condition

Center frequency 2000 MHz

Frequency span 4 GHz
Reference level 0 dBm (:R4131 C/D)
110 dBU (:R4131CN/DN)
Resorution band width 1 MHz
VIDEO FLTR band width 1 MHz
SWEEP TIME 10 mS
INPUT ATT. 10 dB
TRIGGER MODE FREE RUN
Marker OFF
Ordinates axis scale 10 dB/DIV
DETECTION MODE POSI-NEGA PEAK (:R4131D/DN)
POSI PEAK (:R4131C/CN)
TRACE MODE WRITE

4-2 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.1 Initialization

ACHz
inn::
DdBm 2000MHz
1Odi ITcdi/
4lMH*w

±
Mu t*}*)
1 - Hyi is#*®*1
..
ST 10ms/ ATT lOdB VF 1MHz ST 10ms/ ATT lOdB VF 1MHz

(a) R4131C (B) R4131D

(c) R4131CN (d) R4131DN

Figure 4-1 Initial Screen

3 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_____________________________ 4.2 Center Frequency

4.2 Center Frequency

The equipment is set to the CTR FREQ CHANGE mode at the initialization of
the data knob. However, when it is set to the MARKER CHANGE mode, press
CTR FREft
the Q key. Then the LED on the key lights and the equipment is set
to the CTR FREQ SET mode.

When the data knob is turned, the center frequency changes in a range from
0 MHz to 3620 MHz.

The set resolution is 1/200 of the frequency span.

----------------------- Center Frequency Accuracy -------------------

The center frequency accuracy becomes the following range after the
execution of the ZERO CAL in the local feed through (zero waveform):

R4131C/CN 0 Hz to 3.5 GHz : +10 MHz or less

R4131D/DN 0 Hz to 2.5 GHz : +100 kHz or less
2.5 GHz to 3.5 GHz: ±10 MHz or less

4 - 4 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.2 Center Frequency

Display of center frequency

I

CTR FREft
□

Data knob

OdBm 2D0MHz 4GHz

10dh/
B4Ht«

ST 10ma/ ATT lOdB VF 1MHz

Figure 4-2 Change in Center Frequency

4-5 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.3
Frequency Accuracy

4.3 Function to Improve Center Frequency Accuracy

(1) AFC Function (only in R4131D/DN)

Since the AFC circuit is mounted in R4131D/DN, the AFC turns ON from
when the frequency span becomes lower than 200 MHz and displayed as
AFC on the bottom right of the screen. Consequently, the center
frequency accuracy becomes +100 kHz or less after the execution of the
ZERO CAL, described later. (It is confined to the case where the
center frequency is 0 Hz to 2.5 MHz, however.)
SHIFT
To use this equipment with this AFC function kept OFF, key in the Q
and □ keys. (When the AFC is turned OFF, the tracking time is
shortened and the total sweep time becomes shorter.)
SHIFT
To use the equipment with the AFC kept ON again, press the Q and
□ keys, then the AFC circuit starts operating.
AFC
(2) ZERO CALibration
SHIFT ||
Press the Q and ZEBo Cal keys, then ZERO CAL is executed. ("ZERO
CAL" is then indicated on the bottom right of the screen.)

After correcting the center frequency 0 MHz in the local feed through
(zero waveform), the equipment returns to the setting before the
execution of ZERO CAL, thus improving the center frequency accuracy.

Incidentally, although the ZERO CAL data is stored in the non-volatile

memory, execute the ZERO CAL over again to read its correct value.

(3) CF CALibration
CF CAL
Press the Q key, the CF CAL and degausing are executed.
Since this equipment uses an oscillator capable of sweeping a wide
band width as its local oscillator, an error occurs in the oscillation
frequency for the setting when the center frequency is changed sharply
(more than 1 GHz) where the frequency span is narrower (less than
200 MHz). This error can be removed by executing the CF CAL. To
change the center frequency of the R4131 by 1 GHz or more, the
frequency span is widened (as 2 GHz or 4 GHz span) in general. (Since
the center frequency set resolution is 1/200 of the span, the center
frequency does not move in big steps unless the span is widened.)
Consequently, the sweeping is made under the status where the span is
wide, and the degausing is executed naturally. No CF CAL need be
executed in this case.
Usually, it is not necessary to use this CF CAL. Use it only to move
sharply the frequency where the span is narrow in the GPIB control,
etc. CF CAL is not executed when the AFC function is turned ON in the
R4131D/DN.

4-6 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.3 Function to Impro
Frequency Accuracy

(4) CF ADJustment
SHIFT

Press the Q , cp ^ adj keys, then CF ADJ is executed.

By using this function, the center frequency accuracy can be improved
further using the known input signal.
The following is a description of the case where 2.2 GHz (11 times of
CAL OUT 200 MHz) is used as the known frequency signal to read the
value of an unknown frequency in the vicinity of 2.2 GHz.

(T) Set the center frequency to 2.2 GHz. (See Figure 4-3 (a).)

(2) Make the frequency span narrow in a range from which the spectrum
does not protrude from the tube surface. (See Figure 4-3 (b).)
SHIFT
(3) When the Q , cf^adj keys are pressed, the frequency display
remains unchanged, but the spectrum moves to the center and the
center frequency accuracy becomes 11 times the CAL OUT signal
accuracy. (See Figure 4-3 (c).)

(4) Input an unknown frequency and read the frequency. (See Figure 4-3
(d) .)

Although the value of the unknown frequency is obtained as 2199.5 MHz

in this example, care should be taken, because value indicates the
error of the CAL OUT signal and also the marker error.

(a)
O
CTR FREQ OdBm 2200MHz 4GHz

□ Data knob

;
10d£

U y? life __
$ m S£
ST 10m s/ ATT lOdB VF 1MHz

Figure 4-3 CF ADJ

4-7 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.3 Function to Improve
Frequency Accuracy

(b)
O OdBm 2200.00MHz 2MHz
a
n^=ai lOdS/
AUTO llQkH-zw

ST IOm s/ ATT 10d9

it
wVkLW^J.<w.^.
VF 1MHz

(c ) SH IFT

□ □
CF ADJ

(d)
O
m arker
Data knob

Figure 4-3 CF ADJ (cont'd)

4-8 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.4 Frequency Span

4.4 Frequency Span

When the FREQUENCY SPAN SET mode is selected, the frequency range from

4 GHz to 50 kHz can be set with 1-2-5 steps by pressing the H><H or (o»l
key. The 1/10 of the set frequency span becomes the frequency span of one
scale of the quadrature axis.

If the spectrum deviates from the center of the screen when the frequency
span is narrowed, return the spectrum to the center of the screen by
turning the data knob.

(1) What Is Zero Span {Displayed in the Time Axis)?

SHIFT
Pressing Q , and zQ q keys sets the ZERO SPAN mode, in which this
equipment functions as a fixed tuning receiver and becomes a tube
surface quadrature axis display. To clear this ZERO SPAN mode, press
the [oo| or \<$o\ key.

When either key is pressed, the frequency span returns to the span
before the setting of the ZERO SPAN mode.

Display of frequency span

OdBm 200MHz
1
-,1GHz
lOdl/
IMHzw

r± z
ST 10ms/ ATT lOdB VF 1MHz

Figure 4-4 Making the Frequency Span Narrow and Spectrum Expand

4-9 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________ 4.5 Interlocking Function (AUTO)

SHIFT
Q

Figure 4-5 ZERO SPAN Mode

4.5 Interlocking Function (AUTO)

When the [nto ] key is pressed and the LED on the key is lit, the frequency
span ,resolution band width (RBW) and sweep time are all interlocked to be

set to the optimum condition when the )oo| or \<“>\ key is pressed.
Incidentally, when the video filter band width (see Section 4.11) is
changed, the video filter band width and sweep time are interlocked to be
set to the optimum condition automatically.

4-10 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_________________ 4.6 Resolution Bank Width (RBW)

4.6 Resolution Bank Width (RBW)

When the LED on the [Sto]' key is lit, the resolution band width is
interlocked with the frequency span to be set automatically.

When key pressed and then or [oo l . the resolution band width
can be set manually. When the key is pressed, the spectrum narrows
and the resolution rises. It is therefore possible to separate the
equipment from the nearby noise of the measured spectrum, or to separate
spectrums themselves.

fiiw]
O

ST 10m s/ ATT 10d8 VF IK H *

Figure 4-6 Change in Resolution Band Width

4-11 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.7 Reference Level and
Ordinate Axis Scale

4.7 Reference Level and Ordinate Axis Scale

(1) Reference Level

The reference level is the top of the quadrature axis on the screen.
REFERENCE LEVEL
By pressing the [p| |o| key, it is possible to set a range of
-69.75 dBm to +40 dBm for R4131C/D and 40.25 dBp to 150 dBp for
R4131CN/DN with a resolution of 0.25 dB maximum.
REFERENCE LEVEL
Each time the (si is) key is pressed, the reference level goes
up or down by one step.

Reference level

OdBm
OdBm 200. OOMHz 2MHz
llOd?/
-tO hH tw

ST 10m s/ ATT lOdB VF IH H z

Figure 4-7 Change in Reference Level

(2) Quadrature Axis Scale (dB/DIV)

siiFT
When the (_) and id IJTTdiv keys are pressed, the ordinates axis scale
is set to 10 dB/DIV.
SHIFT - --- 1
When the Q and keys are pressed, the ordinates axis scale
is set to 2 dB/DIV.
SHIFT
When the O and L ID
NEAR
keys are pressed, the ordinates axis scale
is set to LINEAR.
In LINEAR, the lower end of the screen grid becomes 0 V.

4-12 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.7 Reference Level and
____________________________ Ordinate Axis Scale

SHIFT 200.00MHz 2MHz

□ Pol
1 0 d B/ D I V

ST 1.0ms/ ATT 1OdB VF lH H i

SHIFT
□ S

Figure 4-8 Ordinates Axis Scale

4-13 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.7 Reference Level and
_________________________ Ordinate Axis Scale

(3) Reference Level Step Width (COARSE/FINE)

e COARSE
X I FINE

When COARSE/FINE is selected in | j {the LED lights when

selected to FINE), the step width becomes as shown in the table below
at 10 dB/DIV and 2 DB/DIV:

Step width
Ordinates axis scale (dB/DIV)
COARSE FINE
10 dB/DIV 10 dB 1 dB
2 dB/DIV 1 dB 0.25 dB

{4) Unit (UNITS)

UNI T S

When the Q key is pressed, four types of units, dBm, dBjj, dBji/m (A
through D) and dBmV can be selected in the reference level.
The dBp/m is described in Section 4.18 Measurement of Electric Field
Intensity.

(5) Calibration of Ordinates Axis Level

The ordinates axis level can be calibrated by setting the signal level
to -30 dBm using the variable resistor for calibrating the level
display on the front panel with the calibration signal 200 MHz CAL.
The ordinates axis level may change later in some cases if the
calibration is executed before the equipment has warmed up for 30
minutes.
Care should also be taken because the ordinates axis level can change
when the working temperature changes sharply.

4-14 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_________________________4.8 RF Input Attenuator

4.8 RF Input Attenuator

I NP UT ATTENUATOR

Pressing the 0 r 0 key sets the value of RF ATT between the INPUT
connector and first mixer from 10 DB to 50 dB in steps of 10 dB. It is
usually interlocked with the reference level to be set automatically.

Also, when the equipment is initialized the 10 dB attenuator is always set

for the protection of the first mixer.

t
Input attenuator value

Figure 4-9 Input Attenuator Displaying Position

-------------------------------- CAUTION -------------------------------

SHIFT INPUT ATTENUATOR
The attenuator can be set to 0 dB by pressing the □ - @
keys. However, set it after making sure that there is no excessive
input signal throughout the frequency band width.

Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.9 Display Line

4.9 Display Line

SHIFT
When the O , keys are pressed, the display line is displayed
. DSPL LINE
on the screen.

The display line is a horizontal cursor line for the level comparison of
waveform. Its data is displayed on the screen as "DL = xx dBm". (See
Figure 4— 70.) Each time the \ o \ and \ o \ keys are pressed, the display
line can be moved up and down.

As in the reference level, the display line can be changed by selecting

O COARSE A
the COARSE/FINE using the XXFINE Q key with the following step widths:

COARSE: 1 DIV
FINE : 1/10 DIV
SHIFT
To erase the display line, press the Q r loc>i again.
D SP L LINE

Also, the display line is used for the reference line in the normalizing
function and for the level setting in the signal tracking function.

Display
line

Level display

Figure 4-10 Display Line

4-16 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.10 Marker Function

4.10 Marker Function

(D Display of Marker
MARXES

When the CD key is pressed, the O shaped marker appears in the

center of the frequency axis or a previously set position. In
addition, the frequency and level of the marker are displayed on the
upper left of the screen. The marker can be moved freely on the trace
using the data knob.
Marker
Display of marker frequency and level

The marker moves

to the right.

The marker moves

to the left.

ST 10ms/ ATT lOdB VF 1MHz

Figure 4-11 Operation of Marker

CTR FREft
If the Q key is pressed when the marker is displayed on the
screen, the data knob is made into the mode to change the center
frequency and the marker is fixed on the frequency axis at that time
and not erased.

(2) Erasing of Marker

OFF
When the Q key is pressed, the display of the marker and marker data
is erased.
MARKER

When the Q key is pressed once more, the marker appears again on
the frequency axis where it had disappeared.

(3) PEAK Search

PEAK
When the Q key is pressed, the marker moves to the peak of the
waveform with the highest level on the trace (Figure 4-12).
This is a convenient function for setting the marker to the measuring
signal.

4-17 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.10 Marker Function

-1OdBm 370MHz 500MHz

PEAK
□
O

-1OdBm 370MHz 500MHz

Figure 4-12 PEAK Search

(4) MarKeR— ► Center Frequency

MK I)—►CF

When the Q key is pressed, the marker and spectrum on which the
marker is present move to the center of the screen to coincide with
the center frequency. (Figure 4-13)

The spectrum can also be moved to the center of the screen by setting
the center frequency using the known data. When this key is used, the
spectrum can be moved to the center very quickly.

4-18 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.10 Marker Function

-20dBm 1610.0MHz 50MHz

.....I._. L_ Afc
VF lOhHz

M K R— r CF

□
o

-20dBm __ 1600.0MHz _ __ 50MHz

[m k 1 s o o j. OMhiz | 1 I f I T lQ d f e /
r -57i 2ttBrn j - ----j-' I...r-3qOKH*w

L—
ST 10ms/

Figure 4-13 MarKeR— ►Center Frequency

(5) SIGnal TRacK

SHIFT
When the Q and Q keys are pressed, the signal tracking
function operates.

When this function is used, the frequency with the highest peak on the
screen is automatically set as the center frequency each time the
sweeping is done and when adopted makes it possible to always seize
the signal in the center of screen, even if the signal drifts.

The signal tracking function of this equipment merely performs the

PEAK searching on the screen and repeats it for each sweeping as
MKR CF. However, the PEAK searching level can be selected by the
display line. It is therefore possible to track only the signal which
is higher in level than the display line.

4-19 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.10 Marker Function

By this, the center frequency never flies off due to noise without
tracking the signal, even if the input signal is missed temporarily.
SHIFT
Press the 0 and EE)
DSPL LINE
keys, and the display line is displayed
on the screen.

Then, move the display line using the 10 dVB/DIV and 2 dB/DIV keys to
determine the level for PEAK searching.
SHIFT
When the ^ and sig ^ trk keys are pressed, the signal above the value
determined by the display line is tracked. {See Figure 4-14.)

Even if the display line is erased, the signal tracking is still

carried out with the value determined earlier. To clear the signal
SHIFT
tracking function, press the Q and Q keys over again, or
MARKER OFF SIC TDK
press the Q KEY.

-lOdBm 2 0 0 .POMHz 2MHz

MK 200 .00K Hz 10d4
»Q=-0
DSPL L I NE

siniJiM TRAr K
I Od B / D I V 2d B / D I V

i
□ □ — -- — -
SIC TRX rt[_ •65d
r
i

UU jJ UAL] JAM MU'

ST 10ms/ ATT 10d9 VF 1MHz

Figure 4-14 SIGnal TRacK

(6) MARKER PAUSE

MARKER
After making the marker display on the screen, press the Q and
TIHE/DIV MARKER TIME/DIV
J5) keys, or □ and (g keys in succession, then the MARKER
PAUSE function operates.

This function stops the sweeping temporarily at the position of the

marker. Although the stop time is 1 sec at first under the MARKER
PAUSE status, it can be changed from 1 sec, in steps of 0.5 sec. It
can be set in steps of 0.5 sec between 0 and 10.0 sec. (See
Figure 4-15).

To clear this MARKER PAUSE function, set the stop time to 0 sec by
MASKER TIME/DIV MARKER OFF
repeatedly pressing the Q and (£) keys, or press the Q
key.

4-20 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.10 Marker Function

OdBm 200. 0MHz 20HHz

MK j200t OMhiz Todl/
O^Odfirtr
MKPAUSe 1.0s
MARKER TIME/DIV
□ • a

«
ST 10ms/ ATT lOdB

Figure 4-15 MARKER PAUSE

(7) Measurement of NOISE/Hz

SHIFT
After displaying the marker on the screen, press the Q and [mra]
no TST7 h *
keys in succession, then the NOISE/Hz function operates.

This function can measure the rms of the noise level which is
normalized by the noise voltage band width of 1 Hz at the marker
position.

The display detection mode at this time is automatically set to the

SAMPLE DET. (See Figure 4-16.)
SHIFT
To clear the NOISE/Hz function, press the Q and N 0 tI!!ijD keys again.
SE/ K z

SHIFT
Q . GSto)
noTST/h z

Figure 4-16 Setting of NOISE/Hz

4-21 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.11 Video Filter Band Width (VIDEO FiLTeR)

4.11 Video Filter Band Width (VIDEO FiLTeR)

VIDEO
FLTR

Q
Each time the g) key is pressed, the video filter band width can be
changed with seven steps of 1 MHz — ^300 kHz —— 700 kHz ► 10 kHz ►
1 kHz -— " 100 Hz — "■10 Hz.

Also, the video filter band width is interlocked with the sweep time to be
set automatically to the optimum sweep time.

When the video filter band width is made smaller step by step, the signal
which is buried in noise can be searched for, but it takes a long sweep
time.

t
Video filter band width

Figure 4-17 VIDEO FiLTeR

4-22 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.12 Setting of Sweep Time

4.12 Setting of Sweep Time

Since the equipment is set to AUTO at initialization, the sweep time is

automatically set to a range which does not cause a level error for the
frequency span, resolution band width, and VIDEO FiLTeR, etc.
TI ME/ D I V

sweep time can be set to a range from 5 ms/DIV to 1 00 s/DIV in steps of

1-2-5. The message "UNCAL" is displayed in the center of the screen when
it is set in a manner to cause an error in the level display because of
too rapid sweeping. Change the measuring condition, by making the sweep
time longer for instance. (See Figure 4-18.)

Message UNCAL
OdBm. \^00.
[DO. 000MHz. SQOkHz
MK 200.00j MHz LINEAL 10 dS /
133rOdBnr IhHiw

ST 5m s/ ATT lO dB VF 1MHz

r
Sweep time
Figure 4-18 Sweep Time

4-23 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.13 Selection of Sweep Mode/Trigger Mode

4.13 Selection of Sweep Mode/Trigger Mode

FREE RUN

LIN E

VIDEO
TRIGGER
Each time the SIN G LE Q J,Q keys are pressed, the TRIGGER mode is
select in the order of FREE R U N — >• LINE— *- VIDEO— ► SINGLE. The LED
corresponding to the selected mode will then light.

FREE RUN: This is a continuous sweep mode to automatically repeat the

sweeping internally.
Line : This is a mode to repeat the sweeping in synchronism with the
AC power supply frequency.
VIDEO : Triggered by the waveform which detected the IF signal.
START
/'RESET
SINGLE : This is a single sweep mode and controlled by the Q key.
START
/RESET
When the Q key is pressed in the single sweep mode, the
sweeping is executed once.
START
When the /R^ ET key is pressed in the middle of sweeping, the
sweeping is reset for the next single sweeping. This function
is used to retry sweeping during screen rewriting when the
sweep time is long.

4-24 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________4.14 Display Detection Mode

4.14 Display Detection Mode

This is the mode to specify which amplitude value should be converted from
analog to digital when the amplitude data within a certain time during the
sweeping is converted from analog to digital.

This display detection mode affects the display of noise or that of

impulsive signals.

(1) SAMPLE DETection

SHIFT r“|
When the Q and SA^j>L keys are pressed, the SAMPLE DET mode is
DET
selected and "SMPL" is displayed in the middle right of the screen.
(See Figure 4-19.)

This mode displays the result of sweeping at moments set at each point
of the frequency axis.

The SAMPLE DET mode is set automatically for measurement of the

NOISE/Hz.

(2) POSi PeaK DETection

- R4131D/DN
SHIFT pi
When the and POs PK keys are pressed, the system goes into the
q
DET
POS PK DET mode.

This mode displays the maximum value during the period set at each
point of the frequency axis.

Since this POS PK DET mode soundly seizes the spectrum peak, it is
effective for the level measurement of a fine spectrum. (See
Figure 4-20.)

- R4131C/CN

R4131C/CN is set to the POS PK DET mode when it is initialized.

4-25 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.14 Display Detection MQde

(3) NORMAL DETection (POSI/NEGA DET)

- R4131D/DN

When the g □
and N07 m AL keys are pressed, the system enters the

POSI/NEGA PK DET mode.

This mode displays the maximum value or minimum value of the periods
set at each point of the frequency axis. (See Figure 4-21.)

R4131D/DN is set to the NORMAL (POSI/NEGA) DET mode when it is

initialized.

- R4131C/CN
SHIFT
When the q and N0^ AL keys are pressed, the system enters the POSI
DET
PK DET mode.

□ □
SAMP L
DET

Figure 4-19 SAMPLE DET (R4131)

□ □
POS PK
DET

Figure 4-20 POSI PK DET (R4131)

4-26 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.14 Display Detection MOde

Figure 4-21 NORMAL DET (R4131B/BN/D/DN)

4-27 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.15 Selection of Trace Mode

4.15 Selection of Trace Mode

The trace memory of this equipment provides two memories. One is the
WRITE memory which rewrites the data for each sweeping the other is the
VIEW memory which stores the waveform for any screen of the WRITE memory.
The waveform of the WRITE memory or VIEW memory can be called, or both can
be displayed on the screen to make a two-screen display.

WKITE
□
MAX

STORE
□
VIEW
□

(1) WRITE
WRITE
When the Q key is pressed, the memory contents are rewritten at
each sweeping.

The waveform of the WRITE mode is rewritten for each sweeping. The
trace mode at initialization is set to this WRITE mode.

(2) STORE
STORE
When the Q key is pressed, the waveform data written in the WRITE
mode at that time is held in the memory. The screen displays the
waveform data held in the memory and then holds still. In other
words, the system enters the VIEW mode and the leftward LED of the
VIEW
□ key lights.

(3) VIEW
VIEW
The Q key is used to call the waveform stored in the WRITE memory
in the WRITE mode. Since the stored waveform data keeps its contents
until new waveform data is stored again in the WRITE mode, this
function is convenient for the comparative survey between the WRITE
waveform after a change in setting conditions and the stored waveform
data (the VIEW data).

4-28 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.15 Selection of Trace Mode

(4) WRITE and VIEW (2-screen display)

When the display data, which is rewritten each sweeping by means of

WRITE STORE
the Q key, is stored and the Q key is pressed again, both
VIEW WRITE
leftward LEDs of the Q and Q keys light and the stored waveform
data and the sweep data in the WRITE mode are displayed in two
screens. To return the two screens to a single screen, erase the
unnecessary screen using the "q 76 or Vq " key.

The following describes how to use this function taking the

comparative measurement of the secondary harmonic level as an example.

Operating procedure

(?) Input the signal of CALibration OUTput, 200 MHz and -30 dBm, of
this equipment,
(2) Set as follows:
Center frequency 200 MHz
Reference level -30 dBm
Frequency span 10 MHz
In addition, set the POS PK DET to make it easier to compare two
screens.
(3) Set the spectrum of the measured signal to the center of the
screen (Figure 4-22).

-3QdBm 200. QOMHz 10MHz

jlO d b/
-3 0 k H *w

' -J

' -I
_..a £c
ST lO tnsa/ ATT lOdB VF 1KH*

Figure 4-22 Setting the Measured Signal

to the Center Frequency
STORE
(4) Press the Q key.
Then, the trace mode becomes VIEW. The sweeping stops, the last
sweep waveform is displayed, and the screen stands
still. This data is stored in the internal memory.
WRITE
(5) Press the Q key.
Then, a new WRITE waveform data is displayed together with the
waveform of the memory (Figure 4-23).

4-29 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.15 Selection of Trace Mode

□ □

Figure 4-23 Two-screen Display with a New WRITE Waveform

Set the center frequency to 400 MHz and make the secondary
harmonic wave move to the center of the screen.
Then, the measured value can be read from the difference in
display between the two screens. (Figure 4-24)

-30d8m 401.00MHz 10MHz

Figure 4-24 Two-Screen Display of Secondary Harmonic

wave and STORE Waveform

4-30 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.75 Selection of Trace Mode

To erase the VIEW waveform while it is kept held in the

memory to observe the secondary harmonic wave (WRITE
VIEW
waveform) further, press the \J key, Then, the screen
becomes a single screen display of the WRITE waveform.
WRITE
To display the memory waveform only, press the Q key. That
is, press the key on the erased side.

(5) MAX HOLD

When the 0 and Q x keys are pressed, the stored data is rewritten
and displayed on the screen, at each sweeping, any data that exceeds
the former level at each point on the frequency axis is updated.

Consequently, the screen displays the maximum value up to then, for

each point. (Figure 4-25)

In Figure 4-25, it can be seen that the signal is drifting in a range

of approx. 4 MHz by putting it on MAX HOLD.

□ □
MAX

-lOJBm 100. 90MHz 10MHz

ST 30ms/ ATT lOdB VF 1MH*

Figure 4-25 MAX HOLD

4-31 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.15 Selection of Trace Mode

WRITE

When the Q key is pressed once more, the maximum held contents and
WRITE waveform are displayed in two screens, and at the same time, the
WRITE waveform is compared with the maximum held contents. When the
former is larger, that value is stored in the memory {Figure 4-26).

To release MAX HOLD, after setting to 2-screen display as shown in

SHIFT
Figure 4-26, clear it by pressing the Q and Cjx keys again: or
after setting the maximum held waveform to the VIEW mode by pressing
STORE VIEW VIEW
Q or Q key, erase the unnecessary screen by pressing the Q or
WRITE
□ key.
W1ITE

-10d3m 100. 90MHz 10MHz

ST 10m s/ ATT lOdB VF IH H x

Figure 4-26 Two-screen Display of The Maximum Hold

Contents and WRITE Waveform

4-32 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.16 Setting Conditions and
_____________________________________________ SAVE/RECALL of Displayed Waveform

4.16 Setting Conditions and SAVE/RECALL of Displayed Waveform

This equipment can save three states of the displayed waveform and it is
setting conditions as shown table 4-2 in the non-volatile memory.

This function is convenient, because the setting conditions and displayed

waveform can be recalled when the system is set up again since they are
saved in the memory even if the power is turned OFF. It is also possible
by using this function to compare waveforms and to block them out all
together since the displayed waveforms can be recalled.

Table 4-2 SAVE/RECALL Enabled Panel Setting

Center frequency
Frequency span
Interlocking function {AUTO)
Resolution band width
Reference level
Reference level step width (COARSE/FINE)
INPUT attenuator
Video filter band width
Sweep time

When the setting conditions and displayed waveforms saved in the memory
are recalled, the setting conditions are set in the WRITE screen at first
and then the saved waveforms are recalled on the VIEW screen.
VIEW
It is possible by pressing the Q key to see the waveforms which were
saved in the memory (Figure 4-27).

4-33 Nov 1/93

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.16 Setting Conditions and
_______________SAVE/RECALL of Displayed Waveform

(Non-volatile memory)

VIEW screen

Figure 4-27 SAVE/RECALL Waveform Memory

Table 4-3 shows the relations with the screen stored in the memory in each
trace mode.

Table 4-3 Screen Stored in Each Trace Mode

Trace mode Screen stored

WRITE DISPLAY only Stores the WRITE screen.
VIEW display only Stores th VIEW screen.
WRITE/VIEW display Stores the WRITE screen.
MAX HOLD only Stores the MAX HOLD screen.
WRITE/MAX HOLD display Stores the WRITE screen.

(1) SAVE
SHIFT

When the Q and keys are pressed, the system is enters the SAVE
mode and the screen becomes as shown in Figure 4-28.

^— Corresponding key

MEMORY 0 LCL (USER DEFINED POWER-UP)

MEMORY 1 WRITE
MEMORY 2 STORE
MEMORY 3 VIEW
QUIT RECALL

Figure 4-28 SAVE Screen

4-34 Nov 1/93
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.16 Setting Conditions and
_________________________________________ SAVE/RECALL of Displayed Waveform

WRITE STORE VIEW

Select the MEMORY 1, MEMORY 2, or MEMORY 3 using Q , Q , or □
key and select the memory to store.
RECALL
To quit the SAVE mode halfway, press the Q key.

The MEMORY 0 is described in Section 4.17 Automatic Setting at Power

ON.

(2) RECALL
RECALL

When the CD key is pressed, the system enters the RECALL mode and
the screen becomes as shown Figure 4-29.

^-Corresponding key

MEMORY 0: LCL {USER DEFINED POWER-UP)

MEMORY 1I WRITE
MEMORY 2: STORE
MEMORY 3: VIEW
QUIT RECALL

Figure 4-29 RECALL Screen

WRITE STORE
Select the MEMORY 1, MEMORY 2, or MEMORY 3 by using the Q , Q r or
VIEW
j— | key to select the memory to call.
•RECALL
To quit the RECALL mode halfway, press the Q key.

4-35 Nov 1/93

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_____________________________________________ 4.17 Automatic Setting at Power ON

4.17 Automatic Setting at Power ON

This is a function to call the setting stored in the non-volatile memory

each time the power is turned ON. The setting of the equipment selected
by yourself can always be called at power ON.
SHIFT
To store the setting to appear at power ON, press the Q and Q keys to
SAVE
put the system into the SAVE mode.

Then, the screen becomes as shown in Figure 4-28.

LCL
Press the MEMORY 0 and Q keys, then the set conditions are stored in the
memory.

4-36 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.7 8 Electric Field Intensity
______________________________ Measurement (dBu/m)

4.18 Electric Field Intensity Measurement (dBy/m)

The spectrum analyzer which can observe a wide frequency band at a time
can also be used as a field intensity measuring instrument. When an
antenna manufactured by ADVANTEST is used, this analyzer displays the
level data by correcting the antenna factor, making it possible to read
directly the field intensity through this analyzer. However, this
correction value is effective only when the attached 5D2W cable, 1 0 m . is
used. When using any other cable an error results.

Operating procedure

(?) Connect the antenna to the input terminal (50 ft) of this equipment.
When the impedance of the antenna is not 50 ft, be sure to match the
impedance using a matching circuit,

(2) Set the center frequency and frequency span, etc., to facilitate the
observation.
UNITS
(3) Press the Q key and select thelevel unit to match the antenna as
follows:

For TR1722 half-wave dipole antenna: dBy/m (A)

For TR1711 log helical antenna : dBy/m (B)
For TR17203 active antenna : dBy/m (C)
For TR17204 log helical antenna : dBy/m (D)
PEAK
(4) Press the Q key and set it to the peak of the spectrum to measure
the marker.

The relationship between the marker point display level, that is, the
input end voltage ex (dByV) of this equipment, and the actual field
intensity Ex (dByV/m) is as shown below:

Ex = ex + K Where, K: antenna factor (dB)

When the above antenna is used, this antenna factor K is automatically

corrected and the marker display indicates the field intensity.

When any antenna other than those mentioned above is used, correct the
value referring to the following "Correction Coefficient of Antenna":

4-37 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.18 Electric Field In
Measurement (dBy/m)

- Correction Factor of Antenna

Ex = ex + K = (ex + 6 ) + La - He + Ba

Where,

EX Field intensity (dByV/m)

ex Input terminal voltage (dByV)
K Antenna correction factor (dB)
He (dB) Effective length of antenna
La (dB) Cable loss
Ba (dB) Baiun loss

The factor K of the half-wave dipole antenna is obtained according to

the following equation:

n . .
K = 20 Log F + 6 + La + Ba F (MHz) : Receiving frequency

= -33.6 + 20 Log F + La + Ba

For the broad band width logarithm frequency type antenna, deduct the
antenna gain (half-wave dipole antenna ratio) from the obtained value.

Figure 4-30 shows the relationship between the frequency and

calibration factor of TR1722 half-wave dipole antenna (including the
cable loss).

4-38 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.19 QP Value Measurement
_________________________________________________ (Quasi-peak Value Measurement)

4.19 QP Value Measurement (Quasi-peak Value Measurement)

The QP value measurement is for measuring the pulse characteristic noise.

Various constants in this measurement are defined values in the CISPR
Standards as shown in Table 4-4.

Table 4-4 CISPR Standards for QP Value Measurement Basic Characteristic

Charging Discharging Mechanical

6 dB
Measuring band time time time
band width
constant constant constant
A 10 kHz to 150 kHz 20 Hz 4 5 ms 500 ms 160 ms

B 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz 1 ms 1 60 ms 160 ms

C 30 MHz to 300 MHz 120 kHz 1 ms 550 ms 100 ms
D 300 MHz to 1 GHz 1 10 kHz 1 ms 550 ms 100 ms

Note : This equipment has no A-range (10 kHz to 150 kHz, and 200 Hz band
width).

Operating procedure

(7) Set the center frequency and frequency span to be measured. Since the
QP band width is automatically set as the center frequency is set,
select the frequency span in the band to be measured. For B-band for
instance, the center frequency and span are selected as 25 MHz and 5
MHz, respectively.
INPUT ATTENUATOR
(2) While observing the waveform, press the (<>) and Q keys and
increase or decrease the input attenuator with in steps of 10 dB to
check that the waveform level does not change. If changed, it
indicates that the input stage of this equipment is saturated, so
increase the attenuator value or add B.P.F (Band Pass Filter) to its
input.

(3) When the level can be checked not to change, change the reference
level so that the output peak level meets the reference level.
SHIFT
(4) Press the Q and Q Keys.
ap

The system enters the QP measurement mode under this status and the
screen becomes 5 dB/DIV and eight scales.

4-39 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.19 QP Value Measurement
__________________ (Quasi-peak Value Measurement)

(5) Since a large time constant is entered when the QP value is measured
as shown in Table 4-4, make the sweep time long enough. As a
yardstick in this setting, set 1 sec per 10 kHz in the measuring band
B (150 kHz to 30 MHz) and 1 sec per 10 kHz in the measuring bands C
and D (30 MHz to 1 GHz).
MARKER
(6) Press the g key to output the marker.

Then, the QP value of the input terminal is displayed in terms of the

marker frequency.
UNITS

(7) When an antenna manufactured by ADVANTEST is used, press the CD

key
and set the level unit to the antenna and select the unit as follows:

TR1722 half-wave dipole antenna dB]i/m (A)

TR1711 log helical antenna dBy/m (B)
TR17203 active antenna dBu/m (C)
TR17204 log helical antenna dBy/m (D)

Then, the antenna factor is automatically corrected, the level unit at

the marker point becomes dBy/m, and the QP value is displayed directly
on the screen.

This correction is made only when the attached 5D2W antenna, 1 0 m , is

used. When any other antenna is used, obtain the correction factor
referring to the electric field intensity measurement in Section 4.18
and calculate the QP value.
SHIFT ____ SHIFT ___ SHIFT

® Press either one of the □ ,0li|pDIv' ^ °r ^ lineak

key, and the QP value measurement mode is cleared and the setting is
changed accordingly.

4-40 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.19 QP Value Measurement
__________________ (Quasi-peak Value Measurement)
ooefficient K(dB)
loss)
cable
the accessory
compensation
(including
strength
Field

40 60 80 100 200 400 600 800 lOOO(MHz)

M easurem ent frequency (M Hz)

Figure 4-30 Relationship between Frequency and Calibration Factor

in the half-wave dipole antenna

4-41 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.20 Normalize

4.20 Normalize

The normalizing function is used to correct the frequency characteristic

of this equipment itself and measuring systems including this equipment
and to perform a relative comparison of displayed waveforms on the tube
surface.

The following is the operating procedure for the measurement of the

insertion loss of high frequency cables using the TR4153A/B tracking
generator as an example.

Operating procedure

(7) Connect this equipment to TR4153A/B through the measuring system

excluding the cable to be measured (Figure 4-31).

(The frequency characteristic in this measuring system includes the

insertion loss of the connected cable and the frequency characteristic
of this equipment. The cable insertion loss of the measured device is
measured on the basis of this characteristic.)

Tracking Generator
TR4153A/B
O
f

Figure 4-31 Direct Connection between Tracking Generator and System

© TRACE : Set to WRITE (Initialization)

dB/DIV.: Set to 2 dB/DIV
Span : Set to 2 GHz

4-42 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.20 Normalize

(3) To change the reference level and to widen the dynamic range on the
lower side of the tube surface for measurement of the cable loss, move
the through waveform to the upper side of the tube surface as shown in
Figure 4-32.

1200MHz 2GH*
2dfj)/
1HFT:w

10db /d 1 v

ST O . W ATT lO d S V F IM H x

Figure 4-32 Moving the through Waveform

(4) Then, the Display Line is Displayed on the Screen.

SHIFT
□ 122)
DSPL L IN E

Move the display line close to the through waveform to make it the
reference line of the normalizing (Figure 4-33).

The display line can be moved using the key.

2 d B / D IV

ST a . la/ ATT 1 0 d 9 yf j h U *

Figure 4-33 Moving the Display Line

4-43 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.20 Normalize

(5) Normalize
SHIFT

When the Q and keys are pressed, the frequency characteristic

of the measuring system is corrected and "NORM" is displayed on the
tube surface and the through waveform coincides with the display line
(Figure 4-34).
SHIFT
When the 0 and keys are pressed directly without making the
display line display, the level in the center of the tube surface is
normalized as the reference line.

woo
2d! 1
IW T :

NQR

DL OQdE M

ST 0 . 1 * / ATT 1 0 d 8 V F 1MH*

Figure 4-34 Normalize

4-44 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________________________________________________ 4.20 Normalize

(6) Observation of insertion loss of a cable to be measured

Connect the measured cable to this equipment (Figure 4-35).

Figure 4-35 Connection of Measured Cable

(7) Then, the measured waveform is displayed apart from the display line
according to the cable loss (Figure 4-36).

0d5* 2C0HW* 2CH*

263/
thh U

NCS i 1

—
p i
1
CL 1 . :od= m 1

1
ST C. ! • / ATT I S d S V F 1 MHz

Figure 4-36 Cable Loss Characteristic

4-45 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.20 Normalize

(8) When the marker is displayed, the relative value between the marker
point on the measured waveform and display line can be read directly
in the marker level (Figure 4-37). To clear the NORMALIZE mode, press
SHIFT
the Q and Q keys again.
NORM

g«i8< IZOOHtts 2GHI

UK •OQC^Hx 2d!
■£. t. idb TRrT
NQo I

0L ■T. 30til M

ST 0 . l a / A ir 10d9 V F 1M Hz

Figure 4-37 Reading the Characteristic of Waveform

from the Marker Display

4-46 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.21_____________________ Occupied Freq
_________________________ Width (OBW) Measurement

4.21 Occupied Frequency Band Width (OBW) Measurement (only for R4131D)

This function is mounted on R4131D only. This function obtains the

occupied frequency band width from the data on the screen measured with
this equipment. This operation is made as follows:

There are 701 points of data for the frequency axis on the screen of this
equipment. Where one of the voltage is taken as Vn, the total power P on
the screen can be obtained according to the following equation:

701 Vn2
P = E ---- (R: Input impedance of this equipment)
n=1 R

If X is taken as the point at which the sum of the power levels being
displayed in sequence from the left end of the screen becomes 0.5% of P,
the following equation can be established:

2
X
Vn
0.005 P = I ----
n= 1 R

If X is taken as the point at which the sum of the power levels being
displayed in sequence from the left end of th screen becomes 99.5% of P,
the following equation can be established:

2
Y
Vn
0.995 P = Z ----
n=1 R

Obtain X and Y from the above three equations and obtain the occupied
frequency band width (OBW) from the frequency span SPAN according to the
following equation:

_ /.SPAN (Y - X ) _
701

The following is the operating procedure of the OBW display.

4-47 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.21______________________ Occupied Freque
__________________________ Width (OBW) Measurement

Operating procedure

(T) Make the spectrum to be measured display in the center of the screen
and set the screen ordinates axis scale to 10 dB/DIV.
^ SHIFT p
(2) When the g and keys are pressed, the function menu will then be

displayed.

#OBW
3dB DOWN
3dB DOWN LOOP
NEXT PEAK
QUIT : OFF

Select a function after moving the # mark using the

REFERENCE LEVEL
and keys.
o
MAKKEft
(3) Press the key to execute the function.
□
Then, the operation of the OBW starts; when the operation ends, two
markers appear as Y-point and X-point as mentioned above, and the OBW
is displayed on the upper left of the screen (Figure 4-38).

ST 3Q -»/ ATT »0dB VF lK H x

Figure 4-38 Example of OBW Measurement

(4) When the MKR OFF switch is pressed, the display for the occupied
frequency band width is erased and R4131D returns to the normal
measuring mode.

When the IF band width is set narrower when measuring the OBW, the
measurement can be done with less error. When the MAX mode is used in
combination with this, it is also possible to measure the maximum
value of the OBW.

4-48 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.22 3dB DOWN,3dB DOWN LOOP,
NEXT PEAK Function

4.22 3dB DOWN,3dB DOWN LOOP,NEXT PEAK Function (Only for R4131D)

{1) 3 dB DOWN

(T) If the marker is off

The spread in frequency between points at which the level has

decreased by 3 dB from the peak will be calculated. If the decrease
of 3 dB occurs at both a point on the displayed waveform that is
lower than that of the peak level in frequency and at a point higher
than that of the peak level in frequency, then the differences in
frequency as well as in level between those two points will be
displayed.

If the decrease of 3 dB occurs only at one point, the differences in

frequency as well as in level between that point and the peak point
will be displayed.

4-49 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.22 3dB DOWN,3dB DOWN LOOP,
NEXT PEAK Function

(2) If the marker is already on

The spread in frequency between points at which the level has

decreased by 3 dB from the level corresponding to the marker point
will be calculated.
If the decrease of 3 dB occurs at both a point on the displayed
waveform that is lower than the marker point in frequency and at a
pont higher than the marker point in frequency, then the differences
in frequency as well as in level between those two points will be
displayed.

If the decrease of 3 dB occurs only at one of the two points

mentioned above, the differences in frequency as well as in level
between that point and the marker point will be displayed.

4-50 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.22 3dB DOWN,3dB DOWN LOOP,
NEXT PEAK Function

(2) 3 dB DOWN LOOP

The 3 dB DOWN LOOP function is valid only while the TRACE mode
remaines set for WRITE. This function cannot be used for MAX HOLD.

If this function is selected, the peak level of the waveform will be

detected at the end of sweep. Following this, the point(s) on the
waveform where the power level decreases by 3 dB from the peak will be
detected. As with the 3 dB DOWN function described above, if the
decrease of 3 dB occurs at two points (or at one point only), then the
differences in frequency as well as in level between those two points
(or between that point and the marker point) will be displayed.
In this case, operation will be the same, irrespective of the on or
off status of the marker.

(3) NEXT PEAK

(T) If the marker is off

The marker will be placed at a position that corresponds to the

signal having the second largest level.

(2) If the marker is on

The marker will move to a position that corresponds to the signal

having the next larger level to that of the current marker point.

(3) If the display line is on

A search operation will be performed only on the signal having a

level larger than the display line.

(4) Operating procedure

(T) When the Q and 0 ^ keys are pressed, the function menu will then be

displayed.

#OBW
3dB DOWN
3dB DOWN LOOP
NEXT PEAK
QUIT : OFF

Select a function after moving the # mark using the

REFERENCE LEVEL
and keys.
o o

(2) Press the MA™ ERkey to execute the function.

OFF
© Press the Q key to return to the usual measurement mode.

4-51 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_____________________________4.23 Plotter Output

4.23 Plotter Output

The tube surface data can be plotted using the ADVANTEST manufactured
plotter and HP Corp. manufactured 7440 or its equivalent.

Operating procedure

(7) Connect this equipment to the plotter through the GPIB connector.

(2) Then, the screen to be plotted can be stored and kept standing still.
It is also possible to sweep it with the single trigger to make it
stand still.
shift p—
(3) When the G and plot keys are pressed, the system is made into the
PLOTTER mode and the PLOT function selecting screen is displayed on
the tube surface (Figure 4-39).

For instance, the # mark moves to either side of ALL or WAVE ONLY each
time the d^E] key is pressed.

(4) Move the # mark using the associated keys and select any function.
The plot type is selected with the [HiID key and the size is selected
with the Q phm) key.

(5) To quit from the PLOTTER mode at this point, press the t£^£j key.
PLOT
(6) When the (EXECUTE) key is pressed, the plotting is started.
DSPL LINE
LCL

®
When the
halfway.
pj (CANCEL) key is pressed, the plotting can be stopped even

The PLOT TYPE of each plotter is selected as shown in Table 4-5.

selection key

MODE:#ALL RBW
WAVE ONLY:
PLOT TYPE #TR AUTO
TR_R
HP
SIZE #BIG FREQ SPAN
MIDDLE
SHALL
QUIT X NARROW
EXECUTE <> WIDE
CANCEL LCL

Figure 4-39 PLOT Function Selection Screen

4-52 Aug 26/92

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4,23 Plotter Output

Table 4-5 PLOT TYPE of Each Plotter

PLOT TYPE Plotter name

HP R9833, and HP Corp.
manufactured 7470 or
equivalent

Note: The plot type for R9833 is set to "HP" when they are delivered from
the factory, since the HP-GL-1 (HP-GL) was then assumed to be used.
When the FP-GL-2 (GP-GL) is used, set the plot type to "TR".
The TR_R is for the case where continuous roll paper is used.

When the connection to the plotter is no good or the power is not turned
ON, "PLOTTER ERROR" is displayed in the center of the screen. Recheck the
connection and setting and then reset with any key and then set the PLOT
mode over again.

4 - 53* May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________________________________________ 5. Applied Measuring Method

5. APPLIED MEASURING METHOD

This chapter describes the overall operating method of this equipment

through the measuring examples of AM wave and FM wave.

5 - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency
and Index of AM Signal

5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency and Index of AM Signal

The AM signal wave when expressed in the time axis becomes as shown in
Figure 5-1 (a) and the modulation index m (%) can be obtained from the
maximum value and minimum value of its waveform.

When expressed in the frequency axis, the AM signal wave becomes as shown
in Figure 5-1 (b) and the modulation index m (%) can be obtained by
measuring the frequency level of the carrier and that of the sideband.

When the modulation frequency is low and its spectrum cannot be separated
completely, the signal wave is observed in the ZERO SPAN mode. When the
modulation frequency is high, the modulation index is generally obtained
from the difference between the frequency of the upper sideband and that
of the carrier in the FREQUENCY SPAN mode. When the modulation is small
and the signal wave is difficult to see even though the modulation
frequency is low, observe it in the FREQUENCY SPAN mode. The measurement
precision rises when the signal wave is observed in the LINEAR mode when
the modulation index is more than 10%, or in the LOG mode when the
modulation index is less than 10%.

The following describes the measuring procedure for when the modulation
frequency is low and when it is high.

Ec
a

E ls b - — ■ Ec E u s b — -- Ec
2 2

f L! f C f USB

m (%) . _
Eroax_ -__Ec x ,00 2E SB
Ec m (%) = x 1 00
EC
Emax - Emin
x 1 00
Emax + Emin

(a) Time Axis Display of (b) Frequency Axis Display of

AM Signal Wave AM Signal Wave

Figure 5-1 AM Signal Wave

5-2 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency
__________________________ and Index of AM Signal

5.1.1 Measurement of AM Wave When the Modulation Frequency Is Low and

Modulation Index Is Large

Operating procedure

(7) Connect the AM transmitter output to the INPUT connector of this

equipment by making it pass through the external attenuator when
necessary (Figure 5-2).

Figure 5-2 Set-up in Measurement of Modulation Wave

(2) Set the center frequency to the frequency of the signal to be

measured. Data knob
CTR FKEA

Press the Q key and turn the to set the center

frequency to 903 MHz (Figure 5-3).

04 .W 9 LGt
MK 9 0 4 ‘4Hz lO dl

p -t-

ST 1 0 mm/ ATT lO d S V F IH H *

Figure 5-3 Setting the Center Frequency to the Frequency

of the Measured Signal

5-3 Oct 20/89

 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency
__________________________ and Index of AM Signal

(3) Press the GEfli]' and 0®Z]' keys and set the resolution band
width to more than three times the modulation frequency.
MARKER
(4) Press the Q and set the marker to the peak of the
Data knob

measured signal with the

(When the O key is pressed, the marker is automatically set to

the peak of the measured signal.)
REFERENCE LEVEL

o
(5) Press the ,0dB/DI V key and set the marker (the peak of the
measured signal) to the reference level.

COARSE,
ARSEQ
FINE
□ — 1
SHIFT
© Press the □ . □ key and set the ordinates axis scale
linear

to LINEAR (Figure 5-4).

ST ZQmn/ ATT lOdB VF lMH*

Figure 5-4 Setting the Ordinates Axis Scale to LINEAR

SHIFT
(7) Press the O , key and enter the system into the ZERO SPAN
mode.
SHIFT
(D Press the □ . □ key and enter the system into the SAMPLE mode,
SAMPLE
DET

5-4 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency
__________________________ and Index of AM Signal

Data knob
CTR P RE ft key and turn the to adjust the signal
(9) Press the
□
level to make it the maximum.

TRIGGER
© Press the Q key and set the trigger mode to VIDEO.
SAMPLE
DET

0) Press the ® key and set the sweep time to a value that can be
P O S PK
DET
observed easily.
Data knob
MARKER
(f^) Press the Q and turn the to set the marker to the peak
of the modulation signal.
Keep recording the time indication of the marker at this time
(Figure 5-5).

Figure 5-5 Reading the Time Display of Marker

(Q) Move the marker to the next peak and obtain the difference T(s)
between the time indication of that marker and the time indication
in step . In this example, it can be obtained as 18.6 - 16.0 =
2.6 (ms) (Figure 5-6).

Frequency fm of the modulation signal becomes as follows in this

example:

_J__
fm =
T(s)
1
fm = = 384 (Hz)
2.6 (ms)

5-5 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency
and Index of AM Signal

9. 9S 0w V 9C 3. S S C M H * Z g S O S P A N
m k l a . ^ * { I N E A
n
d & c n v i C k f f :
! 1 H

1 1 A

n u n f f l f f i M T i N Y i v i v i f i t S B
r n i
S H £ 2
m 4 / J w
!
2

i __
i i
i 1 ! 1
S T San/ A T T 10d 9 V F l H H z

Figure 5-6 Reading the Difference from the Time Indication

of the Adjacent Peak

(0) Read the marker level Emax (Figure 5-7).

Figure 5-7 Reading the Emax

(f^) Set the marker to the minimum value of the waveform and read the
level Emin (Figure 5-8).

10. 57!hV 9C3.9SBMHz SPAN

Figure 5-8 Reading the Emin

5-6 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency
__________________________and Index of AM Signal

(fj>) The modulation index m (%) becomes as follows in this example:

Emax - Emin __
m = ----- - ■~ - x 100 (%)
Emax + Emin

8.278 - 5.448 ,_n _ 2.830 _

m 8.278 + 5.448 X 13.726 X 20*6 (%)

5.1.2 Measurement of AM Wave When Modulation Frequency is High and

Modulation Index is Small

Operating procedure

(7) Connect the AM transmitter output to the INPUT connector of this

equipment by making it pass through the external attenuator when
necessary as shown in Figure 5-2.

(T) Set the center frequency to the frequency of the carrier.

Data knob
CTR PREa

(D Set the frequency span to less than 10 times the modulation

frequency.

PLOT DSPL LINE

(4) Set the marker to the peak of the carrier and keep recording that
frequency {Figure 5-9).

ata knob
MARKER

□
© MK S03 ,IK MHz
903. 183MH*
I
2QOKH*
w
I

1
.1
\ \.
iJ V VX 1

B E a a H M « B B E i g B g i
S T SQ m / ATT IQ dB V F 1M Hz

Figure 5-9 Measurement of AD Wave When Modulation Frequency

is High and Modulation Index is Small

5-7 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency
and Index of AM Signal

(5) Move the marker to the peak of the modulation signal spectrum.
Data knob

(6) Compare the marker frequency and level at that time with the
frequency kept recorded in step (4); then the modulation frequency
and modulation index can be obtained from the difference between the
frequency and level according to the following equation:

fm = Difference from the marker frequency indicated value

1 (Esb - ^C + 6)
m = Log 1 — ------ x 1 00 (%)

Marker level indicated +

_1 value difference __
= Log 1 ----------------------------- x 100 {%)
20

In the example of Figure 5-9, fm = 20 kHz and m = 2%.

Figure 5-10 shows the relationship between the value of {Sideband

level Egg - carrier level Ec) and modulation index m (%).

5-8 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.1 Measurement of Modulation Frequency
__________________________and Index of AM Signal
£mnr&m

0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -SO -60 -70 *«0

B SB - E C (dB)

Figure 5-10 Relationship Between the Value of (Sideband Level EgB

- Carrier Level Ec ) and Modulation Index m (%)

5-9 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

When observing the FM wave, it is possible to obtain modulation frequency

fm, modulation index m, and peak deviation Af peak. When the modulation
frequency is low, set the ordinates axis to the ZERO SPAN, make it operate
as a fixed tuning receiver, demodulate the frequency using the slope of
the IF filter, and measure it on the time axis.

When the modulation frequency is high, measure it on the frequency axis

and obtain the modulation frequency from the frequency of the sideband.
When the modulation index m is small (when it is less than approx. 0.8),
obtain it from the relationship between the carrier level and the first
sideband level.

The following describes this measurement example in either case.

5.2.1 Measurement of FM Wave When Modulation Frequency Is Low

Operating procedure

(7) Connect the FM transmitter output to the INPUT connector of this

equipment by making it pass through the external attenuator when
necessary, as shown in Figure 5-2.

(2) Set the carrier of the signal so that it becomes the center
frequency, and make it the span suitable for analyzing the spectrum

Data knob

(3) Set the marker to the peak of the signal

Data knob
MAS K E B
□

(4) Set the marker level to the reference level

REFERENCE LEVEL
Pol
t Dd B / D 1 V 2 d B/DI V
COAISE

5-10 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

(5) Lower the reference level (Figure 5-11).

REFERENCE LEVEL
GsE)
I0 d B/DI V

Figure 5-11 Measurement of FM Wave When

Modulation Frequency Is Low

(6) Make the system into the ZERO SPAN mode.

S H I PT

° r a

(7) Change the center frequency so that the demodulation wave becomes
the center of the screen.

Data knob

(8) Make the resolution band width to more than three times the
modulation frequency so that the demodulation wave can be seen
easily.

d Z) lEE) or
PLOT DSPL LINE

(9) Set the trigger mode to VIDEO.

TRIGGER
±0

5-11 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

© Select a sweep time for easily seeing the demodulation wave.

TIME/D IV
0 or Q
P O S PK
DET

(jj) Put the marker on the peak of the demodulation wave and keep
recording its time indication (Figure 5-13).

Data knob
MARKEB

0 o

ST 5a*/ ATT ICeS VF 1MHz

Figure 5-12 Putting the Marker on the Peak of Demodulation

Wave and Reading Its Time Indication

Move the marker to the adjacent peak and read its time indication
(Figure 5-13).

Data knob

From the time interval T(s) of the peak of the demodulation wave,
the modulation frequency (fm) can be obtained as follows:

fm = 1
T {S )

Since T(s) = 2.1 (ms) in this example, the modulation frequency (fm)
can be obtained as follows:

fm = 1-- r ti 476 (Hz)

2.1 (ms)

5-12 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

Figure 5-13 Obtaining the Time Interval T(s) of

Demodulation Wave

5.2.2 Measurement of FM Wave for High Modulation Frequency

Operating procedure

(7) Connect the FM transmitter output to the INPUT connector of this

equipment by making it pass through the external attenuator when
necessary, as shown in Figure 5-2.

(2) Set the carrier frequency to the center frequency.

Data knob
ct » PftEa v\

0 O
(3) Set the frequency span to a value lower than 10 times of the
modulation frequency.

PLOT DSPL LINE

(4) Put the marker on the peak of the carrier and keep recording the
marker frequency at this time (Figure 5-14).

Data knob

5 - Oct 20/89
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

Figure 5-14 Measurement of FM Wave When Modulation

Frequency Is High

(5) Move the marker to the adjacent peak and read the indication of the
marker frequency (Figure 5-15).

Data knob

Figure 5-15 Reading the Modulation Frequency

from the Marker Display

(s) The difference from the frequency indication of the marker becomes
the modulation frequency (fm).

For this example, the modulation frequency can be obtained as

follows:

fm = 903.963 - 903.863 = 100 (kHz)

5-14 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

5.2.3 Measurement of Peak Deviation {Af peak) of FM Wave

Operating procedure

(?) Connect the FM transmitter output to the INPUT connector of this

equipment by making it pass through the external attenuator when
necessary, as shown in Figure 5-2.

(2) Set the center frequency to the carrier frequency.

Data knob

(3) Set the frequency span to a value enabling easy measurement

according to the peak deviation.

PLOT DSPL LINE

(4) Set the resolution band width to a value including the principal
sideband (more than five times the modulation frequency).

PLOT DSPL LIKE

(5) Figure 5-16 shows a case where Afpea|< is small and Figure 5-17
shows a case where it is large. Measure the Afpea^ from the
waveform.

A fpeakpeak

2Q0hHs

ST W ATT lOdB VF IMHx

Figure 5-16 Waveform When Afpeak is Small

5-15 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

Af ,peak
peak

OdB* sa l,9 5 5 H H s ]MHz

IC d B /
3hH*w

nf

ST 0. lm/ ATT lOdB VF 1MHz

Figure 5-17 Waveform When Afpeak Is Large

Afpeak anc^ modulation index m can be obtained from the following

equation:

Afpeak ~ 2 x ^ P ea^ Pea^

Afpeak
m =
fm

For the two figures, the measurement is carried out as follows,

respectively:

Figure 5-16: When Afpeak is small

fm = 2 kHz, and Afpea)< is read as approx. 40 kHz:

ifpeak = \ * 40 <kHz>

20 (kHz)
m = = 10
2 (kHz)

5-16 Oct 20/89

 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

• Figure 5-17: When Afpeak is large

fm = 400 Hz, and Afpeak is read as approx. 400 kHz:

Afpeak = ^ x 400 <kHz)

5.2.4 How to Obtain Modulation Index m when FM Modulation Index m Is Small

When the modulation index m of the FM wave is less than approx. 0.8,
the following equation can be formed:

2ESB
m = — —

Where,
E s b : 1st sideband level
Ec : Carrier level

Operating procedure

(T) Connect the FM transmitter output to the INPUT connector of this

equipment by making it pass through the external attenuator when
necessary, as shown in Figure 5-2.

(2) Set the center frequency and frequency span so that the carrier can
be observed easily.
Data knob

(3) Set the carrier level to the reference level as shown in Figure 5-18.

REFERENCE LEVEL
.0
l 0d B / D I V 2dB/D1V

C OA KS E

5-17 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

-ICdS-i S3*.553MHz SCChHx

ST C . \m/ ATT lCd9 VF 1HH*

Figure 5-18 How to Obtain Modulation Index m When FM

Modulation Index m is Small

(4) Read and keep recording the carrier frequency fc from the display
of the center frequency and also the carrier level E^ from the
display of the reference level.

In the case of this example, they become as follows:

fc = 904.993 MHz, E q = -10 dBm

(5) Set the marker to the first sideband and read its frequency fgg
and level Egg from the display of the marker.

Data knob
MARKER

□
For this example, they become as follows:

fSB - 905.103 MHz, ESb “ "43.6 dBm

(?) The FM modulation index m can be obtained from the following

equation:

ESB SSB - Ec + 6
m = 2 x = Log - 1
20

For this example, it becomes as follows:

m = Log-1 ~-3-— -- + 6 = Log-1 (-1.38) 0.04

5-18 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________________________ 5.2 Measurement of FM Wave

(7) The modulation frequency fm can be obtained from

fm = |fSB — fc |•

For this example, it becomes as follows:

fm = 20 kHz

® The frequency deviation Afpeak can be obtained from Afpeak = m x

fm.

For this example, it becomes as follows:

Afpeak = 0.04 x 20 (kHz) - 800 Hz

5-19* Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6. GPIB Connection and Programming

6. GPIB CONNECTION AND PROGRAMMING

This equipment features the measurement bus GPIB (General Purpose

Interface Bus), which conforms the IEEE Standards 488-1978, as standard
equipment to enable full remote control by an external controller.

6 - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.1 Outline of GPIB

6.1 Outline of GPIB

The GPIB is an interface system which can connect a measuring instrument

to a controller and its peripheral equipment, etc. with a simple cable
(bus line). Compared with conventional interfacing methods, it has
excellent expandability, is easy to use, and is compatible with products
of other companies electrically, mechanically, and functionally. This
allows versatile configuration from a simple system to a high-level
automatic measuring system with one bus cable.

In the GPIB system, it is first necessary to preset an "address" of

separate component equipment connected to its bus line. These equipment
can perform one or two of three roles — controller, talker {speaking
party), and listener (listening party).

During the system operation, only one talker can send data to the bus line
and a multiple listeners can receive the data. The controller specifies
the address of a talker and listener to transfer data from the talker to
listener, or the controller itself (a talker in this case) sets measuring
conditions, etc., of the listener.

For data transfer between equipment, the GPIB system uses eight data lines
of bit parallel and byte serial types and also transmits data in both
directions asynchronously. Being an asynchronous system, high speed
devices and low speed ones can be connected to each other.

The data (messages) exchanged between devices consists of measuring data,

measuring conditions (programs), and various commands. The system uses
the ASCII code.

In addition to the above eight data lines, the GPIB provides three
handshaking lines to control sending and receiving asynchronous data, and
five control lines to control the flow of data on bus lines.

6-2 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.1 Outline of GPIB

Data lines (8)

Transmission control liens (3)

Bus control lines (5)— IFC, ATN, SRQ,

REN. EQI

GPIB ■ \ _ \ . DAV, NRFD,

buses I \ NDAC
( 16)

Interface Interface Interface Interface

Control, (Talk and (Talk) (Listen)
talk, and listen)
listen
Equipment A Equipment B Equipment C Equipment D

Figure 6-1 Outline of GPIB

• The following signals are used for handshaking lines:

DVA (Data Valid) : This is a signal to indicate that the data

is valid.
NRFD (Not Ready For Data): This is a signal to indicate that the data
is ready for receiving.
NDAC (Not Data Accepted) : This is a signal to indicate that the data
reception is completed.

• The following signals are used for control lines:

ATN (Attention) This is a signal used to distinguish that

the signal on the data line is either
address or command, or some other data.
IFC (Interface Clear) This is a signal to clear the interface.
EQI (End or Identify) This is a signal used when the data transfer
ends.
SRQ (Service Request) This is a signal used to request a service
from any equipment to the controller.
REN (Remote Enable) This is a signal used when remote
programmable equipment is controlled
remotely.

6-3 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.2 Standards

6.2 Standards

6.2.1 GPIB Specifications

Conformed standards IEEE Standards 488-1978

Code used ASCII code, or binary code for packed format
Logical level Logical 0 "High" status More than +2.4 V
Logical 1 "Low" status Less than +0.4 V
Signal line termination: 16 bus lines are terminated as shown below:

Figure 6-2 Signal Line Termination

Driver specification Open collector type

Output voltage under the "Low" status
... 48 mA at +0.4 V or less
Output voltage under the "High” status
... -5.2 mA at +2.4 V or more
Receiver specification: "Low" status at +0.6 V or less
"High" status at +2.0 V or more
Length of bus cable The length of each cable should be less than
4 m and the total length of all bus cables
(the number of equipment connected to buses x
2) should not exceed 20 m.
Address specification 31 types of TALK address/LISTEN addresses can
be set freely using the ADDRESS switch on the
rear panel.
After changing over to the ADDRESS switch,
turn OFF the POWER SW once and then ON again.
Connector 24-pin GPIB connector

6-4 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.2 Standards

24-pin GPIB Connector

Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name

GND LOGIC 24 12 SHIELD
GND (ATN) 23 11 ATN
GND (SRQ) 22 10 SRQ
GND (IFC) 21 9 IFC
GND (NDAC) 20 8 NDAC
GND (NRFD) 19 7 NRFD
GND (DAV) 18 6 DAV
REN 17 5 E0I
DIO 8 16 4 DIO 4
DIO 7 15 3 DIO 3
DIO 6 14 2 DIO 2
DIO 5 13 1 DIO 1

Figure 6-3 GPIB Connector Pins Assignment Diagram

6.2.2 Interface Function

Table 6-1 Interface Function

Code Function and explanation

SH1 Source handshaking function
AH1 Acceptor handshaking function
T6 Basic talker function, serial polling function, and talker releasing
function by listener specification
L4 Basic listener function and listener releasing function by talker
specification
SR1 Service requesting function
RL1 Remote function
PPO No parallel function provided
DC1 Device clearing function provided
DT1 Device triggering function provided
CO No controlling function provided. However, the controller function
is enabled when the plotter is used.
E1 Open collector and bus driver used. However, E2 is used for EOI and
DAV (three-state bus driver used).

6-5 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________________________________________________6.3 GPIB Handling Method

6.3 GPIB Handling Method

6.3.1 For Connection to Component Devices

Since the GPIB system is composed of multiple devices, prepare the

entire system while paying attention to the following points
especially.

(1) Before connection, check the condition and operation of each device
according to the operation manual for R4131, controller and other
peripheral devices, etc.

(2) Do not make any bus cable connected to each measuring instrument and
controller, etc., unnecessarily long. The length of each cable should
be less than 4 m and the total length of all bus cables (the number of
devices connected to buses x 2) should not exceed 20 m. ADVANTEST
provides standard bus cables as shown in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Standard Bus Cables (To Be Purchased Separately)

Length Name
0.5 m 408JE-1P5
1 m 408JE-101
2 m 408JE-102
4 m 408JE-104

(3) Bus cable connectors are of a piggy back type. Male and female
connectors are provided for one connector, which can be used one over
the other. Do not pile up three or more connectors when connecting
cables. Also, be sure to screw connectors tightly with setscrews.

(4) Before turning ON the power of the devices connected to the bus lines,
check their power supply conditions, grounding status, and setting
conditions, too, when necessary. Be sure to set the power of each
component unit to ON. If any of them is not set to ON, the overall
operation cannot be guaranteed.

6.3.2 Setting of ADDRESS Switch

The rear panel of this equipment has a ADDRESS switch (Figure 6-4)
used to set addresses on the GPIB. By setting bits 1 (the right end)
to 5 to 0 or 1, addresses can be set from 0 to 30.

Set the ADDRESS switch before turning on the power.

6-6 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.3 GPIB Handling Method

The relationship between this ADDRESS switch and GPIB addresses is

shown in Table 6-3.

Table 6-3 Setting of ADDRESS Switch

GPIB Bit GPIB Bit GPIB Bit

address 5 4 3 2 1 address 5 4 3 2 1 address 5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 11 0 1 0 1 1 21 1 0 1 0 1
2 0 0 0 1 0 12 0 1 1 0 0 22 1 0 1 1 0
3 0 0 0 1 1 13 0 1 1 0 1 23 1 0 1 1 1
4 0 0 1 0 0 14 0 1 1 1 0 24 1 1 0 0 0
5 0 0 1 0 1 15 0 1 1 1 1 25 1 1 0 0 1
6 0 0 1 1 0 16 1 0 0 0 0 26 1 1 0 1 0
7 0 0 1 1 1 11 1 0 0 0 1 27 1 1 0 1 1
8 0 1 0 0 0 18 1 0 0 1 0 28 1 1 1 0 0
9 0 1 0 0 1 19 1 0 0 1 1 29 1 1 1 0 1
10 0 1 0 1 0 20 1 0 1 0 0 30 1 1 1 1 0

(1st bit)

Figure 6-4 ADDRESS Switch

6.3.3 Programming

Programming for GPIB covers the sending of GPIB command codes and data
to equipments to be connected, reading of data from devices, execution
of bus commands, and I/O commands, e.g., serial polling, etc. The
arithmetic operation and others shall conform to the program
generating procedure in the controller.

The format of GPIB commands to any equipments and I/O statements of

data have the configuration as follows:

I/O Part Unit Address I/O Command, Code, and Data

6-7 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________6.4 Setting of Each Function

6.4 Setting of Each Function

This equipment may be put under remote control for all functions using the
GPIB controller.

This section describes the setting of each function of this equipment

referring to program examples using a desk-top computer, HP Corporation's
HP200/300 series.

Program examples are all assumed to be set from their initial status.

Example 6-1: Setting the Center Frequency to 500 MHz and

Frequency Span to 2 MHz

HP200, 300 Series

OUTPUT 7 0 1 ; “SP 2MZ CP 500MZ *

- - - 500 MHz
--- Center frequency is made active.
- - - 2 MHz
--- Frequency span is made active.
--- -This equipment (GPIB address 01) is specified as LISTENER.
--- Interface selector (GPIB)
The controller is specified as TALKER.

When programmed and executed as above, this equipment is set to 500 MHz in
center frequency and 2 MHz in frequency span.

CF, SP, and MZ, etc. in the program are all GPIB commands to control this
equipment.

Since these commands correspond to keys of this equipment, the programming

can be made in the order of pressing keys on the panel.

See Section 6.9 for a list of GPIB codes.

6-8 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.4 Setting of Each Function

6.4.1 Setting of Center Frequency

There are two methods available for the setting of center frequency
using the GPIB.

One is to make the center frequency increase (or decrease) step by

step using the data knob setting command, and, while reading its value
sequentially, it is repeated until the frequency is set to the target
value. The other method is to set the value of frequency directly.

(1) When the Center Frequency Is Set Using the Command for Setting the
TUNING Knob

Example 6-2: Setting the Center Frequency to 1 GHz

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "SP 1GZ"

20 OUTPUT 701; "OPCF"
30 ENTER 701;F
40 IF F=1E9 THEN 70
50 OUTPUT 701; "CD"
60 GOTO 30
70 IF F=1E9 THEN 100
80 OUTPUT 701; "CU"
90 GOTO 30
100 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the frequency span to 1 GHz.
20 Instructs this equipment to output the value of the center frequency.
See the OP Command in 6.5.1.
30 Reads the value of the center frequency.
40 Branches to line No. 70 when the read data is smaller than or equal to
1 x 109 (Hz).
50 Sends the command to turn the data knob counterclockwise for 1 step of
COARSE.
60 Returns to line No. 30.
70 Branches to line No. 100 when the read data is equal to 1 x 10^ (Hz).
80 Sends the command to turn the data knob clockwise for 1 step of COARSE.
90 Returns to line No. 30.
100 End of program

Note: Note that the set resolution of the center frequency becomes
coarse and the center frequency cannot be set to the desired
value when the frequency span is wide.

6-9 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________ 6.4 Setting of Each Function

(2) When the Value of Center Frequency is Set Directly

Example 6-3: Setting the Center Frequency to 1 GHz Directly

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701: "CF1GZ"

20 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the center frequency to 1 GHz.
20 End of program

Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________6.4 Setting of Each Function

6.4.2 Setting of Frequency Span

There are two methods available for the setting of the frequency span
using the GPIB. One is to make the frequency span wider or narrower
in 1-2-5 steps using the command (NR and WD) corresponding to the key
on the front panel. The other method is to set the value of the
frequency span directly.

(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Key on Front Panel

Example 6-4: Setting the Frequency Span to 20 MHz

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "OPSP"

20 ENTER 701;S
30 IF S<=20E6 THEN 60
40 OUTPUT 701; "NR"
50 GOTO 20
60 IF S=20E6 THEN 90
70 OUTPUT 701; "WD"
80 GOTO 20
90 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Instructs this equipment to output the set value of frequency span.
Sends the command SP of the SPAN key to light the LED on the key.
20 Reads the data (the value of the frequency span).
30 Branches to line No. 60 when the read data is smaller than or equal
to 20 x 106 (Hz).
40 Sends the command for |oo]of this equipment to make the frequency
span narrower by 1 step.
50 Returns to line No. 20.
60 Branches to line No. 90 when the read data is equal to 20 x 10^
(Hz) .
70 Sends the command for |oo| of this equipment to widen the frequency
span by 1 step.
80 Returns to line No. 20.
90 End of program

6-11 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________________________ 6.4 Setting of Each Function

(2) When the Value of Frequency Span Is Set Directly

Example 6-5: Setting the Frequency Span to 20 MHz Directly

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701? "SP20MZ"

20 END

Line Meaning
No.
10 Sets the frequency span to 20 MHz.
20 End of program

When the frequency span is set directly, do it using the codes given
in the table below.

Frequency Span Set Value Codes

Code SPAN Code SPAN Code SPAN

SP50KZ 50 kHz
SP1OOKZ 100 kHz SP1OMZ 10 MHz SP1GZ 1 GHZ
SP200KZ 200 kHz SP20MZ 20 MHz SP2GZ 2 GHz
SP500KZ 500 kHz SP50MZ 50 MHz SP4GZ 4 GHz
SP1MZ 1 MHZ SP1OOMZ 100 MHz ZS ZEROSPAN
SP2MZ 2 MHz SP200MZ 200 MHz
SP5MZ 5 MHz SP500MZ 500 MHz

6.4.3 Setting of Reference Level

There are two methods available for setting the reference level using
the GPIB.

One is to set the reference level up and down using the command (LU,
LD, or FC) corresponding to the key on the front panel to set it to
the desired value. The other method is to set the value of the
reference level directly.

Note that the set range of the reference level narrows according to
the set value of the input attenuator.

6-12 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.4 Setting of Each Function

(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Key on Front Panel

Example 6-6: Setting the Reference Level to -30 dBm

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "OM"

20 ENTER 701 USING "#,B" ;A 1 ,A 2 ,A3,A 4 ,A5,A6,A7
30 IF A4=1 THEN 50
40 OUTPUT 701; "FC"
50 OUTPUT 701; "OPRL"
60 ENTER 701; L
70 IF L< =-30 THEN 100
80 OUTPUT 701; "LD"
90 GOTO 60
100 IF L=-30 THEN 130
110 OUTPUT 701; "LU"
120 GOTO 60
13 0 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Instructs the equipment to output the mode string.
20 Reads the mode string.
30 Incorporates a numeric value which indicates the setting COARSE or
FINE that the reference level setting switch sets to the numerical
variable A4. (COARSE = 0, FINE = 1)
Branches to line No. 50.
40 Sends the COARSE/FINE SELECTION key command.
50 Instructs this equipment to output the set value of the reference
level.
60 Reads the data.
70 Branches to line No. 100 when the read data is less than or equal to
-30 (dBm).
80 Sends the command of the REFERENCE LEVEL DOWN key (<>) to lower the
reference level by 1 step.
90 Returns to line No. 60.
1 00 Branches to line No. 130 when the read data is equal to -30 (dBm).
11 0 Sends the command of the REFERENCE LEVEL UP key |o| to raise the
reference level by 1 step.
120 Returns to line No. 60.
130 End of program

Note: See the mode string in 6.5.3.

6-13 Oct 20/89

 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________ 6,4 Setting of Each Function

(2) When the Value of the Reference Level Is Set Directly

Example 6-7: Setting the Reference Level to -30 dBm Directly

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701: "RL-30DM"

20 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the reference level to -30 dBm.
20 End of program

6.4.4 Setting of Marker

There are two methods available for setting the marker.

One is to increase or decrease the marker frequency step by step using

the command for the data knob setting, and while reading its value
sequentially, this is repeated until the marker is set to the desired
value. The other method is to set the value of the marker frequency
directly.

(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Data Knob

Example 6-8: Setting the Marker Frequency to 1 GHz

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "Ml"

20 OUTPUT 701; "OPMF"
30 ENTER 701;M
40 IF M<=1E9 THEN 70
50 OUTPUT 701; "FD"
60 GOTO 30
70 IF M=1E9 THEN 1 00
80 OUTPUT 701; "FU"
90 GOTO 30
100 END

Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.4 Setting of Each Function

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Displays the marker.
20 Instructs this equipment to output the value of the marker frequency.
30 Reads the value of the marker frequency.
40 Branches to line No. 70 when the read data is smaller than or equal
to 1 x 109 (Hz).
50 Sends the command to turn the data knob counterclockwise for 1 step
of FINE.
60 Returns to line No. 30.
70 Branches to line No. 100 when the read data is equal to 1 x 109
(Hz) .
80 Sends the command to turn the data knob clockwise for 1 step of FINE.
90 Returns to line No. 30.
100 End of program

(2) When the Value of Marker Frequency Is Set Directly

Example 6-9: Setting the Marker Frequency to 1 GHz Directly

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "MK1GZ"

20 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the marker frequency to 1 GHz.
20 End of program

Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.4 Setting of Each Function

6.4.5 Setting of Resolution Band Width

There are two methods available for setting the resolution band width
using the GPIB. One is to set it by making the resolution wide or
narrow as in step 1.3, using the command (RB, NR, or WD) corresponding
to the key on the front panel. The other method is to set the
resolution band width directly.

(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Key

Example 6-10: Setting the Resolution Band Width to 10 kHz

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701 ; "OPRBRB

20 ENTER 701 ? R
30 IF R<=1E4 THEN 60
40 OUTPUT 701 ; "NR"
50 GOTO 20
60 IF R=1E4 THEN 90
70 OUTPUT 701 ; "WD"
80 GOTO 20
90 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Instructs this equipment to output the value of the resolution band
width. Sends the RBW key command.
20 Receives the data (the value of the resolution band width).
30 Branches to line No. 60 when the read data is smaller than or equal
to 1 x 1O^ (Hz).
40 Sends the command of to make the resolution band width narrower
by 1 step.
50 Returns to line No. 20.
60 Branches to line No. 90 when the read data is equal to 1 x 10^
(Hz) .
70 Sends the command of jcx>| to widen the resolution band width by 1
step.
80 Returns to line No. 20.
90 End of program

6-16 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________________________ 6.4 Setting of Each Function

(2) When the Resolution Band Width Is Set Directly

Example 6-11: Setting the Resolution Band Width to 10 kHz Directly

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "RB10KZ"

20 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the resolution band width to 10 kHz.
20 End of program

When the value of the resolution band width is set directly, do it

using the codes shown in the table below.

Resolution Band Width Set Value Codes

Code Resolution band width Code Resolution band width

RB1KZ 1 kHz RB1OOKZ 100 kHz

RB3KZ 3 kHz RB300KZ 300 kHz
RB10KZ 10 kHz RBI MZ 1 MHz
RB30KZ 30 kHz

In addition, this equipment can automatically set the resolution band

width and sweep time to the optimum value, respectively, according to
the frequency span as shown in the following example:

Example 6-12: Making the Resolution Band Width into

the Automatic Setting Mode

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701: "BA"

20 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sends the AUTO key command to this equipment.
20 End of program

6-17 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6,4 Setting of Each Function

6.4,6 Setting of VIDEO FiLTeR Band Width

There are two methods available for setting the VIDEO FiLTeR band
width using the GPIB, One is to set it by making the VIDEO FiLTeR
band width narrower or wider step by step using the command {VU or VD)
corresponding to the key on the front panel. The other method is to
directly set the value of VIDEO FiLTeR band width.

(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Key

Example 6-13: Setting the VIDEO FiLTeR band width to 100 Hz

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "OPVF

20 ENTER 701;V
30 IF V<=1E2 THEN 60
40 OUTPUT 701; "VD"
50 GOTO 20
60 IF V=1E2 THEN 90
70 OUTPUT 701; "VU"
80 GOTO 20
90 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Instructs this equipment to output the value of VIDEO FiLTeR band
width.
20 Reads the data.
30 Branches to line No. 60 when the read data is smaller than or equal
to 1 x 1 02 (Hz).
40 Sends the VIDEO FILTER DOWN key (2 ) command to lower the set value of
VIDEO FiLTeR band width by 1 step.
50 Returns to line No. 20.
60 Branches to line No. 90 when the read data is equal to 1 x 102
(Hz).
70 Sends the VIDEO FILTER UP key 0 command to raise the set value of
VIDEO FiLTeR band width by 1 step.
80 Returns to line No. 20.
90 End of program

6-18 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________6.4 Setting of Each Function

(2) When the Value of VIDEO FiLTeR Band Width Is Set Directly

Example 6-14: Setting VIDEO FiLTeR band width to 100 Hz Directly

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "VF 100HZ"

20 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the VIDEO FiLTeR band width to 100 H z .
20 End of program

When the value of VIDEO FiLTeR band width directly, do it using the
codes shown in the table below.

VIDEO FiLTeR Band Width Set Value Codes

Code Value of VIDEO FiLTeR Band Width

VF10Hz 10 Hz
VF100Hz 100 Hz
VF1 KZ 1 kHz
VF10KZ 10 kHz
VF1OOKZ 100 kHz
VF300KZ 300 kHz
VF1MZ 1 MHz

6.4.7 Setting of Sweep Time {SWEEP TIME/DIV)

There are two methods available for setting the sweep time using the
GPIB. One is to set the sweep by making it long (or short) in steps
of 1-2-5 using the command (TU or TD) corresponding to the key on the
front panel. The other method is to set the sweep time directly.

6-19 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________6.4 Setting of Each Function

(1) When Using the Command Corresponding to the Key

Example 6-15: Setting the Sweep Time to 200 ms/DIV.

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "OPST"

20 ENTER 701 ;T
30 IF T<=0.2 THEN 60
40 OUTPUT 701; "TD"
50 GOTO 20
60 IF T = 0 .2 THEN 90
70 OUTPUT 701; "TU"
80 GOTO 20
90 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Instructs this equipment to output the value of the sweep time.
20 Reads the data (the value of the sweep time).
30 Branches to line No. 60 when the read data is smaller than or equal
to 0.2.
40 Sends the TIME/DIV DOWN key (<>) command to lower the sweep time by 1
step (to speed up the sweeping).
50 Returns to line No. 20.
60 Branches to line No. 90 when the read data is equal to 0.2.
70 Sends the TIME/DIV key 0 command to raise the value of the sweep
time by 1 step (to slowdown the sweeping).
80 Returns to line No. 20.
90 End of program

6-20 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.4 Setting of Each Function

(2) When the Sweep Time Is Set Directly

Example 6-16: Setting the Sweep Time to 200 ms/DIV Directly

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701: "ST200MS,'

20 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the sweep time to 200 ms/DIV.
20 End of program

When the value of the sweep time is set directly, do it using the
codes shown in the table below.

Sweep Time Set Value Codes

Code Sweep time Code Sweep time

ST5MS 5 ms/ STSOOMS 500 ms/
ST1OMS 10 ms/ ST1S 1 s/
ST20MS 20 ms/ ST2S 2 s/
ST50MS 50 ms/ ST5S 5 s/
ST1OOMS 100 ms/ ST1 OS 10 s/
ST2OOMS 200 ms/ ST20S 20 s/
ST50S 50 s/
ST1OOS 100 s/

6-21 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________________________ 6.5 Output of Setting Conditions

6.5 Output of Setting Conditions

To make the system output the set data of measurement parameters, call it
directly using the "OP" command, or make it output the mode strings to
detect it.

6.5.1 "OP" Command

When making the measurement parameter output directly, use the "OP"
command (Output Interrogated Parameter).

Following the "OP" command, the OP parameter code of the set data to
be output is sent to this equipment.

The OP parameters of this equipment are shown below.

OP Parameter Codes

Code Parameter output

AT ATTENUATOR
CF CENTER FREQUENCY
MF MARKER FREQUENCY
ML MARKER LEVEL
RB RESOLUTION BAND WIDTH
RL REFERENCE LEVEL
SP FREQ SPAN
ST SWEEP TIME
VF VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH
PL DISPLAY LINE
OB OCCUPIED BAND WIDTH (for R4131D)

Program examples to output the set data are given below.

6-22 May 31/94

 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________________________________ 6.5 Output of Setting Conditions

Example 6-17: Setting the Value of the Center Frequency and Reference
Level, and Making These Data Display by Reading It from
This Equipment

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701 ; "CF470MZ

20 OUTPUT 701 ; "RL-30DM
30 OUTPUT 701 ; "OPCF"
40 ENTER 701 ; F
50 OUTPUT 701 ; "OPRL"
60 ENTER 701 ; L
70 DISP F,L
80 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the center frequency to 470 MHz.
20 Sets the reference level to -30 dBm.
30 Instructs this equipment to output the set data of center frequency.
40 Reads the data and fetches it to variable F.
50 Instructs this equipment to output the set data of the reference
level.
60 Reads the data and fetches it to variable L.
70 Displays the value of variables F and L.
The value is displayed as "470000000 -30" in this example.
80 End of program

After the execution of the above program, the "470000000 -30" is

displayed on the screen.

6.5.2 Format of Output Data

The format of the output data by the "OP" command is as shown below:

HH ^ DDDDDDDD. DDE+ D CRLP

^— Block delimiter (See Table 6-14.)
— Data (Example: 00470000E + 3)
------------- Code of data Positive: Space
----------------- Header (Example: CF) Negative: "-"

The data output from this equipment is all output in this format
excluding the trace data and status byte. Since the total number of
bytes of data is 17 bytes, make an array declaration with more than 17
bytes when the data is input as a character array variable from the
GPIB controller, etc.

6-23 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__________________________________________ 6.5 Output of Setting Conditions

The header in the head of output data indicates the type of data and
it varies according to the data to be output. See Item (1).

The header may be omitted when not required. The header is set to OFF
by the "HD 0" command and to ON by the "HD 1" command.

Header set examples are given below:

(1) Header

The header in the head of output data indicates the type of data, and
it varies according to the data to be output.

The table below shows the relation between the output data and header.

Relation Between Output Data and Header

Type of output data Header

CENTER FREQUENCY CF
SPAN SP
REFERENCE LEVEL dBm DM
dBy DU
dB|i/m VM
LINEAR LV
dBmV DQ
SWEEP TIME/DIV ST
RESOLUTION BAND WIDTH RB
VIDEO FILTER VF
ATT AT
MARKER FREQUENCY MF
LEVEL dBm MM
dBy MU
dBp/m ME
LINEAR ML
dBmV MQ

The header may be omitted when not required.

The header is set to OFF by the "HD 0" command and to ON by the "HD 1 "
command. Header set examples are given below:

6-24 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.5 Output of Setting Conditions

Example 6-18: Setting the Header to OFF and Fetching the Value of
Center Frequency as a Character String. Next, Setting
the Header to ON and Fetching the Value of Center
Frequency as a Character String.

HP200/300 Series

10 DIM A$ [1 7]
20 OUTPUT 701? "HD0 OPCF”
30 ENTER 701 ; A$
40 PRINT A$
50 OUTPUT 701; "HD1 "
60 ENTER 701 ; A$
70 PRINT A$
80 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Declares the length of character string A$ to be 17 characters.
20 Sets the header of output data of this equipment to OFF. Also,
instructs this equipment to output the value of the center frequency.
30 Reads the data and fetches it to character string variable A$.
40 Displays the value of character string variable A$.
When the center frequency is 400 MHz, for instance, the value is
displayed as " 00400000.00E+3".
50 Sets the header of output data of this equipment to ON.
60 Reads the data and fetches it to character string variable A$.
70 Displays the value of character string variable A$.
When the center frequency is 400 MHz, the value is displayed as
"CFi_i00400000.00E+3
80 End of program

6-25 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________6,5 Output of Setting Conditions

(2) Block Delimiter

The block delimiter indicates the end of signal.

This equipment provides four types of block delimiters as shown in the

table below.

Block Delimiter Specified Codes

Code Block delimiter

DL 1 Outputs the 1-byte code of "LF".
DL 2 Outputs the last byte of data and single-wire signal "EOI"
at the same time.
DL 3 Outputs the 2-byte codes of "CR" and "LF".
DL 0 Outputs the 2-byte codes of "CR" and "LF". Also, outputs
the single-wire signal "EOI" simultaneously with "LF".

When a command or data is sent from the GPIB controller, etc., to this
equipment, it accepts the command or data, if the sent command or data
is applicable to either one of the above-mentioned block delimiters.
When the block delimiter is not applicable to either one of the above
four types, the GPIB of this equipment will not operate normally.

When data is fetched from this equipment, the block delimiter of this
equipment must be set to that of the data receiving side (GPIB
controller, etc.). Select either one of the above four types.

The block delimiter can be changed to a different type of block

delimiter by sending the appropriate command for the desired block
delimiter from the GPIB controller.

The block delimiter of this equipment is set to DL 3 at power ON.

6-26 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.5 Output of Setting Conditions

6.5.3 Mode String

The set value of center frequency and frequency span of this equipment
can be output the "OP" command. The setting status of the other keys
(e.g., INPUT ATTENUATOR key, etc.) can be checked by the mode string
when output.

The mode string is composed of seven bytes of binary code. Each byte
indicates the setting status of each function of this equipment.

When the mode string is to be output, use the "OM" (OUTPUT MODE
STRING) command. When this command is sent, this equipment outputs
the mode string when it is specified to TALKER.

When the mode string is output, the delimiter of the data adds the EOI
of the single-wire signal to the last byte (the seventh byte). The CR
and LF codes are not used.

The meanings of each byte of the mode string and the functions to be
read are as follows:

1St byte: Setting status of MIN INPUT ATTENUATOR

2nd byte: Setting status of 10 dB/, 2 dB/, 5 dB/, LINEAR switches
3rd byte: Setting status of the unit (UNITS switch) of the reference
level
4 th byte: Setting of reference level FINE/COARSE SELECTION switch
5th byte: Setting status of trigger mode
6 th byte: Definition of whether the setting of data knob is CENTER
FREQ or MARKER
7 th byte: Definition of whether the AFC mode is ON or OFF

6-27 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________6.5 Output of Setting Conditions

Mode String

Bit usage Decimal

Byte # Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 value

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INPUT ATTENUATOR: 0 dB

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 10 dB
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 20 dB
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 30 dB
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 40 dB
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 50 dB
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Tube surface ordinates 10 dB/DIV
axis display:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 dB/DIV

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 5 dB/DIV(QP)
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 LINEAR

3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Display unit of dBm

REFERENCE LEVEL:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 dBu
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 dBp/m(A)
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 dBjj/m{B)
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 dBy/m(C)
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 dBp/m(D)
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 mV, yV

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 t 7 dBmV
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 REFERENCE LEVEL: COARSE
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 FINE

5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TRIGGER MODE: FREE RUN

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 LINE

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 VIDEO
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 SINGLE
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DATA KNOB: MARKER
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 CF
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AFC: OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 ON

6-28 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________ 6.5 Output of Setting Conditions

Example 6-19: Detecting the Value of Attenuator by Making the Mode

String Output

HP200/300 Series

10 DIM M (6)
20 OUTPUT 701; "OM
30 ENTER 701 USING
"#, B"; M (*)
40 DISP M (0)
50 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Secures 7 bytes for variable M.
20 Specifies the output of the mode string.
30 Fetches the mode string.
40 Displays the 1st byte (ATTENUATOR) of the mode string.
50 End of program

6-29 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.6 Input/Output of Trace Data

6.6 Input/Output of Trace Data

This equipment can output the trace data (waveform displayed on the
screen). It also can input the same data from outside. This function makes
it possible to analyze and arithmetically process the waveform data using
the controller.

The trace data on the screen of this equipment is composed of 701 points of
data on the frequency axis (horizontal axis). For input/output of the trace
data, this 701-point data is input or output from the left (lower ones in
frequency) sequentially. The trace data of each point is expressed with
integers from 0 to 511 (Figure 6-5).

Number of points of data

Figure 6-5 Correlation Between Screen Grids and Trace Data

The input/output of trace data can be made in two forms, ASCII code and
binary code. Of the two, the ASCII code is convenient when data is input or
output point by point. When the data is input or output for one screen (701
points) all together, the binary code is faster in finishing the
processing. Use these two ways case by case.

6-30 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__________________ 6.6 Input/Output of Trace Data

6.6.1 Output of Trace Data

The "OP" command is used for the output of trace data. When the
parameter code is sent in succession to the "OP" command, the desired
trace data can be output. For the parameter codes of trace data, see
the table below.

Trace Data Parameter Codes

Code Data to be input or output Type of data

TAA Trace data of VIEW screen memory ASCII code

TAW Trace data of WRITE screen memory

TBA Trace data of VIEW screen memory Binary code

TBW Trace data of WRITE screen memory

(1) Method to Output the Trace Data with ASCII Code

OUTPUT 701; "OPTAW"

When this program is executed, this equipment outputs the trace data
of the WRITE screen memory with the ASCII code when it is specified to
TALKER.

ENTER 701 ; A

When this program is executed, the trace data for one point is fetched
to variable A. When the same ENTER statement is executed, the trace
data of the second point, third point ... can be obtained sequentially.

The data format at this time is expressed in 4-digit numerics with no

header as shown below:

DDDD CRLF
1.. - Block delimiter
--- Trace data (for one point: 0511 for
instance)

When the trace data is fetched as a character string variable, declare

the array by setting the length of the character string variable used
to more than 4 bytes.

6-31 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.6 Input/Output of Trace Data

A program example to output the trace data with ASCII code

Example 6-20: Output the trace data in memory with ASCII code, and
store in array variable.

HP200/300 Series

10 DIM A (700)
20 OUTPUT 701 . "OPTAW
30 FOR 1=0 TO 700
40 ENTER 701 ; A (I)
50 NEXT I
60 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Declares array variable A(I) up to 701 points.
20 Instructs this equipment to output the trace data of the WRITE
screen memory with the ASCII code.
30 Instructs this equipment to vary variable I from 0 to 700 one by
one. (The loop is repeated 701 times.)
40 Reads the trace data for one point and stores it in array variable
A (I) .
50 Increments variable I by 1 only, and returns to line No. 40 when I <
700, but runs on to the next line when I 5 700.
60 End of program

(2) Method to Output Data with the Binary Code

OUTPUT 701; "OPTBW"

When this program is executed, this equipment outputs the trace data
of the WRITE screen memory with the binary code when it is specified
to TALKER. Since 701 points of trace data (for 1 screen) is output
all together at this time, the controller side should be ready to
input the 701 points of data at the one time. Also, since the EOI
signal is specified to the delimiter when the data is output with the
binary code, the controller side should continue the data input until
the EOI signal can be detected.

6-32 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.6 Input/Output of Trace Data

The data output format with the binary code is shown below:

D D D D D D D D + E O I

L Low order byte in the

2nd point
L Low order byte in the
701st point. The EOI
— High order byte in the is added to it as
2nd point delimiter.
•Low order byte in the 1st point

— High order byte in the 1st point

One point of data consists of 9 bits in the binary code.

Consequently, one point of data is expressed in 2 bytes which are
divided into high order byte and low order byte. When the data is
output to the GPIB, the upper byte in the first is output first and
then the low order byte in the first point, followed by the high order
byte in the second point and so forth, and lastly the low order byte
in the 701st point.

Example 6-21: The trace data in the memory is output with the binary
code to be stored in an array variable.

HP200/300 Series

10 DIM A (700)
20 OUTPUT 701? "OPTBW"
30 FOR 1=0 TO 700
40 ENTER 701 USING "#,W";
50 NEXT I
60 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Declares numeric array variable A(I) for as many numbers as required.
20 Instructs this equipment to output the trace data in the WRITE
screen memory with the binary code.
30 Instructs this equipment to vary variable I from 0 to 700 one by
one. (The loop is repeated 701 times.)
40 Fetches 2-byte binary data, converts it into decimal data, and
stores it in numeric array variable A(I). Then, increments variable
50 I by 1 only. When I is < 700, the program execution returns to the
preceding line. When I 700, it proceeds to the next line.
60 End of program. (Usually, the trace data execution program is input
after this.)

6-33 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______ 6.6 Input/Output of Trace Data

6.6.2 Input of Trace Data

The "IN" command is used to input the trace data in R4131. When the
parameter code of trace code is sent to this equipment after the "IN”
command, the desired trace data can be input. The parameter code of
trace data used for this input is the same as the code used in its
output.

(1) Method to Input the Trace Data with the ASCII Code

OUTPUT 701; "INTAA"

When programmed and executed like this, this equipment enters the
input mode of the trace data. When the data is sent to this equipment
with the ASCII code after this, that data is stored in the first point
of the VIEW screen memory.

When the data is sent further, the trace data is set to the second
point, third point ... in the memory, sequentially.

If any data other than the trace data is sent to the equipment under
this status, this equipment automatically exits from the trace data
input mode and returns to its routine status.

The data format is the same as that when the data is output with the
ASCII code.

A program example to input the trace data with the ASCII code

Example 6-22: The trace data is assumed to be provided in numeric

array variable A(I). The data in A (I) is then input to
the VIEW screen memory of this equipment with the ASCII
code.

HP200/300 Series

100 OUTPUT 701; "INTAA"

110 FOR 1=0 TO 700
120 OUTPUT 701; INT(A(I))
130 NEXT I
140 END

6-34 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6,6 Input/Output of Trace Data

Line
Meaning
No.
100 Instructs this equipment to receive the trace data to the VIEW
screen memory with the ASCII code.
1 10 Instructs this equipment to vary variable I from 0 to 700, one by
one. (The loop is repeated 701 times.)
1 20 Converts the data in array A(I) into integers and sends it to this
equipment.
130 Increments the value of variable I by 1 only. When I < 700, the
program execution returns to line No. 120. When I ^ 700, it
proceeds to the next line.
140 End of program

When this equipment is set to the VIEW mode after the execution of
this program, it is possible to see the tracing waveform by the input
data.

(2) Method to Input the Trace Data with the Binary Code

OUTPUT 701; "INTBA"

When programmed and executed like this, this equipment enters the
trace data input mode with the binary code. In the binary code, input
the trace data for one screen (701 points) all together at a time.
Since R4131 continues the data input until the EOI signal is detected,
be sure to add the EOI to the last byte of the trace data.

The data format is the same as in the output of the trace data with
the binary code. A program example for the input of trace data is as
follows:

A program example to input the trace data with the binary code

Example 6-23: The trace data is assumed to be provided in the numeric

array variable A(I). The data in A(I) is then input in
the VIEW screen memory of this equipment with the
binary code.

HP200/300 Series

100 OUTPUT 701; "INTBA"

110 FOR 1=0 TO 699
120 OUTPUT 701 USING "#,W"; A(I)
13 0 NEXT I
140 OUTPUT 701 USING ,,#,wM; A(I), END
15 0 END

6-35 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.6 Input/Output of Trace Data

Line
Meaning
No.
100 Instructs this equipment to receive the trace data in its VIEW
screen memory with the binary code, and to make a change so that the
EOI is added to the last byte of the delimiter.
110 Instructs this equipment to vary variable I from 0 to 699, one by
one. (The loop is repeated 701 times.)
120 Converts the data of numeric array A(I) into 2-byte binary code and
sends it to this equipment.
130 Increments variable I by 1 only. When I < 699, the program
execution returns to the preceding line. When I ^ 699, it proceeds
to the next line.
140 Adds the EOI signal when the last point data is set.
150 End of program

When this equipment is set to the VIEW mode after the execution of the
above program, it is possible to see the trace data input through the
input data.

6-36 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________________________________________________6.7 Service Request

6.7 Service Request

By using the service request function of GPIB, various statuses of this

equipment can be detected from the outside.

Contents of the service request can be known from status bytes shown in
Table 6-17.

Status Byte

Bit # Decimal value Function

7 128 End of sweep
6 64 Service request (SRQ)
5 32
4 16 CF CAL
3 8 Signal track
2 4 Marker search
1 2 Center frequency set

0 1 ZERO CAL

(1) Status Byte

Each bit of the status byte is set to "1" when the following
conditions are met.

Status byte

Bit 0: ”1" is set when ZERO CAL is executed and the calibration is
finished.
Bit 1: "1" is set when the center frequency is set using the "CF"
command of GPIB.
Bit 2: "1" is set if the marker ends the searching when the searching
function is executed by the marker.
Bit 3: This bit is changed from 0 to 1 when the waveform peak
position is ended to be set to the center frequency during the
execution of the signal tracking function of marker.
Bit 4: "1" is set when the CF CL is executed and the calibration is
finished.
Bit 6: When "1" is set to either bit 0 to bit 5, or bit 7 and the
service request (SRQ) is transmitted, this bit also goes to
111“ at the same time.
Bit 7: "1" is set when the sweeping ends.

6-37 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________________________________________________ 6.7 Service Request

This service request is turned ON/OFF by GPIB commands "SO" and "S1".

When the status byte is read, this equipment clears the status byte.

(2) Output of Status Byte

The status byte can be read when the serial polling is executed as
shown in the following example:

Example 6-24: ZERO CAL is judged to be ended by reading

the status byte.

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "SHFL"

20 S=SPOLL(701)
30 IF BIT(S,0)<>1 THEN 20
40 OUTPUT 701;"CF200MZ SP100KZ"
50 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Executes the ZERO CAL.
20 Reads the status byte and incorporates it in variable S.
30 Waits until bit #0 becomes 1 after the end of the execution of ZERO
CAL.
40 For the next setting after the end of ZERO CAL, the center frequency
is set to 200 MHz and spans to 100 kHz in this stage.
50 End of program

6-38 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________________________________________________ 6.8 Notes in Programming

6.8 Notes in Programming

(1) Noteworthy Points in Sending a Command

When a command is sent to this equipment, the command can be delimited

with a space or comma (,) as shown below:

Example 6-25: A command is delimited with a space or comma (,)

and sent to this equipment.

OUTPUT 701; "SO OPCF, HD 1"

(2) Noteworthy Points in Spectrum Analysis When the Frequency Span

Is Made Narrower

The center frequency setting accuracy is ±10 MHz or less when

R4131C/CN and the AFC of R4131D/DN are set to OFF. Hence, when the
center frequency is set directly by setting the frequency span to less
than 10 MHz, no spectrum is displayed on the screen in some cases.

Consequently, when the spectrum is analyzed by making the frequency

span narrow, try to program so that narrow the span narrows while
always seizing the signal.

Example 6-26: The frequency span is made narrow up to 50 kHz

for the 200 MHz reference signal.

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "CF 200MZ, SP20MZ, RL-30DM"

20 WAIT 1
30 OUTPUT 701; "SHM4"
40 S=SPOLL(701)
50 IF BIT(S,3)<>1 THEN 40
60 OUTPUT 701; "NR"
70 OUTPUT 701; "OPSP"
80 ENTER 701; A
90 IF A <> 50000 THEN 40
100 END

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the center frequency to 200 MHz, frequency span to 20 MHz, and
reference level to -30 dBm.
20 Waits for 1 sec.
30 Sets the signal tracking function to ON.
40 Reads the status byte and incorporates it to variable S .
50 After the end of signal tracking, waits until bit #3 becomes 1.

6-39 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________6.8 Notes in Programming

Line
Meaning
No.
60 Makes the frequency span narrower by 1 step.
70 Reads the frequency span and sets the mode.
80 Reads the data.
90 Returns to line 40 unless the frequency span is 50 kHz.
100 End of program

(3) Noteworthy Points for the Setting of Center Frequency When the
Frequency Span Is Less Than 10 MHz

When the center frequency is changed in the setting of the frequency

span to less than 10 MHz, the spectrum shifts after the setting,
although varied according to the amount of change. This is caused by
the time constant of the frequency stabilization circuit. Note that
no correct data is indicated in the case of a program used to read the
marker frequency level under this status.

Example 6-27: When the Frequency of the 200 MHz Reference

Signal Is Read

HP200/300 Series

10 OUTPUT 701; "CF 3500MZ SP 1OMZ"

20 WAIT 1
30 OUTPUT 701; "CF 200MZ"
40 WAIT 10
50 OUTPUT 701; "M4"
60 OUTPUT 701; "OPMF"
70 ENTER 701; F
80 DISP F

Line
Meaning
No.
10 Sets the center frequency to 3500 MHz and frequency span to 10 MHz.
20 Sets the waiting time for 1 sec.
30 Sets the center frequency to 200 MHz.
40 Takes the waiting time here until the spectrum is stabilized
(approx. 10 sec. maximum). The waiting time is set to 10 sec. in
this example.
50 Executes the PEAK SEARCH.
60 Reads the marker frequency.
70 Incorporates the marker frequency to variable F.
80 Displays the marker frequency.

6-40 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.9 List of GPIB Codes

6.9 List of GPIB Codes

Table 6-4 List of GPIB Codes

:
Sett ing ■ Co de Re m a r k s ! Se 11 ing Code Remarks
i

Input of m e a s u r i n g C o m m a n d c o d e c o r r e s p o n d i n g to e a c h k e y Input of trace da ta IN Memory. A S C I I / binary

condi t ion i (See F i g u r e 6-6.) s p e c i f i e d co de is the
same as in i ts output.
S p e c i f i c s the o u t p u t d a ta by the OP p a r a m e t e r !j
O u tp u t uf m e a s u r i n g | OP
c o n d i t i o n anil t race code. ; O u t p u t of the s t at u s OS The E01 is a d d e d to the
da ta S p e c i f i e s the o u t p u t w a v e f o r m d a ta by the trace ; byte last byte of d a ta as a
memory, AS CI I / b i n a r y s p e c i f i e d code. del imi ter.
i !i
! (CR LF is not u s e d . )
! j. U kJ I v I vi 111*^ ulU \J 0 OH
IIP p a r a m e t e r c o d e Ou t p u t form a t of outp u t da ta | string
ATTENUATOR AT
CENTER FREQUENCY CF ^ N um b e r of byte s : 17 ^ S e r v i c e re qu e s t "SI” at the p o w e r
MARKER FREQUENCY MF ex c e p t d e l i m i t e r s J Transmitted 50
MARKER LEVEL ML DDDDDDDD, DD E ± D CR LF No I t r a n s m i t t e d 51
RESOLUTION BAND WIDTH RB
REFERENCE LEVEL RL T ^Block delimiter Initialization : !P
F R E Q SP AN SP
SWEEP TIME ST — D a t a index part Header OFF HD O at the p o we r
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH : VF ON HD 1
DISPLAY LINE - D at a m a n t i s s a
OCCUPIED FREQUENCY
I
j
PL
OB
B A ND W I D T H , P o si t i v e : S p a c e (Blank) H e a d e r to be output
\ R 4 1 3 1 D o nly) - D a ta co de
- - - - Header Negative: " CENTER CF F R E Q U E N C Y SP AN SP MARKER MF
FREQUENCY SW EE P T I M E ST FREQUENCY
| T r a c e memory, a n d A S C I I / O u t p u t form a t of trace d a t a REFERENCE RESOLUTION RB LE VE L dBm MM
! b i n a r y s p e c i f i e d co de ASCII D D DD C R LF ^ N u m b e r of byte s : 4 \ LEVEL d B u DU BAND WIDT H dB u MU
— I- - — I e x c e p t d e li m i ters ) dBm DM VIDEO F1LTEH VF dB^/m ME
T r a c e da ta of m e m o r y A I L— B l o c k del imiter dB tt/m VN B A ND W I D T H LINEAR ML
j A S CI I o u t p u t TAA - T r a c e d a ta (for a point} i LINEAR LV ATTENUATOR AT dBmV MQ
i Binary output TBA dBmV DQ
Bi n a r y D D D - DDD d u m b e r of bytes: 1 4 02 \
; W R I T E m e m o r y t r ac e d a t a | | I [ except d e limiters J
| A S CI I o u t p u t : TAW ■ ^ H i g h / l o w o r d e r b y te s in the :j B l o c k del imi ter
; Binary output : TRW 70 1s t p o int jj CR. L F t EOI 01,0
j — H i g h o r d e r b y t e In the 2 n d point i LF DL I
1— L o w o r d e r b y te in the 1st p oint KOI DL2
- H i g h o r d e r b y te in the 1st point CR. LF DL3 "013” at the p o we r
(1 -p o i n t d a ta in 2 bytes)

6-41 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.9 List of GPIB Codes

Table 6-5 GPIB Code Corresponding to Each Key

Key Code Key Code

INSTR PRESET IP (SHMO) ATT OdB AO
CTR FREQ CF VIDEO FLTR

DATA KNOB 0 UP VU
COARSE DOWN CD
CU 0 DOWN VD
U X l UP
11 /) FINE DOWN FD SWEEP TI M E / D I V
UP FU 0 UP TU

MARKER ON M1 0 DOWN TD
OFF MO
MKR CF M3 TRIGGER TR
PEAK M4 START/RESET SR
CF CAL FL
LCL LC
FREQ SPAN SP
ZERO SPAN ZS (SHSP) WRITE WR
AUTO BA STORE SE
RBW RB VIEW VW
FREQ SPAN, RBW MAX HOLD MA (SHWR)

|^1 WIDE WD RECALL RC

SAVE SV (SHRC)
NARROW NR
CF ADJ SHCF
R>1 UP LU OBW SHM1 *
AFC SHM3 **
DOWN LD SIG TRK SHM4
ZERO CAL SHFL
FINE/COARSE FC
NOISE/Hz SHBA
1OdB/DIV LI (SHLD) NORMALIZATION SHRB
2dB/DIV L2 (SHLU) DSPL LINE SHWD
QP L3 (SHFC)
LINEAR LN (SHUN) NORMAL DET SHVD **
UNITS UN POS DET SHTD
INPUT ATTENUATOR SAMPLE DET SHTR
@ UP AU

ID DOWN AD

Note: Codes marked with one asterisk (*) are available for R4131D.
Codes marked with two asterisks (**) are available for R4131D/DN
only.

6-42 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.9 List of GPIB Codes

©1MT“^7
° u
I I

IAUTO I ISPAN I
CTO FEEO MABKOI OFF D
% B NCRM NOXSE/Ht
□
ZEROCF AOJ
□ □
1N5TR

© □ ___________

W 1 I PLOT c m . LIM E

Q — v ie w
REFERENCE LEVEL.
@1 I
£> o •Q- (ji CF CAL W AK WW-CF
SB
C T ) gave
SHIFT ___
“" “H© CJEMOL
1 C U011W C ]
uwnrtlil 2m/r AHEMMtA
© □ *j h — 1 n € 0 E ®
___ lpcarCI O—od®
IO M 4*-3,9G H i
« 2 M i MAX
l^ a g m im g g irl R4131D SPECTRUM ANALYZER 440VDC MAX

PHOC
((§))

Figure 6 - 6 GPIB Code for each Key

6-43 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.9 List of GPIB Codes

Table 6 - 6 Direct Set GPIB Codes Table 6 - 7 Unit Display GPIB Codes

Contents Code Unit Code

dBm DM GHz GZ
dB u DU MHz MZ
UNITS dB fJ. /a (A) Dl kHz KZ
dB £f /m (B) D2 Hz HZ
dB fx /m (C) D3 V V
dB {J. /m (D) D4 mV MV
dBmV DV ju V UV
sec S
FREE RUN FR mse c MS
Trigger LINE LI dBm DM
Mode VIDEO VT dB ££ DU
SINGLE SI dBju/tn (A) Dl
dBju/m (B) D2
0 dB A0 dBju/m (C) D3
10 dB A1 dBjtf/m (D) D4
Attenuator 20 dB A2
30 dB A3
40 dB A4
50 dB A5

data
Contents Code-!- □ □

Center frequency CP □ □
Reference level RL □ □
Frequency span SP □ □
R e s o l u t ion band width RB □ □
Marker MK □ □
Video filter band width VP □ □
Sw e e p time ST □ □
Display line PL □ □

6-44 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.9 List of GPIB Codes

Table 6 - 8 Numreric Value Code in Table 6 - 9 Mode String

Setting Condition Input

Byte $
Code Set value Bit Decimal Contents
VF10HZ 10Hz 76543210 value
VF100HZ 100Hz INPUT ATT
-o
VF1KZ lkz 00000000 0 0 dB
VF10KZ lOkz 10 dB
o
VF100KZ lOOkz 00000001 1
—
VF300KZ 300kz 1 00000010 2 20 dB
VF1MZ lMz 00000011 3 30 dB
00000100 4 40 dB
ST5MS 5 ms/ 00000101 5 50 dB
ST10MS 10 ms/ Tube surface
ST20MS 20 ms/ ordinates
ST50MS 50 ms/ axis display
CD ST100MS 100 ms/ 2
e
ST200MS 200 ms/ 00000000 0 10 dB/DIV
-4->
ST500MS 500 ms/ 00000001 1 2 dB/DIV
O h
<L> ST1S 1 s/ 00000010 2 5 dB/DIV(QP)
OJ
ST2S 2 s/ 00000011 3 LINEAR
oo
ST5S 5 s/ Ordinates axis
ST10S 10 s/ 00000000 unit, dBm
ST20S 20 s/ 0
ST50S 50 s/ 00000001 1 dB/«
ST100S 100 s/ 00000010 2 dB£t/m (A)
3 00000011 3 dB fx/ m(B)
t-H AO 0 dB 00000100 4 dB v / m(C)
o
+-> A1 10 dB 00000101 5 dB /x/m(D)
cd
A2 20 dB 00000110 6 mV,
c
GJ A3 30 dB 00000111 7 dBmV
-C
A4 40 dB REF LVL STEP
A5 50 dB SIZE:
SP50KZ 50 kHz 4 00000000 0 COARSE
SP100KZ 100 kHz 00000001 1 FINE
SP200KZ 200 kHz TRIGGER MODE
SP500KZ 500 kHz FREE RUN
SP1MZ 1 MHz 00000000 0
c
SP2MZ 2 MHz 5 00000001 1 LINE
O.
SP5MZ 5 MHz 00000010 2 VIDEO
C/5
SP10MZ 10 MHz 00000011 3 SINGLE
u
SP20MZ 20 MHz Data knob
OJ SP50MZ 50 MHz Marker
CT" SP100MZ 100 MHz 6 00000000 0
CD
J-H SP200MZ 200 MHz 00000001 1 CF
fj i
SP500MZ 500 MHz AFC
SP1GZ 1 GHz 7 OFF
SP2GZ 2 GHz 00000000 0
SP4GZ 4 GHz 00000001 1 ON
ZS ZEROSPAN
RB1KZ 1 kHz
R83KZ 3 kHz Table 6 - 1O Status Byte
RB10KZ 10 kHz
3 3: RB30KZ 30 kHz Bit Decimal Function (set to 1 when
0 * 0
RB100KZ 100 kHz value ended)
RB300KZ 300 kHz
RB1MZ 1 MHz 7 128 End of sweeping
6 64 Service request
5 32
4 16 CF CAL
3 8 Signal track
2 4 Marker search
1 2 Center frequency setting
0 1 ZERO CAL

6 - 45* Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

7. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

7. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

7 - 1 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

7.1 Defects and Abnormal Stresses

7.1 Defects and Abnormal Stresses

When the R4131C, R4131CN, R4131D, R4131DN is impaired as undermentioned,

it is thought that the protective function is damaged.

Before the R4131C, R4131CN, R4131D, R4131DN is used, make sure to find the
damage and ensure the safety of this equipment at your nearest support
office.

The instruments:
• show visible damage,
• fails to perform the intended measurements,
• has been subjected to prolonged storage under unfavourable conditions,
• has been subjected to severe transport stresses.

------------------------------------ WARNING ---------------------------------

To remov the unit case is allowed only for the trained service personnel
because there is danger of the electric shock.

7-2 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7.2 Notes in Storing
____________________________________________ ____ _____ and Shipping this Equipment

7.2 Notes in Storing and Shipping this Epuipment

7.2.1 Storage of This Equipment

The storage temperature range of this equipment is -20°C to +70°C.

When this equipment is not used for a long period of time, cover it with
vinyl or put in a cardboard box, and store it in a dry place away from
direct sunlight.

7.2.2 Cleaning of This Equipment

Periodically take off the filter which protects the CRT display and
clean the inside of the filter and CRT display unit with a soft cloth
soaked in alcohol. Do not use any cleaner other than alcohol.

The filter can be taken off by removing two screws of the bezel.

------------------------------------ CAUTION -------------------------------

Never use any cleaner other than alcohol for the maintenance of this
equipment.
Organic solvent such as benzene, toluene or acetone may spoil the plastic
parts of this equipment.

7.2.3 Shipment of This Equipment

When shipping this equipment, use the original packing materials. If

they are not available, pack the equipment as follows:

(1) Wrap this equipment in appropriate shock absorbing material and put
it in a corrugated cardboard box at least 5 mm thick.

(2) Wrap its accessories separately in the same shock absorbing material
and put them in the same corrugated cardboard box together with this
equipment.

(3) Fasten the corrugated cardboard box with packing strings.

7-3* May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
8. Technical Data of
Function and Accessories

8. TECHNICAL DATA OF FUNCTION AND ACCESSORIES

8 - 1 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.1 Technical Data of Function

8.1 Technical Data of Function

(1) Frequency Specification

Frequency range :
10 kHz to 3.5 GHz
Frequency display :
Displayed on the CRT screen
Maximum resolution: 1 kHz (to be changed
according to the frequency span)
Frequency displaying accuracy:

R4131C/CN Less than ±10 MHz After ZERO CAL

R 4131D/DN ±100 kHz + After ZERO CAL
SPAN 3% or less Within the range of 0 Hz to
2.5 GHz in center frequency and
5 ms to 0.5 S/DIV in sweep time.
±10 MHz After ZERO CAL
Center frequency 2 GHz or more

Frequency span 4 GHz to 100 kHz, ZERO 1-2-5 step

Frequency span accuracy ±5%
Frequency stability R 4131C/CN
Less than 100 kHz/5 min.
Frequency is fixed after warming up for 1
hour under constant temperature.
R4131D/DN
Less than 10 kHz/10 min.
AFC ON
Frequency is fixed after warming up for 1
hour under constant temperature.
(Within the range of 0 Hz to 2.5 GHz in
center frequency, 5 ms to 0.5 S/DIV in sweep
time)
Residual FM Less than 2 kHZp_p/100 ms
Noise sideband

Where the resolution band width is assumed to

More than 80 dBc be 1 kHz, video filter band width to be
10 Hz, and 20 kHz to be detuned from signal.

8-2 Aug 18/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.1 Technical Data of Function

Resolution:
Resolution band width
3 dB .............. 1 kHz to 1 MHz with 1-3 step
6 dB .............. 9 kHz to 120 kHz when QP mode is selected
Band width selectivity
: Less than 15:1 60 dB: 3 ratio of dB
resolution band width
Resolution band width accuracy
: Less than ±20%
Less than the value of CISPR Standards in
the QP mode
Marker display : Can be set freely
Resolution .......... 1 kHz max. (To be changed according to the
SPAN)
Measuring accuracy ... Center frequency display accuracy +
frequency span accuracy

(2) Amplitude Specification

Tube surface display range

LOG 80 dB 10 dB/DIV
20 dB 2 dB/DIV
40 dB 5 dB/DIV, In the QP mode only
LIN 10 DIV
Linearity LOG ±0.15 dB/1 dB
±1 dB/10 dB
±1.5 dB/70 dB or more
Less than 5% of LIN scale
Reference level LOG -69 dBm to +40 dBm: R4131C/D,
40.25 dBp to 150 dBU: R4131CN/DN
10 dB, 1 dB Step 10 dB/DIV
1 dB, 0.25 dB step 2 dB/DIV,
in the QP mode
LIN 72.77 MV to +22.36 V: R4131C/D
(102.9 UV to +31.62 V: R4131CN/DN)
Reference level accuracy
Less than ±1 dB in the LOG mode
This value is taken after calibrating the
level at a frequency of 200 MHz and input
ATT of 10 dB within the range of 0 to 59 dBm
(R4131C/D) and 110 dBy to 51 dBy
(R4131CN/DN) in reference level.
Unit of reference level dBm, dBjj, dBu/m, or dBmV, selectable
Marker display
Resolution ..... 0.2 dB 10 dB/DIV
0.05 dB 2 dB/DIV

8-3 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.1 Technical Data of Function

Dynamic range
Average noise level
..... -110 dBm: R4131 C/D esolution band width
-108 dBm: R4131CN/DN 1 kHz, Video filter band
width
10 Hz, Input ATT 0 dB,
More than 1 MHz in
frequency

Secondary/tertiary distortion
..... More than 70 dB Where the input level is
assumed to be -30 dBm
and frequency to be more
than 1 MHz

Frequency response:

R4131C 100 kHz ^ F ^ 2 GHz 10 kHz ^ F ^ 3 . 5 GHz

ATT 10 dB or more ATT 10 dB or more
±1 dB or less ±3.5 dB or less

R4131D 100 kHz F <1 2 GHz 10 kHz ^ F ^ 3.5 GHz

ATT 10 dB or more ATT 10 dB or more
±1 dB or less ±2 dB or less
R4131CN/DN 100 kHz ^ F ^ 1.5 GHz 10 kHz ^ F ^ 2 GHz 2 kHz ^ F ^ 3 . 5 GHz
±1.5 dB or less ±2.5 dB or less ±4 dB or less

Residual response: -95 dBm or less: When terminated at input

R4131C/D ATT 0 dB and input 50 0.
-93 dBm or less: When terminated at input
R4131CN/DN ATT 0 dB and input 75 ft
Note: At frequency 100 kHz
Video filter band width:
1 MHz, 300 kHz, 100 kHz, 10 kHz, 1 kHz, 100 Hz, or
10 Hz
Resolution selecting accuracy
: Less than ±1 dB at +20°C to +30°C
Gain compression : Less than 1 dB at input of -10 dBm

8-4 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.1 Technical Data of Function

(3) Sweep Specification

Sweep time : 5 ms/div to 100 s/div with 1-2-5 step

Sweep time accuracy
Less than +15%
Sweep trigger : FREE RUN, LINE, VIDEO, and SINGLE (Reset/Start)

(4) Input Specification

RF input : Approx. 50 N-type input connector: R4131C/D

Approx. 75 N-type input connector: R4131CN/DN
Maximum input level
+20 dBm, ±25 VDCmax Input ATT 20 dB or more
R4131 C/D
127 dBU, ±25 VDCmax Input ATT 20 dB or more
R4 131CN/DN
Input ATT : 0 to 50 dB with a step of 10 dB
Input ATT selecting accuracy
±1 dB or less 10 kHz £ F £ 2 GHz
(10 dB in standard)
±1.5 dB or less 2 GHz < F £ 3 . 5 GHz
(10 dB in standard)
Input VSWR R4131 C/D
1.5 or less 100 kHz £ F £ 2 GHz
2.0 or less 2 GHz < F £ 3 . 5 GHz
At input ATT 10 dB or
more
R4131CN/DN
1.5 or less 100 kHz £ F £ 1 . 5 GHz
2.0 or less 10 kHz < F £ 2 GHz
2.5 or less 2 GHz < F £ 3.5 GHz
At input ATT 10 dB or
more

(5) Display Unit Specification

Display Waveform, setting conditions, and grid

Trace 2-screen display of WRITE waveform and VIEW
waveform
WRITE Memory is rewritten each time sweep and WRITE
waveform is displayed.
STORE WRITE waveform is stored.
VIEW Stored waveform data is displayed.
MAX. HOLD Each time of repetition from the starting point of
this function, the maximum signal level on the
horizontal axis is measured and displayed.
Dictation This equipment provides the POSI/NEGA (for
R4131D/DN only), POSI, and SAMPLE display and
detection functions.

8-5 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.1 Technical Data of Function

(6) Output Specification

Output signal for calibration

: 200 MHz ±30 kHz, -30 dBm +0.5 dB: R4131C/D
200 MHz ±30 kHz, 80 dBp ±0.5 dB : R4131CN/DN
Monitor output : Possible to listen with an earphone (approx. 8 ft)
Recorder output : Analog output only for WRITE waveform
X-axis Approx. -5 V to +5 V (approx. 10 kft)
Y-axis Approx. 0 V to +4 V (approx. 220 ft)
IF output : The IF signal, 3.58 MHz, is output at approx. 50 ft.
Video output : This output includes the output terminal to
external CRT display and VIDEO plotter, etc.,
output impedance of approx. 75 ft, 1 Vp_p, and
composite signal.
Probing power terminal ± 15 V
: 4-pin connector
GPIB data output : Mode operation and I/O are enabled using the GPIB.
Plotter interface: Display screen can be recorded by connecting this
equipment directly to the plotter without passing
through the controller.
Output for TG:
1st LOCAL OUT -5 dBm or more Approx. 4 GHz to 7.5 GHz
2nd LOCAL OUT -5 dBm or more Approx. 3.77 GHz
SLOPE OUT; Sweep signal output for TG output level correction 2 V/GHz

(7) General Specifications

Using ambient conditions

: Less than 0 ° c to 50°C and 85% RH
Storage temperature range
: -20°C to +70°C
Power supply : 90 V to 132 V or 198 V to 250 V
48 to 66 Hz
Power consumption: Less than 120 VA
External dimensions
: Approx. 300 (W) x 177 (H) x 460 (D) (mm)
Weight : Approx. 10 kg : R4131C/CN
Approx. 10.5 kg: R4131D/DN

8-6 May 22/92

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________________________________________________8.2 Accessories

8.2 Accessories

• TR1625 RF Coupler

Frequency range DC-500 MHz

Maximum input 50 W
Degree of coupling 40 dB ±1 dB
Impedance 50 ft in both main and auxiliary lines
V.S.W.R Less than 1.5
Insertion loss Less than 1 dB
Connector Main line ... N-type for both main and auxiliary
lines

• TR1626 RF Coupler

Frequency range DC-1 500 MHz

Maximum input 50 W
Degree of coupling 40 dB ±1 dB
Impedance 50 ft in both main and auxiliary lines
V.S.W.R Less than 1.5
Insertion loss Less than 1 dB
Connector Main line ... N-type, and auxiliary line . BNC
type

8-7 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.2 Accessories

• BNCP-FJ Conversion Adaptor

Dielectric strength : 500 VAC/1 min.

Insulation resistance: More than 500 kft at 500 VDC
Contact resistance : Less than 5 Mft
V.S.W.R : Less than 1.2 at 0.1 GHz

• Earphone for TR16191 Voice Monitor

When the FREQ SPAN is set to 0 (zero) and this spectrum analyzer is
tuned with the data knob, the demodulation wave can be observed on the
screen, but also listening can be done through the earphone connected to
the phone.

Connection cables

10-15 Connection cable BNC—BNC (75«) Part code: DCB-FF0442

MC-37 Connection cable BNC-SHA Part code : DCB-FF1130X01

GPIB connection cable

Model name Length

408JE-1P5 0.5 m
408JE-101 1 m

408JE-102 2 m
408JE-104 4 m

8-8 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.2 Accessories

Antenna

• TR1711 Log-periodic Antenna

This is a brad band reception antenna of 8 to 1000 MHz in frequency

range. It can be used for monitoring radio waves and for analyzing
disturbing waves which occurs in wide bands.

Frequency range 80 MHz to 1000 MHz

Gain 5 dB {A/2 dipole antenna ratio)
Front-to-back ratio More than 14 dB
V.S.W.R Less than 2.5
I/O impedance 50 Q
Weight Antenna main body ... Approx. 5 kg
Components Log-periodic antenna (Element 31 x 2, antenna
main body, and balancer), angle adjuster (45°
to 0° to 90°), tripod, measuring scale (with
N-type connector, 10m), elements container box,
and antenna main body container bag

8-9 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.2 Accessories

• TR1722 Half-wave Dipole Antenna

When measuring the field intensity and disturbing wave by using the
spectrum analyzer, this antenna is used by changing the length of
elements according to the measuring frequency.

Frequency range : 25 MHz to 1000 MHz

Element 1 25 MHz to 80 MHz
Element 2 80 MHz to 250 MHz
Element 3 250 MHz to 600 MHz
Element 4 .. 600 MHz to 1000 MHz
Transmission impedance
50 n
Polarization : Horizontal polarization/vertical polarization
selected
Antenna ground height: Approx. 1 to 4 m
Tripod : Folding type
Attached coaxial cable
Attached with 50D, 2W, 10 m, and N-type connector

8-10 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.2 Accessories

• TR1720 Loop Antenna

Frequency range 100 kHz to 30 MHz

Antenna tuner unit 1-band __ 100 kHz to 200 kHz
2-band 150 kHz to 300 kHz
3-band 300 kHz to 600 kHz
4-band 600 kHz to 1400 kHz
5-band 1.4 MHz to 3.5 MHz
6-band 3.5 MHz to 10 MHz
7-band 10 MHz to 30 MHz
Loop antenna section 7 types of loop antenna for 1-7 bands
Vertical antenna sect ioni
Set to 2 m and 1 m in total length
Impedance 75 ft (TR1720N) or 50 ft (TR1720)
Dimensions and weight
Tuner unit Approx. 210 (W) x 140 (H) x 110 (D) (mm); and
2 kg
Loop antenna Approx. 3 kg in one set
Big) Approx. 360 (W) x 250 (H) x 6 (D) (mm)
Small) Approx. 250 (W) x 190 (H) x 6 (D) (mm)
Vertical antenna 2 m (5 stages in total length)
1 m (expansion and contraction) and 0.2 kg
Container case Approx. 495 (W) x 290 (H) x 155 (D) (mm)
Aluminum made and approx. 1.9 kg in weight

8 - May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.2 Accessories

TR17201 10 kHz to 30 MHz Active Antenna

This is an antenna used for the measurement of field intensity from

10 kHz to 30 MHz. Since it integrates a low noise and broad band
amplifier and the antenna factor is almost contact, the field intensity
can be directly read easily.

Frequency range 10 kHz to 30 MHz

Antenna factor Approx. 10 to 13 dB
Output impedance Approx. 50 ft
Input impedance More than 1 Mft (when measured at the antenna
block)
Amplification gain 7 dB ±2 dB in nominal gain
Connector BNC type
Power supply 12.6 V mercury cell (approx. 20 hours)
External dimensions Approx. 131 (L) x 108 (W) x 77 (H) (mm)
Weight Approx. 1 kg

• TR17203 25 MHz to 230 MHz Active Dipole Antenna

Since the antenna factor for the measurement of field intensity from
25 MHz to 230 MHz is close to 0 (zero), this antenna can directly read
the field intensity in a wide range when used in combination with the
spectrum analyzer.

Frequency range 25 MHz to 230 MHz

Antenna factor Approx. 0 dB
Impedance Approx. 50 ft
Connecting terminal N-type
Power supply 15 VDC (with 1 m long cable)
Weight Approx. 580 g

TR17204 200 MHz to 1000 MHz Log-periodic Antenna

The antenna can measure a broad band of 200 MHz to 1000 MHz without
replacing any element. In addition to its compactness and lightweight,
it can be used for transmission and reception. So, it is suitable for
immunity measurement in high frequency.

Frequency range 200 MHz to 1000 MHz

Antenna factor Approx. 14 dB to 25 dB at 200 MHz to 1000 MHz
Impedance Approx. 50 ft
Connecting terminal N-type
Average V.S.W.R. Less than 2.0
Average gain Approx. 7 dB
Antenna dimensions Approx. 750 (length) x 750 (maximum width)
x 63.5 (thickness) (mm)
Weight Approx. 2 kg

8-12 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.2 Accessories

TR17205 1 GHz to 10 GHz Log-spiral Antenna

This is an antenna of 1 GHz to 10 GHz which is used to measure EMI

conformable to the MIL Standards.

Frequency range 1 GHz to 10 GHz

Average power gain 3.75 dB
Average V.S.W.R. Less than 2.0
Axial ratio Less than 1 dB
Average beam width 500
Impedance Approx. 50 ft
Polar ization Circular polarization
External dimensions Approx. 381 (length) x 127 (maximum diameter)
(mm)
Weight Approx. 3.6 kg

• TR17206 1 GHz to 18 GHz Double-ridged Guide Antenna

This is the most suitable antenna for the EMI measurement. It can
measure a wide band of 1 GHz to 18 GHz.

Frequency range 1 GHz to 18 GHz

Average power gain 10.7 dB (Isotropic)
Average V.S.W.R. Less than 1.5
Impedance Approx. 50 ft
Average beam width E Plane 530
H Plane 48°
Connector N-type
External dimensions Approx. 280 (L) x 245 (W) x 159 (H) (mm)
Weight Approx. 1.8 kg

8-13 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.2 Accessories

Filter

MEP-293/MEP-294/MEP-295/MEP-29, TR14101

Model name MEP-292 MEP-293 MEP-294 MEP-295 TF1410 1

Filter name By-pass filter By-pass filter By-pass filter By-pass filter Rejection filter

Objective communi­ 27 MHz 60 MHz 150 MHz 400 MHz 800 MHz to 900 MHz
cation equipment
frequency band

Working frequency 26 MHz to 30 MHz 50 MHz to 80 MHz 120 MHz to 335 MHz to 800 MHz to 900 MHz
range 190 MHz 520 MHz

Filter Cut-off 40 MHz 100 MHz 240 MHz 670 MHz 1200 MHz
Char­ frequency
acter­
istics Attenuation More than 35 dB More than 50 dB More than 50 dB More than 50 do More than 35 dB at
character­ at 28 MHz or less at 70 MHz at 170 MHz at 470 MHz 000 MHz to 900 MHz
istic More than 40 dB More than 30 dB More than 30 dB More than 30 dB More than 30 dB at
at 27 MHz at 80 MHz at 190 MHz at 520 MHz flOO MHz or less

Pass band 40 MHz to 300 MHz 100 MHz to 240 MHz to 670 MHz to 1500 MHz to
1000 MHz 1000 MHz 1500 MHz 3000 MHz

Insertion Less than 1 dB Less than 2 dB Less than 2 dB Less than 2 dB Less than 2 dB
loss
{within the
pass band)

Through Pass band DC to 300 MHz - - - DC to 1000 MHz

char­
acter­ Insertion Less than 1 dB Less than 1 dB
istics loss
(within the
pass band)

Character istic 50 £1 (BNCJ-BNCJ) 50 fi (NP-NJ) 50 n (NP-NJ) 50 fl (NP-NJ) 50 n (NP-NJ)

impedance
I

14 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8.2 Accessories

Band Pass Filter

TR1 4201/1 4202/1 4203/1 4204

This filter is used to remove the large signal out of a measurement band
in the measurement conforming to the CISPR Standards using the spectrum
analyzer.

TR14201 TR14202 TR14203 TR14204

Pass band 10 kHz to 150 kHz to 25 MHz to 300 MHz to
150 kHz 30 MHz 300 MHz 1000 MHz
Insertion loss Less than Less than Less than Less than
within the 1 .5 dB 1 .5 dB 1 .5 dB 1 .5 dB
pass band
Attenuation More than 20 dB More than 35 dB More than 35 dB More than 30 dB
characteristic at less than at less than at less than at less than
3 kHz but more 30 kHz but more 12 MHz but more 150 MHz but more
than 300 kHz than 60 MHz than 600 MHz than 1500 MHz
Characteristic Approx. 50 ft Approx. 50 ft Approx. 50 ft Approx. 50 ft
impedance (NJ-NP) (NJ-NP) (NP-NJ) (NP-NJ)
(connector)

External dimensions: Approx. 31 (H) x 50 (S) x 100 (L) (mm)

Weight : Approx. 350 g

8-15* May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________________9. Functional description

9. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

9 - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.7 Outline

9.1 Outline

9.1.1 Basic Operations

Figure 9-1 shows the block diagram of this equipment.

(1) When the measuring signal is input to the input connector, the input
signal, after passing through the 50 dB RF input attenuator, enters
the first mixer where it is mixed with the first local signal sent
from the 4 to 7.5 GHz YTO (YIG tuning transmitter), and then it is
output as the first IF signal of 4 GHz.

The YTO, under the control of the YTO circuit, sweeps the range of 4
to 7.5 GHz using the RAMP signal and also varies the center frequency
with the maximum resolution of 500 Hz.

(2) The output first IF signal of 4 GHz enters the second mixer where it
is mixed with the second local signal of 3.77 GHz and then enters the
third mixer as the second IF signal of 226 MHz. This signal is mixed
with the third local signal of 200 MHz and then enters the fourth
signal as the third IF signal of 26.4 MHz. This signal is further
mixed with the fourth local signal of 30 MHz and converted into the
fourth IF signal of 3.58 MHz.

Incidentally, the CAL OUT signal of 200 MHz is generated through the
crystal oscillator of the third local signal.

(3) The fourth IF signal of 3.58 MHz passes through the LC filter second
stage and crystal filter second stage, through which the resolution
band width is selected in a range from 1 MHz to 1 kHz, and further,
the output level is controlled by the resolution of 0.25 dB max. by
the STEP AMP. of 50 dB.

(4) The 3.58 MHz IF signal of which resolution band width and output level
are controlled enters the LOG AMP. of the dynamic range 80 dB, and
after being subjected to logarithmic companding, the signal enters the
detector where it is detected and converted into the DC output. The
detection output signal enters video filter circuit where the video
filter band width is selected to a range from 1 MHz to 10 Hz and then
output as the Y. OUT signal.

(5) The Y. OUT signal and the X. OUT signal of the RAMP signal are both
input to the A/D circuit. The Y. OUT (ordinates axis) is converted
from analog to digital signal at 9 bits (512 points) and the X. OUT
(quadrature axis) is converted the similarly at 10 bits (1024
points). After being stored in the memory, these signals are
controlled by the CPU to display the waveform on CRT through the CRT
control circuit.

9-2 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.1 Outline

This equipment has two memories, the WRITE memory which rewrites data
at each sweeping and VIEW memory which stores the displayed waveform.
It also has a non-volatile memory which stores data even after power
OFF.

Furthermore, it performs the MAX. HOLD and normalization processing

using the WRITE memory, VIEW memory, and the CPU's arithmetic
operation function.

(6) The AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) block is mounted on R4131D/DN

only. It applies locking in a range from 4 to 6.5 GHz in the YTO
frequency to improve the center frequency setting accuracy.

9-3 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.1 Outline

R4131D/DN only.
9-4 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.1 Outline

9.1.2 R4131 Series Configuration

9-5 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.1 Outline

9-6 May 31/94

 VO
to
JO
V
w
H1
O
n
3<r

RF l 1ST 4GHz 4GHz 2ND 226MHz 226MHz 3RD CONTROL 26*4MHz

INPUT! MIXER LPF BPF MIXER LPF PREAMP BPF MIXER LPF AMP BPF MIXER

SLOPE
GAIN 30MHz
G
4TH
200 LOCAL
© MHZ

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
3RD

R4131 SERIES
LOCAL
3770
YTO MHz
4^7.6GHz 2ND
1_ —Q— LOCAL -Q --
IF OUT

V
1ST Lo from 2ND Lo OUT CAL. OUT to YTO CONT/IF
OUT YTO CONT/IF (REAR PANEL) (FRONT PANEL) BOARD
(REAR BOARD
PANEL)

Figure 9-2 RF Block

Oct
20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.2 RF Block

9.2.1 First Mixer

3.6GHz 4 , OGHz
LPF BPF 1 S T M IX E R

RF INPUT O

o o
1ST IF OUT YTO POWER
4 ^ 7 . 6G H z

Figure 9-3 First Mixer Block Diagram

(1) 3.6 GHz Low-pass Filter

The 3.6 GHz low-pass filter limits the input frequency band.

(2) 4.0 GHz Band Pass Filter

The 4.0 GHz band pass filter passes only 4 GHz frequency signals of
the first IF signals generated by the first mixer.

(3) First Mixer

The first mixer is single-balanced type. It has two ports: one mixes
the RF input signals and IF output signals which are isolated by the
LPF and BPF in the previous stage.

9.2.2 Second Mixer

4GHz BPF

4GHz
-Q 2 2 6 .4 M H z OUTPUT
INPUT
2ND MIXER

© ) 2ND LOCAL

Figure 9-4 Second Mixer Block Diagram

9-8 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.2 RF Block

(1) 4.0 GHz Band Pass Filter

The 4.0 GHz band pass filter consists of two dielectric resonators.

(2) Second Local Oscillator

The second local oscillator using a dielectric resonator oscillates

the 3770 MHz frequency.

OUTPUT

-12V

Figure 9-5 Second Local Oscillator

(3) Second Mixer

The second mixer converts the first IF signals (4 GHz) to the second
IF signals {226.4 MHz).

9.2.3 Third and Fourth Mixers

The second IF signals (226.4 MHz) are converted to 26.4 MHz (third IF
signals) by the third mixer and further converted to 3.58 MHz by the
fourth mixer.

The third local oscillator signal is also used as a CAL.OUT signal.

The third IF signal uses a slope signal from the YTO-CONT/IF board to
correct the frequency characteristics.

(1) 226.42 MHz Preamplifier

The 226.42 MHz preamplifier has a gain of 20 dB. L3, L4, and C9 are
input matching filters. L5, L6, and C13 are output matching filters.

(2) Third Mixer

The third mixer is designed so that it does not input signals outside
the band by using the 226.42 MHz BPF. The BPF band width is 4 MHz.

9-9 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.2 RF Block

The BPF output is input to the isolation amplifier (Q1) and mixed with
200 MHz signals from the third local oscillator by the third mixer,
then converted to 26.4 MHz. The third mixer is a double-balanced type.

SIG LOCAL

rfr
IF

Figure 9-6 Double-balanced Mixer

(3) 200 MHz Crystal Oscillator

The base-ground Colpitts 200 MHz crystal oscillator oscillates a

200 MHz signal. It also oscillates a CAL.OUT signal (200 MHz,
-30 dBm).

(4) Gain Control Amplifier

The gain control amplifier changes the resistance of the Q1 emitter

and collector to convert the amplifier gain.

C8

-1 5 V

Figure 9-7 Gain Control Amplifier

9-10 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__________________________ ___ _____ 9.2 RF Block

As the current flowing through the pin diode D1 changes, the

resistance changes. Using this characteristic, the gain control
amplifier corrects the level. D1 uses a Slope Gain signal to correct
the frequency characteristics.

L9 and R20 build a 50-ohm wide band matching circuit so that the gain
control amplifier does not affect the 26.4 MHz BPF in later stages.

The 26.4 MHz band pass filter consists of four helical resonators.
The circuit converts the signal frequency to 3.58 MHz by the fourth
mixer in the next stage. The double-balanced fourth mixer mixes
signals by using a 30 MHz signal generated by the fourth local
oscillator.

(5) 30 MHz Crystal Oscillator

The Colpitts 30 MHz crystal oscillator oscillates a 30 MHz local

signal. The circuit outputs the signal via a tank circuit {C30 and
LI 3) so that it is not changed by the load.

9-11 Oct 20/89

 if?
V
VD LO
OJ Kj
•
O■
1
M O
o
3
i-3
H- \
1—1 M
ri­
ft)
n w
r 0
0J
l-t
CRYSTAL FILTER LC FILTER
a
IF IN I
(from RF) ^ — Qd F — — lc ~

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
I

R4131 SERIES
STEP ATT
k£5 O
0/20 dB 1/2/4/8 dB STEP
— < -
0/10 dB
<
0/20 dB
I AMP AMP AMP
LC FILTER CRYSTAL FILTER

LC LC O I F OUT
-]>— — l > ^ j (to LOG AMP)
I
(J>IF OUT
J (to REAR PANEL)
I
I
J

Figure 9-8 IF Filter MS

0
1
n
o
z
t-3
\
s M
rr
CO
20/89

0
0J
II
a
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.3 YTO-CONT/IF Board

The IF filter consists of filters having the resolution bandwidth.

The bandwidth of the filter can be switched by the center frequency of

3.58 MHz according to the setting from the front panel. The filter
with narrow bandwidths (1 kHz and 3 kHz) uses four crystal filters;
the filter with other bandwidths (1 MHz to 10 kHz) uses four LC
filters.

(1) Input 3.58 MHz Band Pass Filter

L 2 f L3, L4, C 2 , C3, C4, and C124 form a 3.58 MHz BPF. L1 , Cl, and R1
form a wide-band impedance matching circuit.

(2) Gain Adjust Amplifier

The gain adjust amplifier is non-inverse type. The circuit changes

the total gain by adjusting the variable resistor (AMPTD_CAL) on the
front panel.

AMPTD_CAL is used to change the resistance using the FET (Q1) to

change the total gain.

R6 is a thermister. It compensates the gain changed by the

temperature.

9 - Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.3 YTO-CONT/IF Board

Figure 9-9 Gain Adjust Amplifier

When Q1 = OFF

RIO 470
G= 1 + R8"T"R9 = 1 + ?20 = 4 -92

G (dB) = 20 LogG = 14 (dB)

When Q1 = ON (10 ohms)

G = 1 RT + ^44.2
- 1 1 . 6 3

G (dB) = 20 LogG = 21 dB

Note: RT is the resistance of R6 to R9 and Q 1 .

9-14 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.3 YTO-CONT/IF Board

(3) Crystal Filter

Figure 9-10 Crystal Filter

The bandwidth is selectable with the switch (D1): 1 kHz or 3 kHz. C7

adjusts the symmetry of the filter.

(4) LC Filter

Figure 9-11 LC Filter

The bandwidth is changeable from 10 kHz to 1 MHz by switching the R45

to R49. The bandwidth is narrower as the resistance is larger.

9-15 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.3 YTO-CONT/IF Board

(5) Step Amplifier

0.25 STEP ATT

Figure 9-12 Step Amplifier

The step amplifier consists of three step amplifiers (U12 to U14),

four 1 dB step attenuators (Q7 to Q10), and a 0.25 dB step attenuator.

U1 2 and U14 are 0/20 dB step amplifiers and U13 is a 0/10 dB step
amplifier.

These step amplifiers and attenuators set the level by steps of

0.25 dB in the range from 0 dB to 59.75 dB.

Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.3 YTO-CONT/IF Board

9.3.2 YTO Controller and AFC

+15V

9-17 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
9.3 YTO-CONT/IF Board

(1) YTO Controller

The YTO controller consists of a controller and a driver.

The tune voltage changes depending on the set center frequency. The
YTO controller sets three digital/analog frequency bands and generates
a tune voltage by a combination of the three bands. The three D/A
converters have different setting ranges.

Table 9-1 Tune Voltage Data

Tune D/A Input data Cent, freq, data Freq, span

MAIN A (U57) 32 to DE 0 to 3.5 GHz 20 MHz to 4.0 GHz
H
MAIN B (U56) 00 to F9TI A 25.6 MHz
H
FM (U58) 00 to F9 A 128 kHz 100 kHz to 10 MHz
H

For the span voltage, the YTO controller converts the ramp voltage
from the ramp generator of the analog board for setting a span by two
step attenuators and adds it by the tune voltage in the U64. When the
span voltage reaches 10 MHz, a relay (K 1) is switched and a noise
filter (large-capacity chemical capacitor) is inserted between the
main coils. If a charged or discharged current flows through the
capacitor, however, the current flowing through the main coil changes,
causing a frequency drift. To solve this problem, a
charger/discharger is added to charge or discharge at the main T- (See
Figure 9-3) even if the noise filter is turned off.

The frequency may also drift because of temperature change. The YTO
controller corrects the frequency by the following two methods:

(?) Feeds back the voltages at the both ends of the main coil.

When the current flowing through the main coil is increased or

decreased to change the YTO oscillation frequency, the temperature
inside the YTO controller changes and causes a frequency drift.
Temperature change also causes the main coil resistance. The
resistance change can be canceled by feeding back the voltages at both
ends of the coil.

(2) Mounts a diode inside the YTO controller and feed back the on-voltage
change of the diode to the U64. As the ambient temperature changes,
the on-voltage of the diode changes.

Using the above two circuits, the YTO controller reduces frequency
drifts without the PLL.

9-18 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.3 YTO-CONT/IF Board

(2) AFC

The AFC mounted on R4131D/DN operates at the frequency span of 200 MHz
or smaller and applies AFC to the YTO. The AFC function is available
in the band from 0 to 2.5 GHz.

The YTO output (4.0 to 6.5 GHz) is input to the AFC block and
converted to the 500 MHz to 812.5 MHz range by the 1/8 divider.

Then, it is compared with the 12.8 MHz oscillation signal by the phase
detector and fed back to the tune FM voltage. At this time, if a
fault is found in the phase detector output, a pulse is output to the
LOCK_IND signal line.

The AFC function is executed between sweeps. During AFC, the span is
set to 0 and the SAMP/HOLD circuit is closed. It opens when a sweep
starts.

Figure 9-14 SAMP & HOLD

9-19 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.3 YTO—CONT/IF Board

AFC operation sequence is shown below.

AFC

SWEEI3 END

ZERO SPAN

Normal

SWEEjP CO NT

SW]EEP

Figure 9-15 Flowchart for AFC

9-20 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.4 Analog Board

9.4 Analog Board

9.4.1 Log Amplifier

Figure 9-16 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram

The log amplifier consists of nine saturation amplifiers: each has a

gain of 10 dB.

Figure 9-17 shows the saturation amplifier.

9-21 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________________9.4 Analog Board

+15V

*c
Gain = 20 Log—
RE

Vsat p-p = Rc x (iE1 + lE2)

Figure 9-17 One Stage of 10 dB Amplifier

A signal from the IF block is input to the input buffer (Q1) then to
the saturation amplifier. V0 0UT is converted to the current Vo/R
and input to the current amplifier.

To amplify the current, base-ground amplifiers Q3 and Q4 are used with

Q2 and Q3, just as for the bias constant current source.

The current amplified by the base-ground amplifier is converted to the

voltage by the R19.

When a 3 Vp-p signal is input to the input buffer (Q1), the 10 dB

saturation amplifier output is all 3 Vp-p.

The current amplifier output is found as shown below.

Vj = (3/0.62R + 9 x 3/R) x R19

Assume that 3/R x R13 = V.

Vj = 10.56 V

9-22 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.4 Analog Board

When the input level decreases by 10 d B f the following voltage is

output:

V j {-10) = {3/3.16 x 1/0.62R + 9 x 3/R) x R13 = 9.49 V

Similarly,

v - 20) = (? ? x o ? + d ? + 8) v = M 7 v

v - 30> ■ <T3 o x 0 ^ 2 + T ? + + 7) v ■ 7 -43 v

VI(-80) = <^o + T? + + 2) v = 2-43 v

As shown above, if the input level changes by 10 dB, the output level
changes by approximately 1 dB.

The current amplified by the log gain adjust amplifier (Q8) is sent to
the base-ground amplifiers (Q1 0 and Q11) and shaped to half waves for
detection. The output is input to the x7.7 amplifier via the LPF,
then to the scale attenuator or QP circuit via the 1 MHz LPF.

The scale attenuator sets the vertical axis mode (10 dB/div.,
2 dB/div.) by switching the Q12 on/off.

The U1 1 is a constant current source used to set the offset in

logarithms. It is switched according to the horizontal axis mode
selected.

The QP circuit detects an envelope by a detector consisting of the U13

and D13 and a discharger consisting of the R84 to R87, D13, and C43.

The D13 and C84 change for each time constant when repetitive
frequency goes high or low.

The Q15 is turned off when the bandwidth is 120 kHz and on when it is
9 kHz.

Signals detected by the QP circuit is input to the LPF then to the DC

log amplifier consisting of the U15 and U17.

The LOG or LIN/QP modes is set by the switch consisting of the U19 and
output via the U16 and output buffer.

9-23 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_____________________________________________________________9.4 Analog Board

9.4.2 Ramp Generator

Figure 9-18 Block Diagram

The ramp generator generates a ramp voltage from approximately -5 V to

+5 V which is used to sweep the YTO (first local oscillator). The
ramp voltage is also used as X-axis data by the A/D converter.

The ramp generator also generates a Z-axis signal which is used to

reset the X-axis A/D converter.

The constant current generated from the current source of the ramp
generator is applied to the timing capacitor and generates the ramp
voltage.

9-24 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________________9.4 Analog Board

(1) Current Source

Figure 9-19 Current Source Circuit

The Q22 is a current source that is used to determine the voltage of

the U 2 1 , pin 5. The voltage is used to correct the temperature of
VBE of the Q22.

The voltage of the U21, pin 5 is determined by a combination of the

R132 to R135. After the voltage is determined, the emitter current of
the Q23 flows until the voltage of the U21, pin 5 is the same as that
of the U 2 1 , pin 6. The Q23 emitter current is controlled by a
combination of the switches (U29 and Q21).

The Q23 collector current is the same as the emitter current because
the Q23 current amplifier ratio (hfe) is large.

9-25 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_________________________ 9.4 Analog Board

The constant current determined by the switches (U19 and Q21 ) flows
through the timing capacitor (C63), and then generates a ramp
voltage. V = ^ It.

The Q24 and Q25 form a sweep stop controller. When a +5 signal is
applied to the base of the Q25, the Q24 and Q25 are switched on and
all currents flowing through the C63 flow through the Q24 and Q25. At
this time, the ramp voltage is in hold state.

(2) Ramp Generator

Figure 9-20 Ramp Generator

The ramp voltage from the C63 is input to the sweep comparator U23,
pin 2. When the ramp voltage is low, the U23, pin 7 is +15 V and the
Q28 is switched on.

When the ramp voltage increases, the voltage of the U23, pin 2 reaches
2.2 V. In other words, when the ramp voltage is 6 V, the U23, pin 1
is inverted and the D25 is switched off. Along with this change, the
anode voltage of the D27 also changes via the dead time capacitor.
Then, the voltage of the U23, pin 7 becomes - 1 5 V and the Q28 is
switched off.

9-26 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________________9,4 Analog Board

At the same time, the U23, pin 1 is -15 V, the D23 is switched on, and
the voltage charged by the C63 is discharged.

When the ramp voltage reaches -6 V, the U23, D23, and U21 form a close
loop to keep -6 V. The dead time capacitor (C68) is charged by the
R1 68 because the D27 anode voltage increases. When the voltage of the
U23, pin 5 exceeds 7.5 V, the U23, pin 7 becomes +15 V and the Q18 is
switched on.

This changes the voltage of the U23, pin 2 and the voltage of the U23,
pin 1 to +15 V. The D23 is switched off then the timing capacitor
starts charging.

Thus, the ramp generator generates a ramp voltage.

The dead time of the ramp voltage is determined by the R168 and C68.
The Q26 is switched on when the trigger mode is set to line, video, or
single. Then the D27 anode voltage is set to 7.5 V or less. When the
ramp voltage reaches 6 V, the U23, pin 1 is inverted and the Q28 is
switched off. When it reaches -6 V, the U23, pin 1 is kept constant.

If the Q29 is switched on by a trigger signal, the voltage of the U23,

pin 1 becomes +15 V and the D23 is switched off. Then, the timing
capacitor C63 starts charging and a ramp voltage is generated.

9-27 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.4 Analog Board

9.4.3 A/D Converter

csn
U84

Figure 9-21 A/D Converter

9-28 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______ ____________________________________________________ 9.4 Analog Board

(1) X-axis A/D Converter

The X-axis A/D converter compares the voltage generated by the ramp
generator and outputs data from the counter with the D/A converted
value. The comparator U47 is inverted when the difference between the
current generated by VREP and the current generated by the sweep
voltage match the current generated by D/A converter input data. At
this time the converter latches the counter and at the same time
starts Y-axis A/D by *YADS.

(2) Y-axis A/D Converter

The Y-axis A/D converter converts data analog to digital via the peak
detector by the successive approximation for display data.

The peak detector mode is selectable using the input waveform: POSI
or NEGA.

When a *YADS signal is input to the U74 from the X-axis A/D converter,
the Y-axis A/D converter starts Y-axis A/D conversion and outputs QCC
from the SAR (U74) successive comparator. Then, converted Y-axis data
is latched by the U77.

The converter issues *BUSRQ to the CPU board. When receiving a *BUSAK
signal from the board, it selects the fresh memory on the CPU board by
*ADCS and transfers it from the A/D board to the CPU board by a direct
memory access (DMA).

When a *ADCS signal is input to the OE terminal of the X-axis and

Y-axis latch circuits (U52 and U77), the A/D converter is set to the
output mode.

9-29 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________________9.4 Analog Board

9.4.4 Analyzer Test

Figure 9-22 Analyzer Test

The R4131 Series has an adjustment function on the screen display. It

generates a stable reference voltage and divides it into the 4 V
reference voltage. The output is sent to the A/D converter and
displayed on the top of the scale. The A/D gain can be adjusted by
the 4 V power without DVM. The operator simply aligns the displayed
line on the top of the scale. Similarly, adjust the A/D offset by
setting the U85 switch to (3) (Figure 9-22) so that the displayed line
is on the bottom of the scale.

When the U85 switch is set to (4) , the three power sources and slope
gain of the YTO CONT/IF board can be tested.

9-30 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

9.4 Analog Board

These operations can be set by keys. To start the analyzer test mode,
press as follows:
S H IF T
w M -i /v s n w ttj

□ □ □
The screen shown below appears.

+4 V

ANALYZ ER '’EST : # r,OFF

Y,GA| IN
i REF, + 13. 5 V
REF, -13. 5 V
REF, + 10 V
SLOP E 0 V
SLOE E 2 v /g :lz

QlJIT : UNIT

0 V

Figure 9-23 Analyzer Test Display

Move the mark "#" to the item to be tested with the and
O
keys.

9 - 31* Oct 20/89

 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________________________________10. Calibration and Adjustments

10. CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS

This section describes the procedures for making basic checks on the R4131
and for calibrating them after performance testing.

10 - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_________________________ ______ 10.1 Preparation

10.1 Preparation

Table 10-1 lists the equipment and tools required for calibration and
adjustment. Use equipment and tools equivalent or superior in performance
to these.

Table 10-1 Equipment and Tools Required for Calibration and Adjustment

Recommended
Equipment Performance
equipment

Digital voltmeter Range : +1000 V TR6846

Accuracy : +0.1% (Voltage
Input impedance: 10 Mft adjustment)
Synthesized Frequency range : TR4511
signal generator Frequency accuracy: Adjustment for
YTO CONT/IF
10 dB step Frequency range: DC to 500 MHz Adjustment for
attenuator Variable : 0 to 80 dB or more LOG AMP
Accuracy : +0.5 dB or less
1 dB step Frequency range: DC to 500 MHz Adjustment for
attenuator Variable : 0 to 10 or more LOG AMP
Accuracy : +0.2 dB or less
Spectrum analyzer Frequency range : 10 MHz to 4 GHz R41 36
Frequency accuracy: +100 kHz Adjustment for
RF

Spectrum analyzer Frequency range : 10 Hz to 120 MHz TR4171

Tracking generator output: 10 Hz to 120 MHz or
T.G. output flatness : +1 dB R4136 + TR4154
Impedance : 50 ft and 1 Mft Adjustment for
IF FILTER

Table 10-2 Maintenance Tools Required for Calibration and Adjustment

Product name Stock number Remarks

Cable (SMA-SMA) MM-14

Cable (BNC-UM) MC-36 2 pcs.
Cable (BNC-BNC) MI-02
UM to UM linear adapter JCF-AC001JX07-1 UM-QA-JJ

10-2 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

10.1 Preparation

(1) Notes on Adjustment

Before adjustment, performs the following operations:

S H IF T LC L

(T) Before setting the Power switch to OFF, press □ a"d □ •

This operation sets correct data set by the CPU to zeros when ZERO CAL
is executed.

Corrected data is not erased even if the power is switched off. To

reset correction, press these keys again.

(2) Adjust the R4131D/DN having the AFC function as follows:

STAPT
/RESET

- Set the Power switch to ON while the P ”| key is pressed down.

- The message "strike any key" appears on the screen.

TRIGGER

- Press the □ key and the following screen appears:

...
<TYPE>:#R41 31C (50)
R4131D (50)(AFC)
R4131CN (75)
R 4 131DN (75)(AFC)

< OPTION>: OBW ON

- Move the mark "#" to the R4131C or R4131CN with the keys.
BD
R41 31D -* R41 31C
R4131DN -* R4131CN

- Press the key.

- Adjust the values.

- Return setting to the original type.

R4131C -> R4131D

R4131 CN ->■ R41 31DN

10-3 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.2 A/D Adjustment (Analog Board)
(BLR-015117)

10.2 A/D Adjustment (Analog Board) (BLR-015117)

(T) Measure the voltage between the TP19 and TP1 (GND) by the DMM and
remember the measured value (Vipp-jg).

(2) Adjust the variable resistors so that the voltages of the TP20, TP21,
and TP22 are as shown in Table 10-3. (This adjustment is available
for the R 4 131D/DN only.)

Table 10-3 TP20, TP21, TP22 Voltage Adjustment Values

TP Voltage VR
TP20 R2 41
VTP19 ± 10 mV
TP21 R258
TP22 R2 77

r m /*Cs£T w it?
(3) Press Q ' □ ' and

(?) The following data appears on the screen display:

(5) Move the mark M#” to Y.OFF with the □El and \ 'fcf keys.

(§) Adjust the R308 so that the displayed line aligns with the bottom line
on the scale.

© Similarly, move the mark "t" to Y.GAIN with the I ^ | and ^ keys.

10-4 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.2 A/D Adjustment (Analog B
(BLR-015117)

(b ) Adjust the R310 so that the displayed line aligns with the top line on
the scale.

Press the key to initialize the R4131.

Set the local feed-through to the center of the screen at the span
20 MHz.

(fj) If the local feed-through is not at the center when the span is
returned to 4 GHz, adjust the R233 so that it comes to the center.
(X-axis and position adjustment)

(V2) Set the local feed-through at the center of the screen and change the
span to 1 MHz and RBW to 30 kHz.
SHIFT

(^3) Set the display detection mode to POSI with the □ and keys.

(f^) Adjust the R296 so that the waveforms are smoothed.

SHIFT _____

(fB) Set the display detection mode from POSI to NEGA with the j I and |O |
. NORMAL
keys.

(J~6) Adjust the R302 so that waveforms are smoothed.

10-5 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.3 LOG Amplifier Adjustment (Analog Board)
(BLR-015117)

10.3 LOG Amplifier Adjustment (Analog Board) (BLR-015117)

SHIFT

(7) Disconnect the UM cable from the J4 and press a and □ to set the
X-axis to the linear mode. LIfEAR

(2) Adjust the R57 and R72 so that voltage of the TP13 and TP14 is within
±1 mV.

Voltage VR
TP. 13 ±1 mV R57
TP.25 R72

(3) Connect the log amplifier as shown in Figure 10-1.

(4) Set the signal generator as follows:

Frequency: 3.5789 MHz

Amplitude: -1 dBm

ANALOG BOARD

SIGNAL GENERATOR

Figure 10-1 Log Amplifier Adjustment

10-6 Oct 20/89

 R413? SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.3 LOG Amplifier Adjustment (Analog Board)
__________________________________________________________________ (BLR-015117)

(5) Set the R4131 as follows:

Frequency span: 1 GHz

10 dB/DIV

(?) Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.

(7) Adjust the R40 so that the waveform aligns with the top line on the
scale.

(¥) Set the step attenuator to 70 dB.

(9) Adjust the R69 so that the waveform aligns with the second line from
the bottom on the scale.

(fo) Repeat steps ((T) to (9) .

(ft) Set the R4131 to 2 dB/div.

(£2) Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.

(£3) Adjust the R65 so that the waveform aligns with the top line on the
scale.

(f4) Set the R4131 to LINEAR.

(£5) Adjust the R38 so that the waveform aligns with the top line on the
scale.

@ Set the R4131 to QP.

(f^) Adjust the R109 so that the waveform aligns with the top line on the
scale.

(jj) Set the step attenuator to 20 dB.

(f§) Adjust the R102 so that the waveform aligns with the middle line on
the scale.

(2^( Set the step attenuator to 35 d B .

(2j) Adjust the R96 so that the waveform aligns with the second line from
the bottom on the scale.

(£2) Repeat steps (fj) to (2j) .

10-7 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.4 IF Filter Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF
Board)

10.4 IF Filter Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF Board)

10.4.1 3.58 MHz BPF Adjustment

(7) Set the TR4171 as follows:

INPUT IMPEDANCE : 1 Mft

MAG mode
CENTER FREQ. 3.5795 MHz
FREQ. SPAN 5 MHz
REF. LEVEL -30 dBm
TG LEVEL -10 dBm
1 dB/DIV.

(2) Connect the units as shown in Figure 10-2.

R4131
TR4171

Figure 10-2 3.58 MHz BPF Adjustment

(3) Turn the core of the L1 to L4 to adjust the waveform so that its peak
is at 3.5789 MHz.

10-8 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.4 IF Filter Adjustment (YTO-CONT/I
Board)

CENTER FREQ.
3.5795MHz

SPAN: 5MHz

Figure 10-3 Waveform of 3.58 MHz BPF

10.4.2 Crystal Filter Adjustment

(T) Connect the units as shown in Figure 10-4.

R4131 TR4171

Figure 10-4 Crystal Filter Adjustment

10-9 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.4 IF Filter Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF
Board)

CENTER FREQ. 3.5789MHz

Figure 10-5 Waveform of Crystal Filter

@ Set the TR4171 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 3.5795 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 50 kHz
10 dB/DIV.

(3) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 3 kHz

(4) Connect the TP1 with the INPUT2 of the TR4171 and adjust the C9 so
that the waveform is symmetrical. Then adjust the L8 so that the peak
of the waveform is at its lowest level.

(5) Connect the TP2 with the INPUT2 of the TR4171 and adjust the Cl 8 so
that the waveform is symmetrical. Then adjust the L10 so that the
peak of the waveform is at its lowest level.
SHIFT I fPtJT ATTENUATOR

(6) Press , f~ | , |"o] and set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: QP
BW : 9 kHz

(7) Connect the TP9 with the INPUT2 of the TR4171 and adjust the C99 so
that the waveform is symmetrical. Adjust the L27 so that the peak of
the waveform is at its lowest level.

(8) Connect the TP10 with the INPUT2 of the TR4171 and adjust the C108 so
that the waveform is symmetrical. Adjust the L28 so that the peak of
the waveform is at its lowest level.

10 - 10 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.4 IF Filter Adjustment (YTO-CONT/I
___ _________ Board)

(9) Adjust the L29 so that the waveform is at its maximum size.

10.4.3 LC Filter Adjustment

R4131
TR4171

Figure 10-6 LC Filter Adjustment

(7) Set the TR4171 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 3.5789 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 100 kHz
2 dB/DIV.

(2) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 10 kHz

(3) Connect the TP4 with the INPUT2 of the TR4171 and adjust REF.LEVEL so
that the waveform appears on the screen.

(4) Adjust the L12 so that the waveform aligns with the center frequency.

(5) Connect a probe to the TPS and adjust REF.LEVEL so that the waveform
appears on the screen.

((f) Adjust the L1 3 so that the waveform aligns with the center frequency.

(7) Connect a probe to the TP7 and adjust REF.LEVEL of the TR4171 so that
the waveform appears on the screen.

10-11 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.4 IF Fil
Board)

(8) Adjust the L23 so that the waveform aligns with the center frequency.

(9) Connect a probe to the TP8 and adjust REF.LEVEL of the TR4171 so that
the waveform appears on the screen.

(fo) Adjust the L24 so that the waveform aligns with the center frequency.

10.4.4 Resolution Bandwidth Level Adjustment

(7) Connect the TP5 with the INPUT2 of the TR4171.

(2) Set the TR4171 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 3.5795 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 100 kHz
2 dB/DIV.

(3) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 300 kHz

(4) Adjust REF.LEVEL so that the waveform positions at the center on the
scale of the TR4171 and store the waveform.

(5) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 10 kHz

(6) Adjust the R67 so that RBW is set to the same level as at 300 kHz.

(7) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 3 kHz

(¥) Adjust the R35 so that RBW is set to the same level as at 300 kHz.

(9) Connect the J8 with the INPUT2 of the TR4171.

(fo) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 300 kHz

(fj) Adjust REF.LEVEL so that the waveform positions at the center on the
scale of the TR4171 and store the waveform.

(f2) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 10 kHz

(f3) Adjust the R141 so that RBW is set to the same level as at 300 kHz.

10-12 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.4 IF Filter Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF
_ _ _ _____ Board)

(Q) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 3 kHz

(^5) Adjust the R184 so that RBW is set to the same level at 300 kHz.

10.4.5 Step Amplifier Adjustment

(T) Connect the units as shown in Figure 10-7.

Figure 10-7 Step AMP Adjustment

(2) Set the R4131 as follows:

RBW: 300 kHz

(3) Set the TR4171 as follows:

CENTER FREQ. 3.5789 MHz

FREQ. SPAN 200 kHz
REF. LEVEL -10 dBm
TG LEVEL -30 dBm
1 dB/DIV.

10-13 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.4 IF Filter Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF
Board)

(4) Set and adjust R4131 REF.LEVEL and external ATT as shown in Table 10-4
using the R4131 REF.LEVEL as reference.

Table 10-4 Step Amplifier Adjustment

REF.LEVEL 0 dBm -10 dBm -20 dBm -30 dBm -40 dBm -50 dBm
External ATT value 0 dB 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB
VR to be adjusted Reference R89 R75 Check R123 Check

10 - Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.5 YTO-CONT Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF Board)
(BLR-015116)

10.5 YTO-CONT Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF Board) (BLR-015116)

SHIFT LCL

(7) Press F I . [ I, and set the Power switch to OFF. Then set the Power
S HIfT

switch to ON and press |__J * □ * and Q .

(2) The following data appears on the screen display:

+4 V

AN ALYJiER TEST #Y,OF F

X ,GA IN
REF, + 13, 5 V
REF, -13. 5 V
REF, + 10 \T
SLOE E 0 V
SLOE E 2 V/G iz

Q'JIT : UNIT

C V

Figure 10-8 Analyzer Test Display

(3) Move the mark "#" to REF.+10 V with the

© Adjust the R232 so that the displayed line aligns the top line on the
scale.

(5) Move the mark "#" to REF.-13.5 V with the and keys.

© Adjust the R240 so that the displayed line aligns the top line on the
scale.

(7) Move the mark "#M to REF.+13 V with the and keys.

Check whether the displayed line is almost overlapped on the top line
on the scale.

9) Set the offset of the R4131 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 0 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 20 MHz

Cs> Set the local feed-through to the center of the screen by the encoder,

© horizontally
Adjust the R355 so that
even if the
the local feed-through does not shift
frequency span is set to 10 MHz.

10 - 15 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.5 YTO-CONT Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF Board)
(BLR-015116)

(f2) Main Span

Connect the units as shown in Figure 10-9.

R4131

Figure 10-9 Adjustment for Main Span

(£3) Set the SG as follows:

FREQUENCY: 800 MHz

AMPLITUDE: +10 dBm

(£4) Set the R4131 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 2 GHz

FREQ. SPAN : 4 GHz

(£5) Adjust the R308 so that the spectrum aligns the scale.

^6) Set the SG of FM span as follows:

FREQUENCY: 80 MHz
AMPLITUDE: +0 dBm

(^7) Set the R4131 as follows:

FREQ. SPAN: 10 MHz

(f8) Adjust the R319 so that the spectrum aligns the first vertical line
from both ends of the scale.

10 - 16 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.5 YTO-CONT Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF Board)
(BLR-015116)

^9) Set the SG of 0M tune A as follows:

FREQUENCY: 800 MHz

AMPLITUDE: +0 dBm

(£0) R4131 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 0 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 20 MHz
CF CAL

(2j) Adjust the R287 so that the local feed-through is 0 MHz ±2 MHz.

( 2 Set the R4131 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 3200 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 20 MHz
CF CAL

(^3) Adjust the R270 so that the spectrum is 3200 MHz ±2 MHz.

(^4) Repeat steps (£Q) to (2^) .

@ Tune B

Set the Power switch of the R4131 to OFF.

OFF

Set the Power switch to ON while the □ key is pressed down.

The following data appears on the screen display:

A : 96
B : 32
FM: 32

01,Dec,87

Set the R4131 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 0 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 20 MHz

(2^) Turn the encoder so that B: 05 is set.

STORE WRITE
@ Press □ and P i .

(31) Turn the encoder so that B: CD is set.

(12) Adjust the R269 so that the current waveform aligns the stored
waveform.

10-17 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
10.5 YTO-CONT Adjustment (YTO-CONT/IF Board)
(BLR-015116)

Tune FM

Set the R4131 as follows:

CENTER FREQ. 0 MHz

FREQ. SPAN 200 kHz
SWEEP TIME 5 ms/

Turn the encoder so that FM: F8 is set.

WRITE
Press |__ J and

Turn the encoder so that FM: 32 is set.

Adjust the R317 so that the spectrum aligns the stored waveform.

Slope
SHIFT

Press □ ' □ ' and H and data shown in Figure 2-8 appears.

Move the mark "#" to SLOPE 0 V with the and keys.

Adjust the R261 so that the displayed line aligns with the bottom
line on the scale.

Similarly, move the mark "#" to SLOPE_2 V/GHz with the and

_^ ! keys.

Adjust the R257 so that the displayed line aligns with the top line
on the scale.

10 - 18 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________ 10.6 RF Block Adjustment

10.6 RF Block Adjustment

10.6.1 Third Local Oscillator Adjustment

0 Connect the R4136 INPUT to the CAL.OUT connector.

0 Set the R4136 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 200 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 20 kHz
REF. LEVEL : -25 dBm
RBW : 1 kHz
10 dB/DIV.

0 Adjust the C20 so that spectrum positions at the center of the

oscillating start frequency and stop frequency.

0 Set the R4136 as follows:

1 dB/DIV.

( 0 Adjust the R27 so that the CAL.OUT level is -30 dBm ±0.5 dB.

10.6.2 Second Local Oscillator Adjustment

0 Connect 2ND LOCAL OUT on the rear panel of the R4131 to R4136 INPUT.

( 0 Set the R4136 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 3770 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 2 MHz

0 ) Turn the adjusting bar on the upper cover of the second local block so
that the frequency is 3770 MHz.

10.6.3 Fourth Local Oscillator Adjustment

0) Remove a shorting pin from the J3 and connect a probe to the J3, pin 2.

( 0 Set the R4136 as follows:

CENTER FREQ.: 30 MHz

FREQ. SPAN : 500 kHz
REF. LEVEL : 0 dBm
2 dB/DIV.

0 ( Adjust the L13 so that the peak of the waveform is set.

10-19 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

10.7 Location Diagram of YTO CONT/IF Board

10.7 Location Diagram of YTO CONT/IF Board

□
J2
r~~i
J3
TP16
o
TP17

TP23 R148
o OTP24
R296
0
^Rg7
0R302
TP22 TP20 Wl
o o
R31I R75
0R308 R102
ji 0 R109
0 R69 R72
0 0 R96
o
TP14 0

R241 R65
R258
0 0 0
R60
TPl o TPl9

R9 TOTAL-GAIN
R35 3K ADJ.1
R67 10K ADJ.1
R75 20 DB
R89 tO DB
R123 40 DB
R141 tOK ADJ.2
R184 3K ADJ.2
R232 +1 0V ADJ
IF IN 3.58MHz
R240 13.5V ADD
(from YTO CONT/IF)
R253 SLOP.G
R257 2V/G_ADJ
R261 0V_ADJ
R269 TUNE_B
R270 TUNE_A
R287 OM ADJ
R308 M_SPAN
R3 17 TUNE_FM
R3 19 FM_S PAN
R355 OFF SET

Figure 10-10 Location Diagram of YTO CONT/IF Board

10 - 20 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

10.8 Location Diagram of Analog Board

10.8 Location Diagram of Analog Board

TPl2
0 □ TP23 J9 Q 3 IF OUT (to REAR PANEL)
0R253 o
0R232 0 R240
° R261
o L29
TP13 JS Q i IF OUT {to ANALOG)
o TP11 0
R257 TP10 O □ R184
0 □ L28

*287 0 0 R27O
0
TP16 0R3O8
o
O TP15
O XP14
R355
TP20
O
TPl7
O TP9
O
□ L27

TP18 TP 8
O TP19 L24
0
R319
0 R317
^
0R269
JX
□
L23
TP7
o
J3 TP22r ,0 R141
J4 J5
r r
0 R123 Tp6
to YTO O
R38 LIN__GAIN
TP 21
R40 LOG_GAIN o

R57 OFFSET 1 0R89

(
R75
R65 2DB1 0
L13
0 o TP75
R69 10DB 1 R67

R72 OFFSET2 TP4 o

L12
R96
R102
QP_ZERO
QP_GAIN
□
75,3° 0 R35
R109 QP_4V
L!0 I I
R148 SWEEP_ADJ 1--'©
R233 X_OFF
o □ e
R24 1 P_OFF
LI L3
R258 N_OFF □ L2
□
R277 P/N_OFF L4

R296 SLOPE_0,1 □ □
IF IN c Q J 7 o R9
R302 SLOPE_0,2 (from RF) TPl
0
□
R308 Y_OFF
R31 1 Y__GAIN

Figure 10-11 Location Diagram of Analog Board

10 - 21* Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________________________________________11. Performance Testing

11. PERFORMANCE TESTING

This section describes performance test procedures for the R4131.

11-1 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__________________________________________________________ 11.1 Preparation

11.1 Preparation

The equipment for the performance testing are listed in Tables 11-1.

Table 11-1 Equipment Required for Performance Testing

Equipment Specifications Recommended model

(1) Synthesized signal TR4511

source

(2) Function generator Frequency accuracy: 0.5% or

less

(3) 10 dB step ATT Accuracy: ±0.5 dB or less,

0 to 70 dB or more
1 dB step ATT Accuracy: ±0.1 dB or less,
0 to 12 dB or more

(4) Power meter Frequency range: 10 MHz to

8 GHz

(5) Power sensor

(6) Sweep oscillator Frequency range: 10 MHz to TR4515

8 GHz

(7) Sweep adapter TR13211

(8) Impedance converter ZT301

11-2 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.2 General Precautions

1 1 . 2 General Precautions

(1) Always operate the instrument at the specified voltage. Refer to

Section 1 . 3 for the power line voltage.

(2) The operating temperature range should be 0 ° c to 5 0 ° C , and the

relative humidity less than 85%.

(3) Warm up the instrument for about 30 minutes before starting the
performance test.

11-3 Oct 20/89

 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.3 Frequency Span Accuracy

11.3 Frequency Span Accuracy

Specification : The frequency span between two arbitrary points on the

display screen must be ±5% or less.
Equipment used: Synthesized signal source, function generator

(1) Description

Test the accuracy of frequency span by using the synthesized signal

source and function generator.
Use the 800 MHz radio frequency of the synthesized signal for the
frequency span of 4 GHz to 1 GHz.
For the frequency span of 500 MHz to 500 kHz, use the reference
synthesized signal subtracted by the span width frequency.
For the frequency span of 200 kHz to 50 kHz, use the pulse modulation
synthesized signal of the function generator.

(2) Procedure

(7) Set the R4131 as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN : 4 GHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH : AUTO (1 MHzw)
REFERENCE LEVEL : COARSE, 10 dB/DIV, -10 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR : 0 dB
TRACE : WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH: 1 MHz
SWEEP TRIGGER : FREE RUN

(2) Test frequency spans from 4 GHz to 1 GHz

Referring to Figure 11-1, connect the output of TR4511 synthesized
signal source to the INPUT connector of the spectrum analyzer.

(3) Set the output of TR4511 synthesized signal sourse to -5 dBm, 800 MHz,
modulation off.

(4) Turning the TUNING dial on the spectrum analyzer, adjust the local
feedthrough (zero carrier wave) to position it on the leftmost
graticule on the display screen. Check that the 4th signal (3.2 GHz)
from the local feedthrough (without counting the feedthrough itself)
is positioned on or within ±0.4 division of the eighth graticule from
the left most graticule (without counting the leftmost graticule
itself). (See Figure 11-1.)

11-4 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.3 Frequency Span Accuracy

cODOM! iz _4GHz
: lO d i/
tMH/.w
8th graticule line
Local feedthrough

^ 4th signal

I?— ±0. 4div

VF 1MHz

Figure 11-1 Frequency Span 4 GHz Test

(5) With the spectrum analyzer SPAN switch set to 2 GHz, turn the TUNING
dial to position the local feedthrough on the leftmost graticule on
the display screen. Check that the second signal (1.6 GHz) from the
local feedthrough is positioned within ±0.4 division of the eighth
graticule from the left.

(s) Next, with the spectrum analyzer SPAN switch set to 1 GHz,turn the
TUNING dial to position the local feedthrough on the leftmost
graticule on the display screen. Check that the first signal (800
MHz) from the local feedthrough is positioned within ±0.4 division of
the eighth graticule from the left.

11-5 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________ 11.3 Frequency Span Accuracy

R4131

GENERATOR
Figure 11-2 Frequency Span Test Setup

(7) Test frequency spans 500 MHz to 500 kHz.

Set the spectrum analyzer INPUT ATTENUATOR switch to 10 dB and the
SPAN switch to 500 MHz.

(8) Set the output of TR4511 synthesized signal source to -10 dBm, 1 GHz
modulation off.

(9) Turning the TUNING dial, adjust the 1 GHz input signal to the leftmost
graticule on the display screen.

(fo) Set the output frequency of the TR4511 synthesized signal source to
1.4 GHz. Check that the signal is positioned on the eighth graticule
from the leftmost graticule on the display screen (or within ±0.4
division of the eighth graticule). (See Figure 11-3.)

11-6 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11,3 Frequency Span Accuracy

8th graticule line

LUdHm 1250MHz \ 500MHz
~~1--- i--- f :lO d !i/
Graticule reference line
-a* Ok-wiw

±0.4div

1 .4GHz

ST LOnif , / ATT OrIB VF :LMHz

Figure 11-3 Frequency Span 500 MHz Test

© Perforin similar tests by reducing the frequency span to 200 MHz,

100 MHz, and finally to 500 kHz. For each frequency span, adjust the
1 GHz signal to be on the leftmost graticule on the display screen;
then, apply a signal having a frequency equal to 1 GHz + 0.8 x span,
checking that the input signal is positioned on the eighth graticule
from the leftmost graticule on the screen (or within +0.4 division of
the eighth graticule).

11-7 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________ 11.3 Frequency Span Accuracy

Table 11-2 Frequency Span 500 MHz to 500 kHz Test

Signal adjusted to be on
Second in­
Frequency span the leftmost graticule Tolerance
put signal
on the display screen
500 MHz 1 GHz 1.4 GHz Check that the second
input signal is posi­
200 MHz 1 GHz 1.16 GHz
tioned on the eighth
100M 1 GHz 1.08 GHz graticule from the
leftmost graticule on
50M 1 GHz 1.04 GHz
the display screen (or
20M 1 GHz 1.016 GHz within ±0.4 division of
the eighth graticule.)
10M 1 GHz 1 .008 GHz
5M 1 GHz 1 .004 GHz
2M 1 GHz 1 .0016 GHz
1M 1 GHz 1 .0008 GHz
500k 1 GHz 1 .0004 GHz

(^2) Next, perforin frequency span 200 kHz to 50 kHz tests using the same
setup as shown in Figure 11-2.

(V3) Set the output of the TR4511 synthesized signal source as follows:
Frequency: 1 GHz
Modulation: External pulse modulation
Output level: -10 dBm
Set the function generator as follows:
Waveform: Square wave
Output amplitude: 0 to +5 V

11-8 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________ 11 .3 Frequency Span Accuracy

(^4) Set the output frequency of the function generator to 20 kHz.

Turn the TUNING dial to bring the reference spectrum to the leftmost
graticule on the display screen. Check that the eighth signal from
the reference spectrum is positioned on the eighth graticule from the
leftmost graticule on the display screen (or within ±0.4 division of
the eighth graticule). (See Figure 11-4.)

- iGdSm 999. 998MHz 8 th 200kHz

Figure 11-4 Frequency Span 200 kHz Test

(^5) Similarly, test frequency span 100 kHz and 50 kHz by referring to
Table 11“3.

Table 1 1-3 Tests for Frequency Spans of 200 kHz or Less

Span Function generator Eighth span position

output frequency

200 kHz 20 kHz Within ±0.4 division of the

eighth graticule from the
100 kHz 10 kHz leftmost graticule on the
display screen
50 kHz 5 kHz

11-9 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.4 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy

11.4 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy

Specification : R4131C/CN ...

Less than ±10 MHz
After ZERO CAL
R4131D/DN ...
Less than ±100 kHz + SPAN 3% or less
after ZERO CAL
Within the range of 0 Hz to 2.5 GHz in center frequency
and 5 ms to 0.5 S/DIV in sweep time.
Less than ±10 MHz
After ZERO CAL
Center frequency 2.5 GHz or more.
Equipment used: TR4511

(1) Description

Display the signal applied from the TR4511 synthesized signal source
to the R4131 in the center of the display screen and test this center
frequency as displayed.

NOTE: Perform zero calibration before performing the center frequency

readout accuracy test. (See Section 4-3)

(2) Procedure

(7) with the spectrum analyzer INPUT connector open, press the ZERO CAL
switch to perform zero calibration.

(2) Set the spectrum analyzer as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 4 GHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH AUTO (1 MHzw)
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 10 dB/DIV, 0 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 MHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN

R4131
TR4511
•A &&&
:o 10011 00 |
D £D©® g§
0 ° u o§
0 S S H □a.0h|>
•H J5P S 05LO-®
Q0CD
£>£> Bon-e* arm a
n 5 @ e O 0 Q

Figure 11-5 Center frequency readout accuracy test setup

11-10 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.4 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy

(3) Set the frequecny to test the TR4511 synthesized signal source. An
example of 1 GHz.

(4) Set the dial of spectrum analyzer to 1000 MHz, gradually decrease the
frequency span from 4G, 2G, 1G and so on, and set the frequency span
so that the waveforms can be displayed within the screen.

(5) Make sure that the shift from the center frequency is within the range
of specifications (see Figure 11-6).

Odtf !ii — .— m o o{ . 0 0jMHz

- 5M!iz
+10MHz or less R4131A) 10d?/
own

ST ATT :KHIB VF :1MHz

Figure 11-6 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test

11-11 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.5 Residual FM

11.5 Residual FM

Specification: Less than 2 kHzp_p/l00 ms

{1) Description:

The calibration signal with a stabilized frequency from this spectrum

analyzer is used to perform the residual FM test. The test is performed
by FM demodulation by using the R4131 as a fixed tuned receiver with its
frequency span set to zero span.
Demodulation is accomplished by using the slope of the spectrum analyzer
IF bandpass filter.

NOTE: When performing the residual FM test, install the spectrum analyzer
in a place free from vibration, because accuracy of measurement is
extremely susceptible to vibrations.

(2) Procedure

(T) Set the spectrum analyzer as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 100 MHZ
CENTER FREQ 200 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH AUTO (300 kHzw)
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 2 dB/DIV, -40 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 MHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN

(2) Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT connector and the INPUT
connector with the supplied cable as shown in Figure 11-7.

Figure 11-7 Residual FM Test Setup

11-12 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.5 Residual FM

(3) Reduce the spectrum analyzer frequency span to 100 kHz. If the
200 MHz signal moves from the center of the display screen, center it
again by turning the TUNING dial. The resolution bandwidth is set to
10 kHz.

(7) Set the spectrum analyzer to the ZERO SPAN mode, and turn the TUNING
dial to bring the signal level closer to the center line on the
display screen.

(5) With the sweep time/division set to 0.1 second, press the STORE switch
twice to keep the waveform still.
Check that the peak-to-peak level change in any division (that is, 0.1
second) on the horizontal axis is 1.2 divisions or less as shown in
Figure 11-8.

_ 200 .016MHz __ZFRO SPAN

2 cm
:lUkHz
— --- --- ---

1 .2di v or less
Yvvv 'vvVv 'A tyVvy*'
\A/J
--- ---

--- --- --- ---

AF
ST O.lu/ ATT :10MB VF 1MHz

Figure 11-8 Residual FM Test

The value of 1.2 divisions has been acquired for the following reason:
The 10 kHz bandwidth filter of the spectrum analyzer is used to allow
the residual FM to be displayed on the display screen. The residual
FM can be visually observed when the spectrum analyzer is set to a
resolution bandwidth of 10 kHz. (See Figure 11-9.) As can be seen
from this figure, a 2 kHz change in the frequency axis moves the level
about 1.2 divisions.

11-13 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____ _____ 11.5 Residual FM

Figure 11-9 Residual FM to AM Conversion Display

Therefore, if the peak-to-peak level change as shown in Figure 11-8 is

less than 1.2 divisions, it follows that the residual FM is less than
2 kHz.

11 - 14 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.6 Noise Sidebands

11.6 Noise Sidebands

Specification: -80 dBc or less with a resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz and

10 Hz video filter at the position which is 20 kHz from
the carrier
Equipment used: Synthesized signal source

{1) Description

The noise sidebands test is performed using stable,high-purity 1 GHz,

-10 dBm signals.

(2) Procedure

(7) Connect the spectrum analyzer and the synthesized signal source to
each other as shown in Figure 11-10.

(2) Set the output of the synthesized signal source to 1 GHz (carrier
wave) and -10 dBm.

(3) Set the spectrum analyzer as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 1 GHz
CENTER FREQ 1 GHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH AUTO (300 kHzw)
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 10 dB/DIV, -10 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 MHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN
R4131
TR4511 •0 tta
:o
G)S>G> g g 0 Gfr1[Qft1
0 © u OB ’£) 0
USJ|LI p M O
0|
Tyhj OH©-© P
6 6 Q CUP'S
QQ0O ■s ‘ as"
e> e> B Q D - S £S"S> D S <j>
fa 0 ¥ O 0
u
Wr

Figure 11-10 Noise Sidebands Test Setup

(4) Reduce the span to 100 kHz. If the waveform peak moves from the
center of the display screen, center it again by turning the TUNING
dial.

(5) If the peak moves from the center of the display screen, center it
again by turning the TUNING dial.

11-15 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.6 Noise Sidebands

© ©

Set the reference level to -30 dBm and the video filter to 10 Hz.

Measure the noise sidebands at the position which is 2 divisions

(20 kHz) from the center of the display screen. Check that the noise
sidebands is lower than the reference level by 60 dB or more as shown
in Figure 11-11.

- 3 0 dBm :10I I . 000M Hz :100kHz

:tOdi./
h *h w

60dB or more

V
C
sr ATT :lOciB VF :l0HZ

Figure 11-11 Noise Sidebands Measurement

11-16 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________ 11.7 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

11.7 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

Specification: Resolution bandwidth between -3 dB points from the signal

peak must be calibrated to ±20% or less.
Equipment used: Synthesized signal source

(1) Description

The resolution bandwidth is tested by setting the spectrum analyzer

vertical axis to the 2 dB/division mode and measuring the width
between two points -3 dB from the signal peak.
Resolution bandwidths narrower than 3 kHz are tested by applying
3.58 MHz signals to the spectrum analyzer IF FILTER IN connector.

(2) Procedure

(7) Connect the calibration signal of the spectrum analyzer to the INPUT
connector as shown in Figure 11-12 (a).

11 - 17 Oct 20/89
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.7 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

TR4511
R4131
(REAR VIEW)
o-o- a a$-<|>
£>£> 00.©-S
Q G IO G&
e>e> QOd-O CD"CD
pj~g&igQB£~assa Lsl©

(b)

Figure 11-12 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Setup

(2) Set the spectrum analyzer as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 1 GHZ

CENTER FREQ 200 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH AUTO
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 2 dB/DIV, -23 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 MHZ

- 18 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________ 11.7 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

SWEEP TRIGGER : FREE RUN

SWEEP TIME/DIV: 10 ms

(3) Set the span to 2 MHz. If the signal peak moves from the center of
the display screen, center it again by turning the TUNING dial.

(4) Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz.

(5) Turning the spectrum analyzer AMPTD CAL control, adjust the signal
peak to be 1.5 divisions (3 dB) above the horizontal axis in the
center of the display screen. (See Figure 11-13.)
Then, measure the width of the two points on the horizontal axis
traversed by the signal. This width is taken as the 3 dB bandwidth.

-r'-J . OOilBtn 200.t):LMtU 2MHz

Figure 11-13 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

(?) Move the signal to left and right by turning the TUNING dial to
determine the order of the graduation in which the measured bandwidth
falls. Check that this width is between 4 and 6 divisions (5 +1
divisions).

(7) Change the spectrum analyzer frequency span and resolution bandwidth
to the values specified in Table 11-4, and repeat steps (5) and (<s)
above.

11 - 19 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________ 11.7 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

Table 11-4 Resolution Bandwidth Test 1 MHz to 10 kHz

Resolution Frequency 3 dB down width

bandwidth span
min. max.
1 MHz 2 MHz 4 div 6 div
300 kHz 500 kHz 4.8 d iv 7.2 div
100 kHz 200 kHz 4 div 6 div
30 kHz 100 kHz 2.4 div 3.6 div

10 kHz 50 kHz 1 .6 div 2.4 div

(8) In testing resolution bandwidths 3 kHz to 1 kHz, remove the top cover
of the spectrum analyzer and apply 3.58 MHz, -20 dBm signals to the IF
FILTER IN connector from the synthesized signal source. (See
Figure 11-12 (b).)

(9) Set the spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth to 3 kHz and adjust the
output frequency of the synthesized signal source for the maximum
waveform peak by varying the output frequency at the 10 Hz place.

(fo) Adjust the output level of the synthesized signal synthesized source
to bring the spectrum analyzer display level to 1.5 divisions above
the horizontal axis in the center of the display screen.

(fl) Reduce the output frequency of the synthesized signal source until the
waveform peak displayed on the display screen coincides with the
horizontal axis in the center of the display screen. Record this
output frequency as f1.

(f2) Next, increase the output frequency of the synthesized signal source
until the waveform peak rises once above the horizontal axis in the
center of the display screen, and then correspondingly falls. Record
this output frequency as f2.

(f3) Determine the 3 dB bandwidth by calculating f2 minus f1. Check that

this value falls between 2.4 and 3.6 kHz (3 ±0.6 kHz or less).

(Q) Test resolution bandwidths 1 kHz according to Table 11-5. Keep

records of the resultant 3 dB resolution bandwidth values for use in
the resolution bandwidth selectivity test described in Section 11.8.

1 1 - 20 Oct 20/89
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

___________________________________ 11.7 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

Table 11-5 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 3 kHz to 1 kHz

TR4511 output f2 - f 1
Resolution bandwidth frequency variation
min. max.
place
3 kHz 10 Hz 2.4 kHz 3.6 kHz
1 kHz 10 Hz 0.8 kHz 1.2 kHz

11 - 21 Oct 20/89
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.8 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

11.8 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

Specification: 60 dB/3 dB resolution bandwidth ratio: 15:1

Equipment used: Synthesized signal source

(1) Description

The 60 dB bandwidth of the spectrum analyzer is determined first, and

is then compared with the 3 dB bandwidth obtained in Section 11.7 to
determine resolution bandwidth selectivity. As in Section 11.7, the
resolution bandwidth selectivity is tested in two parts: 1 MHz to
10 kHz, and 3 kHz or less resolution bandwidths.

(2) Procedure:

(T) Set the spectrum analyzer as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 4 GHz
CENTER FREQ 2 00 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH 1 MHzw
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 10 dB/DIV, -10 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 0 kHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN
SWEEP TIME/DIV 10 ms

R4131

Figure 11-14 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Setup

(2) Set the synthesized signal source to 200 MHz (CW), -10 dBm. Connect
the spectrum analyzer and the synthesized signal source to each other
as shown in Figure 11-14.

(3) Press the SPAN switch to activate the frequency span. Reduce the span
while turning the TUNING dial to adjust the signal to be in the center
of the display screen. Select the minimum span that allows the two
points 60 dB lower than the signal peak to be observed on the screen.

11 - 22 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________________ 11.8 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

(4) Turn the AMPTD CAL control to bring the signal peak to the top
graticule on the display screen.

(5) Turn the TUNING dial to position the 60 dB point for the best reading.

(5) Measure and record the 60 dB bandwidth. Check that the ratio of the
60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth measured in Section 11.7 is 15
or less.

(7) Repeat steps (3) to (ff) for resolution bandwidths of 300 kHz to 10 kHz
as well.

(8) Connect the output of the synthesized signal source to the spectrum
analyzer IF FILTER IN connector as shown in Figure 11-12 (b).

(9) Set the output frequency of the synthesized signal source to 3.58 MHz
(CW), -20 dBm.

Adjust the output frequency of the synthesized signal source for a

maximum reading on the R4137 display screen, and set the signal to be
on the reference graticule.

(jj) Increase the output frequency of the synthesized signal source until
the signal level is reduced 60 dB (6 graticules).
Now measure and record this frequency as fl.

(f^) Reduce the output frequency of the synthesized signal source until the
signal level is up 60 dB (6 graticules). Again, measure and record
this frequency as f2.

(f|) Determine the 60 dB bandwidth by calculating f1 minus f2.

Check that the following relation holds: 60 dB bandwidth/3 dB
bandwidth ^ 1 5 .

(fj) Repeat steps 10 to 13 for resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz.

11 - 23 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.9 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Accuracy

11.9 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Accuracy

Specification: ±1 dB {referenced to 300 kHz bandwidth)

(1) Description

The amplitude readout error associated with switching of the

resolution bandwidth is measured using a CAL signal.

(2) Procedure

(T) Set the R4131 as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 1 GHz
CENTER FREQ 200 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH 1 MHz
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 2 dB/DIV, -28 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER 10 kHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN
SWEEP TIME/DIV 10 ms

(2) Connect the CAL input to the INPUT connector. (See Figure 11-15.)

(3) Set the span to 2 MHz, while turning the TUNING dial to center the
waveform on the display screen.

(4) Pressing the RBW switch, set the resolution bandwidth to 300 kHz.

Figure 11-15 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Accuracy Test Setup

Turn the AMPTD CAL control to adjust the signal peak to be 1 division
lower than the reference graticule on the display screen.

11-24 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________11.9 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Accuracy

(6) Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz. Check that the maximum
amplitude point is ±1 dB (±0.5 division) or less when compared to the
300 kHz resolution bandwidth.

Similarly, set the span and the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz.
Check that the maximum amplitude point is ±1 dB or less when compared
to the 300 kHz resolution bandwidth.

(¥) Also test resolution bandwidths 30 kHz to 1 kHz at the settings

specified in Table 11-6.

Table 11-6 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

Resolution Frequency Amplitude readout

bandwidth span/division change

1 MHz 2 MkHz ±1 dB

300 kHz 2 MkHz 0 dB (REF.)

100 kHz 1 MkHz ±1 dB

30 kHz 200 kHz ±1 dB

10 kHz 100 kHz ±1 dB

3 kHz 50 kHz ±1 dB

1 kHz 50 kHz ±1 dB

11 - 25 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.10 LOG Linearity and LIN Linearity

11.10 LOG Linearity and LIN Linearity

Specification: LOG linearity: ±1 dB/10 d B , +0.15 dB/1 d B , ±1.5 dB/70 dB

LIN linearity: ±5% of full scale
Equipment used: Synthesized signal source
10 dB step ATT
1 dB step ATT

(1) Description

Linearity test is performed by utilizing the marker on the display

screen when the aid of the external signal and the attenuators.

(2) Procedure
LOG linearity

(T) Set the R4131 as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN : 1 GHz
CENTER FREQ : 200 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH : AUTO
REFERENCE LEVEL : -10 dB
INPUT ATTENUATOR : 10 dB
TRACE : WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH: 1 MHz
SWEEP TRIGGER : FREE RUN

(2) Set the output frequency of the synthesized signal source to 200 MHz
(CW) , -10 dBm, and connect the synthesized signal source to the
spectrum analyzer INPUT connector using attenuators as shown in
Figure 11-16.

11 - 26 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__________ 11.10 LOG Linearity and LIN Linearity

R4131

ATT
Figure 11-16 LOG/LIN Linearity Test Setup

(T) Set the 10 dB step ATT to 0 dB.

(T) Set the span to 2 MHz while turning the TUNING dial to position the
signal peak in the center of the display screen. Then, make the
following settings:
Resolution bandwidth : 30 kHz
Sweep time/division : 20 ms
Video filter band width: 10 kHz

(5) Press the MARKER switch and turn the TUNING dial to position the
marker at the signal peak.

(?) Adjust the AMPTD CAL control to set the marker level reading to
-10.0 dBm.

(7) Vary the 10 dB step ATT 10 dB at a time, checking that the marker
level values conform to the values of Table 11-7.
With an attenuator setting of 70 dB, set the video filter to 100 Hz
and the sweep time/division to 0.1 s in order to prevent noise being
superimposed on the signal.

NOTE: If the marker moves off the signal peak during measurement,
position it at the signal peak again by turning the TUNING dial.

11-27 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__________ 11.10 LOG Linearity and LIN Linearity

Table 11-7 LOG Linearity

ATT setting Marker level readout Video filter Sweep time/div

0 -10 dBm (REF) 10 kHz 20 ms
10 -20 ±1 dBm 10 kHz 20 ms
20 -30 ±1 dBm 10 kHz 20 ms
30 -40 ±1 dBm 10 kHz 20 ms
40 -50 ±1 dBm 10 kHz 20 ms
50 -60 ±1 dBm 10 kHz 20 ms
60 -70 ±1 dBm 10 kHz 20 ms
70 -80 ±1.5 dBm 100 Hz 0.1 s

(?) Connect the 1 dB step ATT to the spectrum analyzer and set the video
filter to 10 kHz and the sweep time/division to 20 ms.

(?) Set the ATT to 0 dB.

@ Set the R4131 reference level to 2 dB/division and the resolution

bandwidth to 300 kHz. Turn the AMPTD CAL control to adjust the marker
level to be -10.0 dBm.

(fj) Set the ATT to 2 dB. Check that the resultant marker level reading is
-12 dBm ±0.3 dB, or less.
Next, set the ATT to 10 dB. Check that the resultant marker level
reading is -20 dBm ±1 dB, or less.

LIN linearity

(^2) Set the ATT to 0 dB, and set the output level of the synthesized
signal source to -10 dBm {70.71 mV).

(V3) Set the R4131 to the LIN mode, and position the marker at the signal
peak. Turn the AMPTD CAL control until the marker level is set to
70.71 mV (on the reference graticule).

(£4) Set the ATT to 6 dB. Check that the marker level reading is 35.4 mV
±3.5 mV, or less.

11 - 28 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.11 Reference Level Accurcy

11.11 Reference Level Accuracy

Specification: The reference level as varied with MIN INPUT ATT 10 dB

(fixed) must be accurate to within 1 dB.
Equipment used: Synthesized signal source
10 dB step ATT
1 dB step ATT

(1) Description

The reference level accuracy can be determined by testing the IF GAIN

accuracy in the LOG display mode.

(2) Procedure

(7) Set the R4131 as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 1 GHz
CENTER FREQ 200 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH AUTO
REFERENCE LEVEL FINE, 2 dB/DIV, 0 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 MHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN

(2) Set the output frequency of the synthesized signal source to 200 MHz
(CW), -10 dBm, and connect the source to the spectrum analyzer INPUT
connector using attenuators as shown in Figure 11-17.

R4131C/D

ATT ATT
Figure 11-17 Reference Level Accuracy Test Setup

11 - 29 May 31/94
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

___________________ 8.12 REFERENCE LEVEL ACCURACY

(3) Set both the 10 dB and 1 dB step ATTs to 0 dB.

(T) Set the span to 2 MHz while turning the TUNING dial to position the
signal peak in the center of the display screen.

(5) Then, make the following settings:

Resolution bandwidth: 300 kHz
Video filter : 1 kHz
Sweep time/division : 50 ms

(?) Press the MARKER switch and turn the TUNING dial to position the
marker at the signal peak.

(7) Adjust the AMPTD CAL control to set the marker level reading to
-10.0 dBm.

(8) With the 1 dB step ATT at 1 dB, set the reference level to -1.00 dBm.
Check that the marker level reading is -11.00 ±1 dB or less.

(9) Proceed with further testing with the settings specified in Table 11-8.

Table 11-8 Reference Level Accuracy

Reference level
ATT setting Marker readout level
setting
0 dBm 0 dB -10.00 dBm (REF.)
-1 dBm 1 dB -11.00 ±1 dBm
-2 dBm 2 dB -12.00 ±1 dBm
-3 dBm 3 dB -13.00 ±1 dBm

-4 dBm 4 dB -14.00 ±1 dBm

-5 dBm 5 dB -15.00 ±1 dBm
-6 dBm 6 dB -16.00 ±1 dBm
-7 dBm 7 dB -17.00 ±1 dBm
-8 dBm 8 dB -18.00 ±1 dBm
-9 dBm 9 dB -19.00 ±1 dBm
-10 dBm 10 dB -20.00 ±1 dBm
-20 dBm 20 dB -30.00 ±1 dBm
-30 dBm 30 dB -40.00 ±1 dBm
-40 dBm 40 dB -50.00 ±1 dBm

-50 dBm 50 dB -60.00 ±1 dBm

1 1 - 30 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.12 Residual Responses

11.12 Residual Responses

Specification:
R4131 C/D ...
-95 dBm or less (at an input attenuator setting of 0 dB)
R4 131CN/DN ...
-93 dBm or less (at an input attenuator setting of 0 dB)
(1) Description

Residual responses refers to the signal displayed on the display

screen in the absence of input. Testing is performed at 100 MHz
intervals in the range 100 kHz to 3.5 GHz.

(2) Procedure

© After terminating the spectrum analyzer INPUT connector with a 50 Q

terminator (R4131C/D) and a 75 II terminator (R4131CN/DN), set the
spectrum analyzer as follows:
FREQUENCY SPAN 100 MHz
CENTER FREQ 50 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH 30 kHz
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 10 dB/DIV, -50 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 0 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 kHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN
SWEEP TIME/DIV 1 s

© Set the TRIGGER MODE switch to SINGLE and press the START switch to
test residual responses in the range of 0 to 100 MHz.
Check that the residual responses is -95 dBm or less (R4131C/D),
-93 dBm or less (R4131CN/DN).

(D Turn the TUNING dial to set the center frequency to 150 MHz. Press
the START switch to test residual responses in the range of 100 to
200 MHz. Check that the residual responses is -95 dBm or less
(R4131C/D), -93 dBm or less (R4131CN/DN).

Similarly, test residual responses up to 3.5 GHz at 100 MHz intervals,

11 - 31 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.13 Gain Compression

11.13 Gain Compression

Specification: *MIX input end must be 1 dBm or less for a -10 dBm input.
[*: (Input signal level) - (MIN INPUT ATT)]
Equipment used: Synthesized signal source
Power meter
Power sensor
10 dB step ATT

(1) Description

The gain compression is tested by checking to see if the reading level

rises 10 dB when the MIX input end level is increased from -20 dBm to
-10 dBm.

(2) Procedure

(7) Set the R4131 as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 100 MHz
CENTER FREQ 200 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH AUTO
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 10 dB/DIV, -10 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 MHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN

(2) Set the output frequency of the synthesized signal source to 200 MHz
(CW) and connect it to the power meter, adjusting the synthesized
signal source for 0 dBm output.

(3) Set the 10 dB step ATT to 10 dB and connect it to the spectrum

analyzer as shown in Figure 11-18.

11 - 32 Oct 20/89
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.13 Gain Compression

R4131

POWER
SENSOR
3---- -

POWER
METER

Figure 11-18 Gain Compression Test Setup

(T) Set the span to 1 MHz while turning the TUNING dial to position the
200 MHz signal in the center of the display screen.
Pressing the RBW switch, set the resolution bandwidth to 300 kHz, and
set the reference level to 2 dB/DIV.

(5) Turn the AMPTD CAL control to bring the signal peak to the reference
graticule (top graticule) on the display screen.

(jf) Set both the reference level and the 10 dB step ATT to 0 dB. Check
that the signal peak falls within 0.5 division (1 dB) of the top
graticule (reference graticule) on the display screen.

11 - 33 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_________________________________________ 11,14 Frequency Response

11.14 Frequency Response

Specification: Frequency response (MIN INPUT ATT: 10 dB)

R4131C 100 kHz ^ F ^ 2 GHz 10 kHz ^ F ^ 3. 5 GHz

+1 dB or less ±3.5 dB or less

R4131D 100 k H z ^ F ^ 2 GHz 10 kHz ^ F ^3. 5 GHz

±1 dB or less ±2 dB or less

R4131CN/DN 100 kHz < F g1 .5 GHz 10 kHz ^ F ^ 2 GHz 2 GHz ^ F ^3.5 GHz
±1.5 dB or less ±2.5 dB or less ±4 dB or less

Equipment used: Sweep oscillator

Power meter
Power sensor
Sweep adapter

(1) Description

Testing is performed by setting the R4131 to the full span mode and a
sweep oscillator to the external sweep mode and observing changes of
the amplitude reading on the display screen. Since sweep oscillator
frequency responses are included in the measurement results, measure
the sweep oscillator response with a power meter prior to testing for
later correction of the measurements.

(2) Procedure

© Set the R4131 as follows

FREQUENCY SPAN 4 GHz
CENTER FREQ 2000 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH AUTO
REFERENCE LEVEL COARSE, 10 dB/DIV, 0 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE, POSI PEAK
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 1 MHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN
SWEEP TIME/DIV 10 ms

© Set the sweep oscillator output to 200 MHz (CW), -10 dBm and connect
it to the power meter using the A01002 cable. Adjust the output level
of the sweep oscillator to -10 dBm. (See Figure 11-19.)

11-34 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________________ 11.14 Frequency Response

R4131 TR4515

METER

Figure 11-19 Frequency Response Test Setup

(3) Connect the sweep OSC output to the spectrum analyzer INPUT
connector. Connect the impedance converter for the R4131CN/DN. (See
Figure 11-19) With its amplitude set to 2 dB/division, set the
refrence level to display a 200 MHz signal on the center axis of the
display screen.

(4) Set the sweep oscillator to the external sweep mode, and set the start
and stop frequencies to 10 MHz and 4 GHz, respectively.

(¥) Press the sweep adapter START switch, and adjust the START dial to
display the signal at the leftmost position on the display screen.
Next, press the STOP switch and adjust the STOP dial to display the
signal at the rightmost position on the display screen.

(6) When the SWEEP switch is pressed after the STOP dial has been
adjusted, the waveform, shown in Figure 8.20 (a) appears. When a
uniform spectrum waveform is not displayed, finely adjust the START
and STOP dials.

(7) Set the sweep time/division to 1 s, and the frequency characteristics

will be displayed on the display screen. (See Figure 11-20 (b).)
Make sure that the ripple current is within the range of the
specifications.

11-35 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.14 Frequency Response

O. OOdBm 2000MHz 4GHZ □.OOdBm 2000MHz 4GHz

2dB/ 2dB/
1 «tHzv< 1 ^Hz»

(For
R4131B)
2dBp-p or
.1 less

ST 10m*/ prpj 10dB VF 1MHz ST lc/ VF 1MHz

M T lOdB

(a) (b)

Figure 11-20 Frequency Response (100 kHz - 3.6 GHz)

11-36 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________________________________11.15 Average Noise Level

11.15 Average Noise Level

Specification:
R4131C/D __ -110 dBm or less
R 4131CN/DN ... -108 dBm or less
(Resolution bend width 1 kHz, Video filter 10 Hz, Input ATT 0 dB, More
than 1 MHz in frequency.)

(1) Description

The average noise level is the maximum value of the average noise
levels in the 1 kHz resolution bandwidth with an input ATT setting of
0 dB.

Note: Be sure to perform amplitude calibration (see Section 4.7) before

performing this test.

(2) Procedure

(T) Set the R4131 as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN : 4 GHz
CENTER FREQ : 2000 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH : 1 MHz
INPUT ATTENUATOT :0 dB
REFERENCE LEVEL :-50 dBm
TRACE :WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH: 1 kHz
SWEEP TRIGGER :FREE RUN
SWEEP TIME/DIV : 1 s
MARKER : ON

(2) Turning the TUNING dial, position the marker at the maximum noise
level point. (See Figure 11-21)

11-37 May 31/94

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

____________________ __ __________________ 11.15 Average Noise Level

(3) Press the MKR-^CF switch. (Set the center frequency to the marker
frequency.) Set the frequency span to zero span and set the
resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz.

Figure 11-21 Maximum Noise

(4) Set the video filter to 10 Hz. (See Figure 11-22) Check that the
marker level reading is -110 dBm or less (R4131C/D), and -108 dBm or
less (R4131CN/DN).

-~rjQriRni___ 360 0 .00QMHz ZfiRO SPAN

MK >3. 00s lOdB
"IBnt- 'irsiT,.

--- ---

-11 0 dBm or les S (R41 31C

'VAyV ,’M,r'V'AA V y v /'t. -AWy'-v'/-v

ST :Lfj/ ATT OrlB VF :10Hz

Figure 11-22 Average Noise Level Test

11 - 38 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.76 Sweep Time Accuracy

11.16 Sweep Time Accuracy

Specification : ±15%
Equipment used: Synthesized signal source
Function generator

(1) Description

Sweep time accuracy is tested by demodulating signals in the R4131

zero span mode after they are amplitude modulated by the function
generator and measuring the periods of the demodulated waves.

(2) Procedure

(7) Set the R4131 as follows:

FREQUENCY SPAN 100 MHz
CENTER FREQ 50 MHz
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH 1 MHz
REFERENCE LEVEL 2 dB/DIV, -10 dBm
INPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB
TRACE WRITE
VIDEO FILTER BAND WIDTH 10 kHz
SWEEP TRIGGER FREE RUN
SWEEP TIME/DIV 10 ms

(2) Set the output frequency of the synthesized signal source to 50 MHz,
-10 dBm, EXT AM mode.

(3) Set the function generator to generate sine waves at 200 Hz ±0.5%.

(4) Connect the instruments as shown in Figure 11-23. Turn the R4131
TUNING dial to position the signal in the center of the display
screen. Further, set the frequency span to zero span and adjust the
TUNING dial to obtain the maximum signal level.

(5) Adjust the function generator output level to obtain demodulated waves
in the order of 3 DIVp_p.

(6) Adjust the reference level to position the signal at an easily viewed
position on the display screen.

(7) Set the TRIGGER MODE switch to VIDEO.

(8) Set the sweep time/division to 5 ms and store the resultant waveform.
Check that five periods of the demodulated waves have a duration of 25
±3.75 ms, or less. (See Figure 11-24)

Similarly, test other sweep time/division with the settings specified

in Table 8-11.

11-39 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.16 Sweep Time Accuracy

Table 11-9 Sweep Time Accuracy

Function generator
Sweep time/div Duration of five periods
frequency
5 ms 200 Hz ±0.5% 25 ms ±3.75 ms
10 ms 100 Hz ±0.5% 50 ms ±7.5 ms
20 ms 50 Hz 100 ms ±15 ms
50 ms 20 Hz 250 ms ±37.5 ms
0.1 s 1 0 Hz 0.5 s ±75 ms
0.2 s 5 Hz 1 s ±150 ms

0.5 s 2 Hz 2.5 s ±375 ms

1 s 1 Hz 5 s ±0.75 s
2 s 0.5 Hz 10 s ±1.5 s
5 s 0.2 Hz 25 s ±3.75 s
10 s 0.1 Hz 50 s ±7.5 s

B4131

GENERATOR

Figure 11-23 Sweep Time Accuracy Test Setup

1 1 - 40 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.16 Sweep Time Accuracy

-- :10 , OOi IRin SO . / / S M H z Zl:RO SPAN

Figure 11-24 Sweep Time Accuracy Test

11 - 41 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________ 11.17 Calibrated Output Accuracy

11.17 Calibrated Output Accuracy

Specification : 200 MHz ±30 kHz, -30 dBm ±0.5 dB:R4131C/D

200 MHz ±30 kHz , 80 dBy ±0.5 dB :R4131CN/DN
Equipment used: Synthesized signal source
Power meter

(1) Description

Test the accuracy of CAL signal frequency by using the synthesized

signal source. Test the accuracy of signal level by connecting the
power meter directly to the CAL signal line.

(2) Procedure

Frequency Test

(?) Press the R4131 ZERO CAL switch.

(2) Set the synthesized signal source to 200 MHz, -30 dBm.

(3) Connect the synthesized signal sourse to the spectrum analyzer INPUT
connector. Set the span to 100 kHz while turning the TUNING dial to
position the 200 MHz signal in the center of the display screen.

(4) Next, connect the CAL signal to INPUT connector. (See Figure 11-25)
Check that the center frequency is 200 MHz ±30 kHz, or less.

Amplitude Test

(7) Directly connect the power meter to the CAL OUT signal line.

(2) Make sure that the CAL OUT output signal level is -30 dBm ±0.5 dB
(R4131C/D) or -28.93 dBm ±0.5 dB (R4131CN/DN).

The reason why the R4131CN/DN has the -28.93 dBm signals when the 80
dBy CAL OUT signal is measured on the 50ft power meter:

75ft 1 OmV 80 dBjj, -28.75 dBm is:

-ANV- 10 logP = -28.75 dBm
20mV V 2 = 1 .334 X 10-3 (mW)
0 80dBjj
-28.75dBm 75ft R

As R = 75ft:
V = 10.00 (mV)
Therefore, if the 50ft power meter is connected:
75S2 P = Vf = (8mV)2 = 1.28 X 10-3 (mW)
8mV R 50
-Wr-
2OmV I 10 logP = 28.93dBm

50ft
©
■o-
11-42 May 31/94
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

11.17 Calibrated Output Accuracy

R4131

METER

Figure 11-25 Calibrated Output Accuracy Test Setup

11 - 43* Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__ ______ 12. Maintenance Data

72. MAINTENANCE DATA

12 - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________________________________________12.1 Preparation

12.1 Preparation

The equipment and tools necessary for troubleshooting are listed in

Table 12-1. The equipment must have equivalent or better performance
ratings than those in the table.

Table 12-1 Equipment and Tools Required For

Recommended
Equipment Performance
equipment
Digital voltmeter Range : +1000 V TR6846
Accuracy : +0*1%
Input impedance: 10 Mft
High frequency Frequency : 100 kHz to 8 GHz
power meter Sensitivity: -30 dBm to +20 dBm
Accuracy : +0.5 dB
DC power supply Output voltage: +10 V TR614 2
Accuracy : +0.03%
Oscilloscope Frequency range: DC to 100 MHz
Input impedance: 1 Mft
Signal generator Frequency range : 100 kHz to 1800 MHz TR4512
Output level : +10 dBm or more
Output impedance : 50 ft
Frequency accuracy: 2 E-8/day
Variable frequency: 1 Hz step
FET probe Frequency range: DC to 500 MHz
Input impedance: 1 Mft or more, 2 pF or less
Spectrum analyzer Frequency range : 10 MHz to 8 GHz R41 36
Frequency accuracy: jJ00 kHz
Spectrum analyzer Input frequency range : 100 kHz to TR4 1 7 1
1.8 GHz or
Tracking generator output: 400 kHz to R4136 + TR4154
1 .8 GHz
T.G. output flatness : +1 dB
Impedance : 50 0.
High frequency Frequency : 100 kHz to 1500 MHz
power meter Sensitivity: -30 dBm to +20 dBm
Accuracy : +0.5 dB

12-2 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

___________________________________________________ 12.1 Preparation

Table 12-2 Maintenance Tools Required for Troubleshooting

Product name Stock number Remarks

Cable (UM-UM) MM-17

Cable (SMA-SMA) MM— 14
Cable (BNC-BNC) MI-02
Cable (BNC-UM) MC-36 2 pcs.
UM to UM JCF-AC001JX07
Linear Adapter
SMA to SMA JCF-AA001 JX28
Adapter

12-3 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_____________________________________ 12.2 Location Diagram (Top & Bottom)

12.2 Location Diagram (Top & Bottom)

1ST Lo 2ND Lo
OUT OUT

O UM CONNECTOR

Figure 12-1 Location Diagram (Bottom View)

12-4 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

12.2 Location Diagram (Top & Bottom)

□
J2 J3
n

ICPU I
I____ I

I POWER |
! SUPPLY |
1 1

ANALOG

CRT J4

Lr - - - - - - - - - - LI
□ SMA CONNECTOR

(3 UM CONNECTOR

Figure 12-2 Location Diagram (Top View)

12-5 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

12.3 Location Diagram for RF

12.3 Location Diagram for RF

2ND Lo OUT
1ST Lo OUT
(to REAR PANEL)
{to AFC)

IF OUT 3.58MHz
(to ANALOG)

□ SMA CONNECTOR

( 3 UM CONNECTOR

Figure 12-3 Location Diagram for RF

12-6 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

______________________________ 72,4 Block Diagram

12.4 Block Diagram

Figure 12-4 Block Diagram

12-7 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

12.5 Self Test

12.5 Self Test

The R4131 performs SELF TEST for the RAM and ROM on the CPU board when
power is turned on.

In the case there is a failure RAM or ROM, the following error message is
displayed on the CRT.

Message Mean
RAM error Failure RAM U26 or U32 (SMM-8464C-5)
on the CPU board (BLR-015114)
ROM error Failure ROM U21 (SMM-27C25-1) on
the CPU board (BLR-015114)

12-8* Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

__________________________________________Appendix

APPENDIX

A - 1 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________________________________________A.1 Explanation of Terminologies

A . 1 Explanation of Terminologies

IF Bandwidth

In this spectrum analyzer, a band pass filter (BPF) is used to analyze

each frequency component included in input signals. The 3 dB bandwidth of
this BPF is called the IF band (see Figure A-1 (a)). The BPF
characteristic should be set to the appropriate size according to the
sweep width and sweep speed. In this equipment, it is set to the maximum
value according to the sweep width. Since this bandwidth can generally
improve the resolution (a degree of separation) more and more when it is
set narrower, the resolution of the spectrum analyzer is expressed in the
narrowest IF bandwidth in some cases (see Figure A-1 (b)).

Gain Compression

In case the input signal becomes larger than a certain value, no correct
value is displayed on the CRT screen and a somewhat compressed phenomenon
occurs even when the input signal is increased. This is called the gain
compression. It expresses the linearity of the input signal range. In
general, a level range is used until 1 dB is compressed.

Input Sensitivity

This means the highest capacity of a spectrum analyzer to detect minor

signals. The sensitivity is related to the noise generated from the
spectrum analyzer itself and it depends on the IF bandwidth used.
Generally, the input sensitivity expresses the average noise level in the
minimum IF bandwidth of that spectrum analyzer.

Maximum Input Level

This is the maximum allowable level of the input circuit of a spectrum

analyzer. The allowable level can be changed by the input attenuator.

A - 2 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

________________A. 1 Explanation of Terminologies

Residual FM

This is a method to express a short term frequency stability of the local

oscillator groups integrated in a spectrum analyzer. The frequency
straying per unit time is expressed in p-p. This also indicates the
critical value when the residual FM of a measured signal is measured.

Residual Responses

This defines to what level value the spurious signal generated in a

spectrum analyzer is suppressed when calculated in terms of the input
level. This signal is caused when a particular signal, e.g., the local
oscillator output, etc., inside the spectrum analyzer is leaked. Care
should be taken in this respect when a very small input signal is analyzed.

Quasi Peak Value Measurements

Disturbing noise received in radio communication often appears in an

impulsive state. As an objective evaluation of this disturbance, the
disturbing noise component is evaluated with a value proportional to its
peak value. Such prerequisite factors as the measuring bandwidth and
detection time constant for this measurement are used as the quasi peak
values. This is represented by the JRTC Standards in Japan and by the
CISPR Standards internationally.

Frequency Response

Frequency response is usually used as a term to indicate the amplitude

characteristic with frequency (frequency characteristic). In spectrum
analyzer, this term means the frequency characteristic (flatness) of an
input attenuator, mixer, etc. at each input frequency. It is represented
by ± dB.

Frequency Span

This means the display range of the ordinates axis (frequency axis) on the
Braun tube. The frequency span is set arbitrarily from a broad band to
narrow band with the frequency scale which is calibrated accurately.

Zero Span

A spectrum analyzer does not sweep the frequency in this mode. Instead,
it sweeps an arbitrary frequency taking the ordinates axis as the time
axis.

Spurious

The spurious means unnecessary signals. They are classified into the
following categories according to the properties of each signal:

A - 3 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

___________________________________________ A.1 Explanation of Terminologies

Harmonic spurious: This is defined to indicate the harmonic level to be

generated by the spectrum analyzer itself (to be generated in the mixer
circuit in general) when no-distortion signal is applied to it. At the
same time, it means the capacity of the harmonic wave distortion
measurement.

Neighborhood spurious: A small spurious generated in the neighborhood of

the spectrum analyzer when a pure single spectrum signal is applied to it.

Non-harmonic spurious: Apart from the above two, the spectrum analyzer
generates a certain proper frequency as a spurious. This is also called
the residual response.

Noise Bandwidth

This is used widely as performance to express the oscillation purity of an

oscillator, etc. In the spectrum analyzer itself, the noise is generated
in the vicinity of the spectrum on the Braun tube from local oscillator
and phase lock loop, thus lowering the analyzing capacity of the
analyzer. To compensate, the analyzer defines its own sideband range
enabling it to analyze the incoming signal noise sidebands within this
range. The spectrum analyzer expresses the noise sideband characteristic
as follows:

Example:

-70 dB apart from the carrier by 20 kHz where the IF bandwidth is assumed
to be 1 kHz. It is also expressed with the energy which exists within the
1 Hz bandwidth in general (Figure A-2 (b)).

Since this value is -70 dB at the 1 kHz bandwidth when expressed with a
1 Hz bandwidth, the signal within the 1 Hz bandwidth becomes a value which
is lower than it by approx. 10 log 1 Hz/1 kHz (dB), approx. 30 dB. It is
then expressed as -100 dB/Hz apart from the carrier by 20 kHz when the IF
bandwidth is 1 kHz.

70dS

ab
I
J iii.
!*]| i m .
f sAnalyzer = n r
20kHz
IF filter characteristic
noise sideband
(a) (b)

Figure A-2 Noise Sideband

A - 4 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

___________________________________________ A.l Explanation of Terminologies

Bandwidth Selectivity

The characteristic of a band-pass filter is not the so-called rectangular

characteristic, but it is generally given an attenuation characteristic
like a gauss distribution. When two large and small signals are mixed
close by, the small signal is concealed behind the large signal
(Figure A-3). It is therefore necessary to define the bandwidth in a
certain attenuation area (60 dB). For this purpose, the ratio of 3 dB
width vs. 60 dB width is expressed as the bandwidth selectivity.

Figure A-3 Bandwidth Selectivity

Bandwidth Accuracy

This is the performance to express the bandwidth accuracy of the IF

filter. It is expressed as a deviation of the nominal value at a 3 dB
lowering point. Although this performance little affects the level
measurement of ordinary continuous signals, it should be taken into
consideration for the level measurement of a noise signal.

Bandwidth Switching Accuracy

For dissolving a signal into spectrums, not one but several IF filters are
used to obtain the optimum resolution for the scan width. Even when
measuring the same signal, an error occurs when the IF filter is switched
for a portion having different loss. This is defined as the bandwidth
switching accuracy.

A - 5 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_______________ A.l Explanation of Terminologies

Reference Level Display Accuracy

In the spectrum analyzer, the absolute level of an input signal is

obtained by reading how much the dB is lowered from the upper-most scale
on the tube surface as a standard. The level set on this upper-most stage
is called the reference level. The reference level is changed by the IF
GAIN key and input attenuator and it is expressed in dBm or dBy. The
absolute accuracy of this display becomes the reference level frequency.

VSWR: Voltage Standing Wave Ratio

This is a constant which expresses the impedance matching status. It is

expressed as the ratio of the maximum value vs. minimum value of the
standing wave caused by the composition of the progressive wave and
reflected wave, where the spectrum analyzer is loaded to the ideal and
nominal impedance source. This is expressed in a different form by the
reflection coefficient and reflection loss.

A - 6 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

A. 1 Explanation of Terminologies

When signal Eq sent from the transmission side is completely transmitted

to the reception side (the spectrum analyzer input section) without
miss-matching in the impedance in Figure A-6, signal E-j received in the
reception side is equivalent in value to E g . when not all the signal is
transmitted owing to the miss-matching on the reception side and returned
by reflection to the reception side, the reflected ratio (the reflection
coefficient) can be expressed as follows where the size of the reflected
wave is taken as E r:

Reflection coefficient m = Reflected wave ER / progressive wave Eg

The ratio of reflected wave ER V s progressive wave E q becomes the

reflected attenuation.

Reflected attenuation = 2 0 log ER / Eo (dB) VSWR

= (Eg + E r ) / (Eo - E r )

Its relation with the reflection coefficient becomes a range of 1 to in

VSWR where the VSWR is assumed to be VSWR = (1 + |m|) / (1 — Imf). The closer
to 1, the better the matching condition.

Figure A-6 V.S.W.R.

Spurious Response

When the signal level becomes larger, the harmonic wave is distorted in
the input mixer circuit. A range usable with no distortion varies
according to the fundamental wave input level. In the example in
Figure A-7, it becomes -70 dB for the -30 dBm. When the input signal
level is larger, the signal applied to the mixer is made smaller by the
input attenuator so that it becomes an optimum input level.

A-7 Oct 20/89

 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

A.1 Explanation of Terminologies

-1 0
- -20
% -»
© -40
~ -S O

— -7 0
« -80
- - 90
-1 0 0
-no
-5 0 -4 0 -2 0 0 20 dBm
Input level

Figure A-7 Spurious Response

YIG-turned Oscillator

This was reported by Griffiths for the first time in 1946. The
garnet-series ferrite which represents the (Yttrium Iron Garnet)
monocrystal shows a quite sharp electronic spin resonant phenomenon and
its resonant frequency has a linear proportional relationship throughout a
broad frequency band for the applied DC magnetic field. It is known from
this that the broad band electronic tuning is enabled by varying the
exciting current of electromagnet which forms the AC magnetic field. This
is applied to the spectrum analyzer and to the local sweep generator of
the automatic microwave frequency counter of ADVANTEST.

A - 8 Oct 20/89
 R41 31 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

A.2 Level Conversion Table

A.2 Level Conversion Table

(JBm/SOn. dBm/75^, Vrms, W/50O. dB u. dBV Conversion Table

dBm/75n dBV dBm/50^ d B p Vrms W/50fi

+ 30d8m ----- — IW
— — S V r-» - SQOmW

----- I30d8w - -
+ Z M 8 m — ----- +■JWBV
t-2 0 d B » ----- — 100«W
- SOmW

*10dB « — — M BV ----- 120JB* ---- IV r m i -

t l M B . ----- ---- IQmW

----- }00*i*Vn»» - 5»W

M B . — ----------IW B V — HO dB* -

OdBm — — \mW
- - 500«W

- l0 d B „ — --------- 20dBV — lOOdBu ----- lO O aV rsil

-IM S . — — IOOu W

-----50»Vrma - S0*W
“
- 2 W B « — ----------30dBV — 90dB*i - -

----- 10* W
- _ 5«W

-----■ lOmVrm* ~
- M d B » — ----------40dBV — S0dBM

-3 W B - — — 1«W

— S a V ria t - SOOnW
“
-4 0 d B « — ----------SOdBV 70 d B it - -
- iO d B a ----- ----- IOOr W
- - 50»W
“
—SOdBn — --------- 6W BV ----- SOdBu — laiV rais ~

-5 0 d B « — — IOb W
- - S(,W
” — SOOwVrm>

- « 0 d B » — --------- 7 « B V — SOdBn — -

—SOdBn — — InW
— -

-7 0 d B » — --------- SOdBV —“ 40dBw ----- lOOu Vrm * O dBV- | V r n

O dB* v lp V rm *
-7 0 d B . —
. _, 0 d 8 a - |m W
-----S O ^V m *
— R -5 0 U

- S O rfB . — ----------SOdBV -----30dBu

-M d B * —
_ — -

—90dBa ----- --------- lOOdBV ----- 20dBw ----- 10* V r« ii

Figure A-8 Level Conversion Table

A - 9 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

_________A.3 Parts Location and Circuit Diagrams

A . 3 Parts Location and Circuit Diagrams

A - 10 Oct 20/89
 R4131 SERIES
BLR-015 1 1 4 (1 /2 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Cl -8 CSM- AGR1U 50 V R 21 RCB - A G1 R5 K

C9 -12 CCK-AR100U16V R2 2 R CB - A G 2 R 7 K
C13 -14 CSM-AG R1U 50 V R 23 RCB - A G1 0 K
C15 CSM-AY1000P50V R 24 RCB- AG 27K
C16 CS M- A G1 U5 0 V R25 -26 RAY-AL3R9K8
C17 -19 CSM- AGR1U 50V R 27 RCB - A G4 R7 K
C 20 CCK-AR10U16V R28 -29 RAY-AL3R9K8
C 21 CSM- AGR1U 50V R30 -33 RAY-AL47K4
C2 2 CCK-AR10U16V R34 R CB - A G 8 2 K
C23 -24 CSM- AGR1 U5 0 V R35 -38 RAY-AL3R9K8
C25 CCK-AR10U16V R39 RCB - A G 1 0 K
C26 -30 CSM- AGR1 U5 0 V R 40 RC B - A G 2 2 0
C31 CCK-AR10U16V R41 RCB - A G 6 8 0
C32 -40 CSM- AGR1U 50 V R42 RCB - A G1 R5 K
C41 CSM-AY1000P50V R43 -44 RC B - A G 3 R 3 K
C42 CSM-AC470P50V R45 RCB-AG220
C43 -44 CCK-AR470U10V R46 R CB - A G 68
C45 CCK-AR10U16V R47 RCB-AG100
C46 CCK-AR470U10V R48 RCB - A G 4 7 0
C47 CS M- A C R 0 1 U 5 0 V SI KSA-000691
C48 CCK-AR10U16V TPl -4 J T E - A H 0 0 1 J X01
Dl -6 SDS-1SS270 U1 SIM-74HC374
D9 -io SDS-1SS270 U2 S I M - 7 4 H C 4 538
J1 J CR-AF040PX01 U3 SIM-74HC02
J2 J CP-BH005PX01 U4 -5 SIM-74HC245
J3 J C P - A A O 1 2 PX05 U6 SIM-74HC125
J4 J CP-BG012PX03 U7 SIM-74HC20
J5 J CR-AF050PX01 U8 SIA-393
J6 J C S - B G 0 2 4 J X05 U10 SIA-TL7700
J7 J CP-BH002PX01 U ll S1M-74HC374
J8 J C I - A H 0 1 4 J XO1 U 12 S I M- 7 4 H C 4 538
LI -2 LCL-T00084A U13 SIM-74HC04
L3 LCL-T00084A U14 SIM-74HC08
Q1 STP-2SA1015 U15 S I M - 7 4 H C245
Q2 S T N - 2 S C2 0 2 6 U16 SIM-74HC244
Q3 STN-2SC1815 U1 7 SIM-74HC10
Q4 -5 STN-2SC2026 LI 18 SIM-74HC32
R1 RCB-AG820 U19 S I M - 7 4 H COO
R2 RCB-AG220 U 20 SIM-74HC74
R5 RCB-AG560 L)21 SMM-27C256B
R6 R CB - A G 6 8 0 U 22 S I M - 7 4 H C 14
R7 RCB-AG470 U23 SIM-653438
R8 R C B - A G 68 U24 SIM-6845C
R9 RCB-AG470 U2 5 SIM-8254C
RI O -11 RCB-AG680 U 26 SMM- 8 4 6 4 C
R12 RCB - A G 2 2 K U27 SIM-Z80C
R13 -15 RAY-AL3R9K8 U28 SIM-74HC244
R16 RCB - A G 1 0 K U 29 S I M - 6 1 V H 136
R17 RCB - A G 3 3 K U30 SMM-8422A
R18 R CB - A G 4 R 7 K U31 SIM-8254C
R19 R CB - A G 3 R 3 K U32 S MM- 8 4 6 4 C
R 20 RC B - A G 2 2 K U33 SIM-9914

A - 11
 R4131 SERIES
BLR-015114 (2 /2 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

U34 SIT-75160
U35 SIT -7 5 1 6 1
U36 - 3 7 SMM-2018B
U38 SIM-74HC04
U39 SIM-74HC74
U40 SMM-27128A
U41 SIM-8254C
U42 SMM-2864
U43 SIM-74HC393
U44 SIM-74HC04
XI DXC-000109

A - 12
 R4131 SERIES
BLR-015116 (1 /5 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Cl C MC - A P 8 2 0 P R 3 K C 112 CMC - A P 8 2 0 P R 3 K
C2 C MC - A P 5 6 0 P R 3 K C l 13-115 CCP-BBR1U50V
C3 CMC-AP1000PR1K C118-119 CCP-BBR1U50V
C4 C MC - A P 5 6 0 P R 3 K C 1 2 0 - 1 23 CCK - C D 4 7 U 2 5 V
C5 CC P - B A R 0 1 U 50V Cl 2 4 - 1 2 6 C CP- BBR1 U 50 V
C6 CCP-BBR1U50V • C1 2 7 CCP-BA100P50V
C7 C CP - B A R 0 1 U 5 0 V C1 2 8 CCP-BA2200P50V
C8 CCP-BA8P50V C l 29 CCP-BBR1U50V
C9 CTM- BM 6 P C1 3 0 CCK-CD100U35V
C ll C CP - B B R 1 U 5 0 V C1 3 1 - 1 4 9 CCP-BBR1U50V
C 12 CCK-CD10U25V Cl 5 1 -1 5 4 CCK- C D47U2 5 V
C13 CC P - B B R 1 U 5 0 V C15 5 CCP-BBR1U50V
CI A C CP - B A R 0 1 U 5 0 V C157-159 CCP- BBR1U 50 V
C16 C CP- BBR1 U 50V C1 6 0 CCK- CD1 0U 2 5V
C17 C CP - B A 8 P 5 0 V C1 6 1 - 1 6 3 CCP- BBR1U 50 V
C18 CTM- BM 6 P C1 6 4 - 1 6 5 CCK- CD1 0U 25V
C19 CCP-BAR01U50V C166-169 C C P - B B R 1 USOV
C 20 -21 C C P - B B R 1 U 50 V C1 71 CCP-BA1000P50V
C22 - 2 5 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50 V C1 7 2 C C P - B B R 1 U 50 V
C26 - 2 9 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V C173 CCK-CD10U25V
C30 CMC - A P 1 0 0 0 P R 1 K C1 7 4 CCP-BBR1U50V
C32 CCP-BBR1U50V C175 CCP-BA1000P50V
C33 - 3 7 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50 V C176-179 CC P - B B R 1 U 5 0 V
C38 CMC - A P 1 0 0 0 P R 1 K C180 CCP-BA1000P50V
C40 - 4 2 CCP-BBR1U50V C181 CCK-CD33U10V
C43 CCK-CD10U25V C1 82 CCK-CD100U10V
C44 C C P - B B R 1 U 50 V C1 8 3 - 1 8 4 CC P - B B R 1 U 5 0 V
C45 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50 V C185 CCP-BA1000P50V
C48 CCP-BBR1U50V C1 8 6 C C P - B B R 1 USOV
C 49 CCK-CD10U25V C1 8 7 - 1 8 9 CCK- C D 4 7 0 U 1 0 V
C50 - 5 5 C C P - B B R 1 USOV C1 9 0 - 1 9 4 CCP-BBR1U50V
C56 - 5 9 CCP- BAR0 1 USOV C196 CCP-BA1000P50V
C60 - 6 5 CCP-BBR1U50V C1 9 7 - 2 0 1 C C P - B B R 1 USOV
C66 CC P - B A R 0 1 U 50 V C202"2 0 3 CCK-CD47U25V
C67 -68 C C P - B B R 1 USOV C204-205 CCK-CD10U25V
C6 9 - 7 3 CC P - B A R 0 1 U 50 V C2 0 6 - 2 0 9 C C P - B B R 1 U50V
C74 - 8 2 C C P - B B R1 U5 0 V C2 1 0 CFM-AH1U100V
C83 CMC-AP1000PR1K C 2 11 CCK-CD47U10V
C85 - 9 0 CC P - B A R 0 1 U 5 0 V C 2 12 CCP- BAR0 1USOV
C91 CMC-AP1000PR1K C213 CCP-BAR01U50V
C93 - 9 4 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V C214-216 CCP- BBR1 U 50V
C95 CCK- C D10U2 5 V C217-219 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50V
C96 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V Dl -10 SDS-1SS279
C97 CCP-BAR01U50V D12 - 3 5 SDS-1SS279
C98 CCP-BA8P50V D38 - 4 3 SDS-1SS270
C99 CTM- BM 6 P D46 SD2-M130
C 101- 1 0 5 C CP - B B R 1 U 5 0 V D 47 SD 2 - 2 - 1
C1 06 C CP - B A R 0 1 U 50 V D48 - 5 2 SDS-1SS270
C1 07 CC P - B A 8 P 5 0 V D53 SDS-LD1
C1 08 CTM- BM 6 P J1 J CR-AF050PX02
C110 C C P - B B R 1 U50V J2 J CP-BH002PX01
c m CCP - B A R0 1 U 50 V J3 JCP-AA012PX07

A - 13
 R4131 SERIES
B L R - 0 1 5 1 16 ( 2 / 5 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

J4 J CP-BHOIOPXO1 R4 RCP-AH22K
J5 JCR-AF010PX01 R5 RCP-AH470K
J6 JCP-BH003PX01 R6 DSP-000015
J7 -9 J . CF - A C0 0 1 J X 0 1 R7 RCP-AH100
K1 KRL-000874 R8 R C P - A H 68
LI LCL-C00554 RI O RCP-AH470
L2 LCL-C00490 R 11 RM F - A C 4 7 0 Q F J
L3 LCL-C00673 R 12 RCP-AH100
L4 LCL-C00490 R13 R C P - A H 15
L5 LCL-C00124 R14 RCP-AH33
L6 LCL-C00012 R15 RCP-AH22K
L7 LCL-C00010 R16 RCP - A H4 R7 K
L8 LCL-C00672 R17 R MF - A C 1 0 0 Q F J
L9 LCL-C00010 R18 RCP-AH560
L10 LCL-CQ0672 R19 RMF - A C1 K F J
L 11 LCL-C00012 R20 RCP - A H3 R9 K
L 12 -13 LCL-C00549 R 21 R CP - A H2 R2 K
L 14 -15 LCL-C00012 R2 2 RCP-AH18K
L 16 LC L - B 0 1 0 2 4 R 23 RC P - A H 1 5
L 18 LCL-B01024 R24 RC P - A H 3 3
L20 -22 LCL-C00012 R26 RCP - A H4 R7 K
L23 -24 LCL-C00549 R27 RCP- AH 22K
L25 -26 LC L - C 0 0 0 1 0 R28 RMF - A C 1 5 0 Q F J
L27 -28 LCL-C00672 R 29 RCP-AH560
L29 LCL-C00554 R30 RMF - A C1 K F J
L30 -32 LCL-C00012 R31 RCP - A H3 R9 K
L33 LCL-B01024 R 32 RCP- AH 2 R2K
L35 LCL-B01024 R33 RCP-AH18K
L39 -44 LCL-T 00084A R34 RCP-AH470
Q1 SFN-SST4859 R36 RCP-AH330
Q2 STN-2SC1815 R37 RMF- AC1K FJ
Q3 STN-2SC2712 R38 RCP-AH100
Q4 STN-2SC1815 R39 RCP-AH10K
Q5 -10 STN-2SC2712 R40 RCP-AH100
Q ll STN-2SC1815 R41 -42 RCP- AH 2 R2K
Q12 STN-2SC2712 R43 -44 RMF - A C2 R 2 K F J
Q13 STN-2SC1815 R45 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
Q14 STN-2SC2712 R46 RCP - A H3 R3 K
Q17 -27 STN-FN1A4P R47 RCP-AH750
Q30 ST P - 2 SA1162 R48 RCP- AH 2 20
Q31 -32 STP-2SA1015 R49 RC P - A H 5 6
Q33 STN-2SC1815 R50 -52 RCP-AH120
Q34 -35 S FN- S S T 4 3 9 3 R 53 RCP-AH390
Q36 -37 STN-2SC1983 R 54 DSP-000017
Q38 STN-FA1A4P R55 RCP-AH470
Q39 STP-2SA1162 R56 RCP-AH100
Q40 STN-2SC2712 R57 -58 RCP- AH 2 R 2K
Q41 STN-2SC1815 R59 -60 RMF - A C2 R 2 K F J
Q42 -44 STP-2 SA101 5 R61 RC P - A H 6 R 8 K
R1 RC P - A H 3 9 R62 RCP - A H3 R3 K
R2 RCP-AH56 R 63 RC P - A H 7 5 0
R3 ' RCP-AH10K R64 RCP-AH220

A - 14
 R4131 SERIES
BLR-01 5 1 1 6 ( 3 / 5 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

R65 RCP-AH56 R1 3 4 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R66 R C P- AH 5 6 0 R135 RCP - A H3 R3 K
R68 RCP-AH100 R1 3 6 RCP- AH1R 2 K
R69 RCP-AH150 R1 3 7 RC P - A H 6 8 0
R73 RC P - A H 3 3 R1 3 8 RCP- AH2 20
R74 RCP- AH 2 R2K R1 3 9 RCP-AH56
R76 RCP-AH1 K R1 4 0 RCP- AH 5 6 0
R77 RCP-AH470 R1 4 2 RC P - A H 1 0 0
R78 - 7 9 RMF - A C1 K F J R1 4 3 - 1 4 4 RCP - A H2 R2 K
R80 RMF - A C3 0 QF J R145-147 RMF - A C 2 R 2 K F J
R82 RMF - A C1 K F J R1 4 8 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R83 RM F - A C 4 9 9 Q F J R1 4 9 RCP - A H3 R3 K
R84 - 8 5 RCP - A H2 R2 K R1 5 0 R CP - A H1 R2 K
R 86 RCP-AH33 R1 51 RCP-AH680
R87 RCP - A H2 R2 K R15 2 RCP-AH220
R 88 R C P - A H 68 R1 5 3 RCP- AH 56
R90 RCP - A H1 K R15 4 R MF - A C 6 2 0 Q F J
R91 RCP-AH470 R15 5 DSP-000015
R92 RM F - A C I K F J R1 5 6 - 1 5 7 RCP-AH100
R93 - 9 4 RCP-AH10K R1 58 R C P - A H 15
R95 RCP - A H2 R7 K R1 59 RC P - A H 3 3
R96 R MF - A C 3 9 0 Q F J R1 6 0 RCP - A H4 R7 K
R97 RCP - A H4 R7 K R1 61 R MF - A C1 5 0 Q F J
R98 RM F - A C 2 2 0 Q F J R1 62 RCP-AH22K
R99 RCP - A H2 R2 K R1 6 3 R CP- AH 5 6 0
R 100 -101 RCP-AH10K R1 6 4 R MF - A C1 K FJ
R 102 R C P - A H2 R7 K R1 6 5 R CP - A H3 R3 K
R1 0 3 RM F - A C 1 8 0 Q F J R1 6 6 RCP - A H2 R2 K
R1 0 4 RCP-AH1R5K R1 6 7 RCP-AH18K
Rlt)5 R MF - A C2 7 0 Q FJ R1 6 8 RCP - A H2 R2 K
R1 0 6 RCP- AH 2R2K R1 6 9 RCP- AH 2 20K
R107-108 RCP-AH10K R170 R C P - A H 15
R1 0 9 RCP - A H2 R7 K R171 RC P - A H 3 3
R 110 RMF - A C8 2 QF J R1 7 3 RCP - A H4 R7 K
R ill RCP-AH910 R1 74 RMF - A C1 5 0 Q F J
R 112 RM F - A C 3 0 1 Q F J R1 75 RC P - A H 2 2 K
R1 1 3 RC P - A H 2 R 2 K R1 7 6 RCP-AH560
R114-115 RCP-AH10K R1 7 7 RM F - A C 1 K F J
R1 1 6 RCP-AH2R7K R1 7 8 RCP - A H3 R3 K
R1 1 7 RM F - A C 5 1 Q F J R1 7 9 RCP - A H2 R2 K
R1 1 8 RCP-AH270 R1 8 0 RCP-AH18K
R1 1 9 RMF-AC390QFJ R1 81 RCP - A H2 R2 K
R1 2 0 RCP-AH2R2K R1 82 RCP- AH 2 20K
R 121 RCP-AH33 R18 3 RCP-AH680
R 122 RCP - A H2 R2 K R18 5 RCP - A H 4 7 0
R1 2 4 RCP - A H1 K R1 8 6 R MF - A C6 8 0 Q F J
R12 5 RCP-AH470 R1 8 7 RCP- AH 2 20
R1 2 6 R CP - A H 8 2 0 R1 8 8 RCP-AH390
R1 2 7 RCP-AH10K R1 8 9 RCP-AH470
R1 2 8 RCP-AH100 R190 RM F - A C 4 7 0 Q F J
R129-130 RCP - A H2 R2 K R1 9 1 - 1 9 2 RCP-AH10K
R1 3 1 - 1 3 3 RM F- AC 2R2K F J R1 9 3 RCP- AH 56

A - 15
 R4131 SERIES
B L R - 0 1 5 1 16 ( 4 / 5 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

R196-203 RCP-AH47K R 2 86 RMF - A C8 R 2 K F J

R204-205 RCP-AH10K R2 8 8 RM F - A C 6 R 2 K F J
R206-211 RCP - A H 4 7 K R2 9 0 RCP-AH10K
R 21 2 RCP- AH150 R 2 91 R CP- AH 2 20
R2 1 3 RC P - A H 6 2 K R 2 92 R CP- AH I K
R2 1 4 - 2 1 9 R CP- AH 2 20 R2 9 3 RCP-AH100
R 2 20 RC P - A H 1 R 5 K R2 9 4 RCP- AH 2 7 0
R2 2 1 RC P - A H 4 7 K R 29 5 - 2 9 8 RCP-AH100
R222 RCP-AH51 R2 9 9 R C P - A H4 R7 K
R 2 2 3 - 2 24 RCP-AH39 R3 0 0 RCP- AH I K
R 2 2 7 - 2 29 RC P - A H 1 0 K R301 RMF- BJ 3 0 K F J
R2 3 0 RCP - A H3 R3 K R302 RMF-BJ15KFJ
R231 RMF - A C 4 R 7 K F J R303-304 RMF- BJ 7 R5 KF J
R2 3 3 R MF - A C8 R 2 K F J R305 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R 2 34 RM F - A C 5 1 0 Q F J R3 0 6 RMF-BJ1KFJ
R2 3 5 - 2 3 7 RCP-AH10K R3 0 7 RMF-BJ110QFJ
R2 3 8 R CP - A H 3 R 3 K R3 0 9 RMF-BJ10K FJ
R2 3 9 RMF- BJ 8 R 2 K F J R3 1 0 RMF-BJ220QFJ
R2 4 1 RMF- BJ 6 R 8 KFJ R311 RMF- BJ 2 R7K F J
R242-243 RMF-BJ10KFJ R312 RMF- BJ 7 R5 KF J
R2 4 4 RC P - A H 1 0 K R3 1 3 RMF-BJ15KFJ
R245 R CP - A H 3 R 3 K R314 RMF- BJ 7 R5 KF J
R246-247 RMF-BJ33KFJ R315 RMF-BJ11KFJ
R248-249 RCP-AH47K R3 1 6 RMF- BJ 56QFJ
R2 5 0 RCP-AH18K R3 1 8 RMF-BJ4R7KFJ
R251 RC P - A H 5 R 1K R3 2 0 RMF-BJ3KFJ
R252 RCP-AH10K R321 RCP-AH100K
R 2 54 RCP - A H3 R3 K R322 RMF- BJ 5 R1 KFJ
R2 5 5 RCP-AH15K R3 2 3 R C P - A H 1 R5K
R 2 56 RCP-AH10K R324-332 R CP- AH2 20
R 2 58 RMF- BJ 5 R1 KFJ R333-335 R MF - A S 3 3 0 Q F K
R 2 59 RMF-BJ10KFJ R3 3 6 RMF- BJ 2 0 K F J
R2 6 0 R M F - B J 6 8 K FJ R3 3 7 R M F - B J 1 0 K FJ
R2 6 2 RCP-AH820K R338-340 RC P - A H 6 8 0
R 2 63 RCP- AH1M R341 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R2 6 4 RMF - BJ 5 R6 KFJ R342 RMF-BJ12KFJ
R2 6 5 R M F - B J 1 0 0 Q FJ R3 4 3 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R 2 66 RCP-AH10K R3 4 4 RMF-BJ12KFJ
R2 6 7 R C P - A H 1 2K R345 RC P - A H 1 2 K
R2 6 8 RCP - A H1 K R3 4 6 RCP - A H3 R3 K
R271 RMF-BJ11KFJ R3 4 7 RMF-BJ18KFJ
R272 RMF- BJ 56QF J R3 4 8 RMF-BJ12KFJ
R 2 73 RMF-BJ10KFJ R3 4 9 RMF-BJ18KFJ
R2 7 4 R MF - A C 1 0 K F J R 3 50 RMF- BJ 7 R5 KF J
R275 RMF - A C7 R5 K FJ R351 RMF-BJ51KFJ
R2 7 6 RMF- BJ 3 3 0 K F J R352 RMF-BJ15KFJ
R2 7 7 RMF-BJ1KFJ R3 5 3 RMF- BJ 7 R5 KF J
R2 7 8 RMF - BJ 30K FJ R3 5 4 RMF- BJ 7 R5 KF J
R2 7 9 R M F - B J 1 KFJ R3 5 6 RCP - A H3 R3 K
R280-283 RMF - BJ 5 R1 KFJ U1 -2 SH B - 0 0 1 6 5 5
R2 8 4 R C P - A H 220 U3 -4 S HB - 0 0 1 6 5 8
R285 RCP - A H1 K U5 SHB-001656

A - 16
 R4131 SERIES
BLR-01 5 116 ( 5 /5 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

U6 -7 SHB-001657
U8 SHB-001544
U9 -10 SHB-001543
U ll SHB-001544
U12 -14 SHB-001655
U15 SHB-001656
U16 -17 SHB-001657
U18 SHB-001655
U19 -20 SHB-001658
U21 SHB-001655
U 22 SHB-001656
U23 SHB-001543
U24 SHB-001544
U 25 SHB-001543
U26 SHB-001544
U29 -32 SIM-74HC138
U33 SIM-74HC273
U34 SIM-74HC174
U35 SIM-74HC 273
U36 -37 S I M - 7 4 H C 174
U38 -40 SIM-74HC74
U41 SIM-74HC4538
U42 SIM-74HC04
U43 -45 SIT -7 4L S 0 6
U46 SIA-4558
U47 SIA-324
U48 SIM-74HC273
U 51 SIA-0P77P
U 52 S1A - T L 0 8 2
U53 -54 SIA-4558
U55 SIA-393
U56 -58 SIA-DA7524-4
U59 -62 S I A- DG 201
U63 -65 SIA-0P77P
U 66 SIA-TL072
U67 SIA-811
U 68 SIA-811
U69 SIA-TL072
U70 SIA-812
U71 S I A - 4 5 58
U72 SIA-398
U73 S I A- DG 201
U74 SIA-4558
U75 SIA-4558
U76 SIA-811
XI -4 DXD-001059

A - 17
 R4131 SERIES
B L R -0 15117X01 (1 /4 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Cl -4 CCP-BAR01U50V C104-10 5 CCK - C D1 0 U2 5V

C5 -7 C C P - B B R 1 U 50V C106-107 CCP-BBR1U50V
C8 -11 CC P - B A R 0 1 U 50 V C1 0 8 CCP - B A 3 3 P 5 0 V
C12 CMC-AP330PR5K C1 0 9 CFM-AS1000P50V
C13 - 1 5 CCP-BAR01U50V C110-111 CCK-CD10U25V
C16 CMC-AP470PR3K C l l 2-115 CCP-BBR1U50V
C17 - 2 4 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50V C1 1 6 CCP-BA33P50V
C27 - 2 8 CCP-BBR1U50V C1 1 7 C FM- AS 2 2 0 0 P S 0 V
C29 C C P - B A 1 5 P50V C118-119 CCK-CD10U25V
C30 C C P - B B R 1 U 50 V C120-121 C CP- BBR1 U 50 V
C31 - 3 2 CC P - B A R0 1 U 50 V C122-123 CCP-BA1000P50V
C33 - 3 7 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V C124-125 CCP- BBR1USOV
C38 CTA-AC10U16V Cl 2 6 - 1 2 7 CCP-BA1000PS0V
C39 CTA-AC1U35V C128-129 CCP-BBR1U50V
C40 C F M- AS R0 1 U 50V C1 3 0 CC P - B A 1 0 0 P 5 0 V
C41 C MC - A P 1 0 0 P R 5 K C1 31 CC K - C D 1 0 U 2 5 V
C42 CCP-BA330P50V C1 3 2 CCP-BA47P50V
C43 CFM-AHR47U100V C1 3 3 CCK - C D2 2 U2 5V
C44 - 4 5 CCP-BBR1U50V C134-136 C CP- BBR1 U 50 V
C46 - 4 7 CTA-AC10U16V C141-148 CCK-CD47U25V
C48 - 4 9 CCP-BAR01U50V C1 4 9 - 1 5 0 CCK-CD47U10V
C50 - 5 5 CC P - B B R 1 U 5 0 V C151-192 C C P - B B R 1 USOV
C 56 C C P - B A R 0 1 U 50 V Dl -2 SDS-1SS270
C 57 C C P - B A 1 5 P50V D3 -4 SDS-1SS286
C 61 CCK - C D2 2 U16V D5 -9 SDS-1SS270
C62 CCP-BBR1U50V DI O SDS- 1S S286
C63 C FM- AH 1 U 100 V D ll SDS-LD1
C64 -66 C C P - B B R 1 U 50 V D12 - 1 7 SDS-1SS270
C67 CCP- BAR0 1 USOV D 20 SDZ-M030
C 68 C F M- AS R0 2 2 USOV D 21 - 2 3 SDS-LD1
C69 CCP-BBR1U50V D 24 - 3 4 SDS-1SS270
C70 CCP-BA1000P50V D35 SDZ-M051
C71 - 7 2 C CP- BBR1USOV D36 - 3 9 SDS-1SS270
C73 CCK-CD2R2U50V D41 - 4 5 SDS-1SS270
C74 - 7 5 C CK- CD 2 20U 2 5V D47 SDS-LD1
C76 C C P - B B R 1 USOV D48 - 5 0 SDS-1SS270
C77 CCK-CD10U2 5V D5 2 SDS-LD1
C78 CCP-BBR1U50V D 53 - 5 6 SDS-1SS270
C79 CCK-CD10U16V D 59 - 6 0 SD Z - M 0 5 1
C80 - 8 1 C C P - B B R 1 USOV D 61 - 6 2 SDS-1SS286
C8 2 CCP-BA1000P50V J1 J CR-AF050PX02
C83 CCP - B A 2 2 0 P 5 0 V J2 J CP-BH002PX02
C84 CCP-BA1000P50V J3 J CP-BH010PX02
C85 -86 CCP-BBR1U50V J4 JCF-AC001JX01
C91 - 9 5 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V L2 -4 LCL-T 00084A
C96 CC P - B A 4 7 P 5 0 V L5 -6 LCL-C00014
C 97 CCK - C D 2 2 U 2 5V Q1 STN-2SC2757
C98 CC P - B B R 1 U 5 0 V Q2 -5 STN-2SC2712
C99 C C P - B A 3 3 0 P 50 V Q6 STN-2SC2757
C100-101 C C P - B B R 1 U 50 V Q7 -8 STP-2SA1462
C 102 CCP-BA33P50V Q9 STN-FA1A4P
C1 0 3 CFM-AS1000P50V Q 10 -11 STN-2SC2757

A - 18
 R4131 SERIES
B L R - 0 1 5 1 17 X0 1 ( 2 / 4 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Q12 SFN-SST4859 R 47 RCP-AH470

Q13 -14 STN-2SC2712 R48 RC P - A H 1 R 2 K
Q15 SFN-SST4393 R49 R CP - A H 2 2 K
Q16 STP-2SA1162 R50 - 5 1 RCP - A H1 R2 K
Q17 STN-2SC2712 R5 2 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
Q19 STN-2SC2712 R 53 RCP - A H3 R3 K
Q20 STP- 2 SA1162 R54 RCP- AH1R 5 K
Q21 SFN-SST4393 R 55 RCP-AH10K
Q22 STN-2SC2712 R 56 RCP-AH180K
Q23 STP-2SA1162 R 58 RMF-BJ1R5KFJ
Q24 SFN-SST4393 R59 - 6 0 RMF-BJ10KFJ
Q25 -31 STN-2SC2712 R61 RMF-BJ3R3KFJ
Q32 STP-2SA1162 R62 RCP-AH100K
Q35 STN-2SC2712 R63 RMF- BJ 3 9 K F J
Q36 STP-2SA1162 R64 RMF- BJ 3 3 K F J
Q39 STP-2SA1162 R 66 RMF-BJ100KFJ
Q40 STN-2SC2712 R67 RM F- AC 2 0 0 K F J
Q41 STP-2SA1162 R 68 RMF-BJ1R2KFJ
Q44 -45 STN-2SC2712 R70 RMF- BJ 3 R9 KF J
Q46 STP-2SA1162 R71 RCP- AH1 K
Q49 STN-2SC2712 R73 R MF - A C 2 R 4 9 K F J
R1 RC P - A H 8 2 R74 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R2 RCP-AH10K R75 RMF-BJ1R5KFJ
R3 RCP-AH15K R76 - 8 1 RC P - A H 1 0 K
R4 RCP-AH150 R82 RCP- AH1 K
R5 RC P- A H1 R 5 K R83 RCP - A H 1 M
R6 RCP-AH82 R84 RCP-AH220K
R7 RMF - A C6 R 2 K F J R85 RCP-AH820K
R8 -16 RCP- AH 18 R86 RC P - A H 6 8 0 K
R17 RCP-AH10K R87 RCP - A H2 R2 K
R18 RCP-AH820 R88 RCP-AH680
R19 RC P - A H 1 5 0 R89 RCP-AH100K
R 20 -21 RCP-AH15K R90 R C P - A H 1 5K
R2 2 RCP - A H2 R2 K R91 - 9 2 RCP- AH 27K
R 23 -24 RC P - A H 5 1 R93 RCP-AH15K
R25 RCP - A H2 R2 K R94 RCP-AH100K
R26 -27 R C P - A H 15 K R95 R CP - A H 3 3 0
R28 RCP-AH12K R97 RC P - A H 1 0 0 K
R 29 RCP-AH10K R98 RCP-AH330
R30 RC P - A H 8 2 R99 - 1 0 0 RMF - A C2 K FJ
R31 -32 RCP-AHIK R 101 RMF- BJ 6 R8 KFJ
R33 RCP-AH47K R1 0 3 R EE- AR 5 1 0 - 1
R34 RCP-AH12K R1 0 4 RC P - A H 3 R 9 K
R35 RC P - A H 3 9 0 R1 05 RCP-AH15K
R36 RC P - A H I K R1 0 6 RMF-BJ15KFJ
R37 RCP-AH150 R1 0 7 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R 39 RC P - A H 8 2 R1 0 8 RMF- BJ 2 0KF J
R41 RCP-AH390 R 110 RMF- BJ 6 8 KF J
R42 RCP-AH47K R ill RCP-AH15K
R43 R C P - A H 18 R 112 RCP- AH1M
R44 RCP-AH10K R1 1 3 RCP - A H1 K
R45 -46 RC P - A H 5 R 6 K R1 14 R CP - A H 1 0 0

A - 19
 R4131 SERIES
B L R - 0 1 5 1 17X01 (3 /4 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

R11 5 RCP- AH 2 R2K R1 8 8 RCP - A H 4 R 7 K

R1 1 6 RCP-AH47K R1 8 9 RCP-AH15K
R1 1 7 RC P - A H 1 0 K R1 9 0 RCP-AH1 K
R1 1 8 RCP-AH220 R1 91 RC P - A H 1 8 0 K
•R119 RCP- AH1M R19 2 RCP - A H 1 K
R 120-121 RCP-AH10K R1 9 3 - 1 9 6 RMF- BJ 2 2 K F J
R122 RCP - A H1 K R1 9 7 - 1 9 9 RCP - A H4 R7 K
R1 2 3 RC P - A H 1 5 0 R2 0 0 RCP-AH470
R124-127 RCP-AH680 R2 0 1 - 2 0 2 RCP-AH10K
R1 2 8 RCP - A H1 K R2 0 3 R CP - A H 4 R 7 K
R131 RCP-AH47K R205 RCP-AH47K
R132 RCP-AH10K R2 0 6 RCP-AH39K
R1 3 3 RCP-AH3R9K R2 0 7 - 2 1 8 RCP - A H 4 7 K
R1 3 4 - 1 3 5 RC P - A H 3 R 3 K R 2 32 RMF- BJ 4 R7 KF J
R1 3 6 - 1 3 7 RCP-AH10K R2 3 4 R C P - A H 1 R8 K
R1 3 8 RCP-AH100K R2 3 5 RCP - A H4 R7 K
R1 3 9 - 1 4 0 RCP- AH1M R236 RCP - A H2 2
R141 RCP-AH200K R237-238 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R1 4 2 - 1 4 3 RCP- AH1M R2 3 9 RCP-AH10K
R1 4 4 RCP- AH 2 0 0 K R2 4 0 RCP-AHIK
R145 RCB - A K 1 0 M R242 R CP - A H 2 R 2 K
R1 4 6 - 1 4 7 RCP-AH27K R2 4 3 RCP-AH100
R1 4 9 - 1 5 0 RCP - AH1 0K R2 4 4 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R151 RCP-AH270K R 2 45 R CP - A H 1 5 0
R152 RCP-AH47K R246 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R1 5 3 - 1 5 6 RCP-AH10K R247 RCP-AH150
R1 5 7 RCP-AH330 R2 4 8 - 2 4 9 RCP-AH33
R1 5 8 R CP - A H1 K R 2 50 RCP- AH1 K
R1 59 RCP-AH220 R251-252 RCP-AH180
R1 6 0 R C P - A H 15 K R 2 53 RCP-AH82K
R1 6 1 RCP-AH10K R254-255 R CP - A H 2 R 2 K
R1 6 2 RMF- BJ 10K FJ R 2 56 RCP - A H4 R7 K
R1 6 3 RMF-BJ12KFJ R2 5 7 RCP-AHIK
R1 6 4 RMF - BJ 5 R6 KFJ R 2 59 RCP - A H 2 R 2 K
R165 RMF - BJ 2 R2 KFJ R2 6 0 RCP-AH100
R1 6 6 R CP- AH1M R261 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R1 6 7 RCP-AH180K R262 RCP-AH150
R1 6 8 RCP- AH 2 20K R2 6 3 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R1 6 9 RCP-AH270K R2 6 4 RCP-AH150
R170-171 RC P - A H 15 K R265-266 RC P - A H 3 3
R1 72 RCP-AH100K R2 6 7 - 2 6 8 RCP-AH180
R1 7 3 R CP - A H 3 R 9 K R2 6 9 RCP-AH100K
R174-175 RC P - A H 1 0 0 K R2 7 0 RCP - A H3 R3 K
R1 7 6 RCP-AH47K R2 7 1 RCP- AH2R 2 K
R1 7 7 R CP - A H 1 0 0 K R 2 72 R CP - A H4 R7 K
R1 7 8 RMF-BJ10KFJ R2 7 3 RCP- AH1 K
R1 7 9 RC P - A H 4 7 K R 2 74 RCP-AH100
R1 8 0 RCP-AH10K R2 7 6 R C P - A H 100
R181 RC P - A H 1 8 0 R2 7 8 RC P - A H 2 R 2 K
R182-184 RCP-AH47K R2 7 9 RCP-AH100
R1 8 5 RC P - A H 1 0 0 R2 8 0 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R1 8 6 - 1 8 7 RCP-AH47K R 2 81 RCP- AH 1 5 0

A - 20
 R4131 SERIES
BLR-015117X01 (4/4)

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

R282 R C P - A H 6 R8 K U58 -60 SIA-2525D

R2 8 3 RCP-AH150 U61 -62 SIA-393
R284-285 RCP-AH33 U63 -64 SIA-311N
R2 8 6 RCP - A H1 K U65 -66 SIM-74HC74
R2 8 7 - 2 8 8 RCP-AH180 U67 SIM-74HC4538
R2 8 9 RCP-AH100K U68 SIM-74HC139
R2 9 0 RCP - A H3 R3 K U69 S I M - 7 4 H C 157
R291 RCP - A H8 R2 K U 70 SIR-74HC00
R 2 92 RC P - A H 4 R 7 K U71 SIM-74HC08
R2 9 3 - 2 9 4 RCP-AH10K U72 SIA-6012
R2 9 5 RC P - A H 3 R 3 K U73 SIA-311N
R2 9 7 RC P - A H 4 R 7 K U74 SIM-74C905
R298-300 RCP-AH10K U75 SIM-74HC08
R301 RC P - A H 3 R 3 K U76 SIM-74HC30
R3 0 3 RCP - A H4 R7 K U77 SIM-74HC574
R3 0 4 RCP-AH15K U78 SIM-74HC107
R305-306 RMF-BJ10KFJ U79 SIM-74HC175
R3 0 7 RC P - A H 2 2 U80 SIM-74HC74
R3 0 9 RM F - A C 1 6 K F J U81 SIM-74HC04
R311 RMF-BJ1R2KFJ U82 SIM-74HC02
R312-313 RCP- AH1 K U83 SIM-74HC00
U1 -9 SHB-001464 U84 SIA-DG201
U ll SIA-TL072
U13 - 1 6 SIA-TL072
U17 SIA-HA1127
U18 SIA-4558
U19 SIA-4066
U 21 -22 SIA-TL082
U23 SIA-4558
U 24 SIA-393
U2 5 SIM-74HC4538
U 26 SIM-74HC03
U27 SIM-74HCOO
U 28 SIM-74HC74
U29 SI A-4066
U31 - 3 3 S I M - 7 4 H C 138
U34 - 3 7 S I M - 7 4 H C 174
U38 SIT-DN8650
U39 - 4 0 SIT-74LS 06
U41 - 4 2 SIM-74HC74
U45 SIA-6012
U46 SIA-REF01D
U47 SIA-311N
U48 SIM-74HC107
U49 SIM-74HC175
U 50 - 5 1 S I M - 7 4 H C3 9 3
U 52 SIM-74HC574
U53 SIM-74HC74
U54 S I M - 7 4 H C 12 5
U5 5 SIM-74HC02
U5 6 SIM-74HC32
U 57 SIM-74HC04

A - 21
 R4131 SERIES
B LR -0 15117X02 (1 /4 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Cl -4 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50 V C1 0 3 CFM-AS1000P50V
C5 -7 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V C1 0 4 - 1 0 5 CCK-CD10U25V
C8 -11 CCP-BAR01U50V C1 1 2 - 1 1 3 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V
C 12 CMC-AP330PR5K C1 3 0 CCP-BA100P50V
C13 - 1 5 CC P - B AR 0 1 US OV C1 31 C CK - C D 1 0 U 2 5 V
C16 CMC-AP470PR3K C1 32 CCP-BA47P50V
C17 - 2 4 CCP-BAR01U50V C133 CCK-CD22U25V
C2 5 - 2 6 CMC- AP2 2 PR 5 K C1 3 4 - 1 3 6 CCP-BBR1U50V
C 27 - 2 8 CCP-BBR1U50V C141-148 C CK - C D 4 7 U 2 5 V
C29 CCP-BA15P50V C 1 4 9 - 1 50 CC K - C D 4 7 U 1 0 V
C30 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V C1 5 1 - 1 9 3 CC P - B B R 1 U 5 0 V
C31 - 3 2 CCP-BAR01U50V C1 9 4 CFM-AS2200P50V
C33 - 3 7 CCP-BBR1U50V Dl -2 SDS-1SS270
C 38 CFM-ASR022U50V D3 -4 SDS-1SS286
C39 CFM-AS2200P50V D5 -9 SDS-1SS270
C40 CMC - A P 8 2 0 P R 3 K DI O SDS-1SS286
C41 CMC- AP2 20PR 5 K D ll SDS-LD1
C42 CCP-BA330P50V D12 - 1 3 SDS-1SS270
C43 C FM- AH R 4 7 U 1 0 0 V D l5 -17 SDS-1SS270
C44 - 4 5 C C P - B B R 1 USOV D 20 SD2-M030
C46 - 4 7 CTA-AC10U16V D 21 - 2 3 SDS-LD1
C48 - 4 9 CCP-BAR01U50V D24 - 3 4 S D S - l S S2 7 0
C50 - 5 5 CCP-BBR1U50V D35 SDZ-M051
C 56 CCP-BAR01U50V D36 - 3 9 SDS-1SS270
C 57 CCP-BA15P50V D41 - 4 5 SDS-1SS270
C61 CCK-CD22U16V D47 SDS-LD1
C62 CCP-BBR1U50V D60 SDZ-M051
C63 CFM-AH1U100V D61 - 6 2 SDS-1SS286
C64 -66 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V J1 J C R- A F 0 5 0 P X 0 2
C67 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50V J2 J CP-BH002PX02
C68 CFM-ASR022U50V J3 JCP-BH010PX02
C69 CCP-BBR1U50V J4 J C F - A C 0 0 1 J X01
C7 0 CCP-BA1000P50V L2 -4 LCL-T 00084A
C71 - 7 2 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V L5 -6 LCL-C00014
C73 CCK-CD2R2U50V Q1 STN-2SC2757
C74 - 7 5 CCK- C D220U 2 5V Q2 -5 STN-2SC2712
C76 CCP-BBR1U50V Q6 STN-2SC2757
C77 CCK- C D1 0 U 2 5 V Q7 -8 STP- 2 SA1462
C78 CCP-BBR1U50V Q9 STN-FA1A4P
C79 CCK-CD10U16V Q10 - 1 1 STN-2SC2757
C80 - 8 1 C C P - B B R 1 USOV Q12 S FN-SST4859
C82 CCP-BA1000P50V Q13 - 1 4 STN-2SC2712
C83 CCP-BA220P50V Q15 S FN- S S T 4 3 9 3
C 84 CCP-BA1000P50V Q16 STP-2SA1162
C85 -86 CC P - B B R 1 U 50V Q17 STN-2SC2712
C91 - 9 5 C C P - B B R 1 U 50V Q19 STN-2SC2712
C96 CCP-BA47P50V Q20 STP-2SA1162
C97 CCK-CD22U25V Q21 SFN - S S T 4 39 3
C98 CCP- BBR1 U 50 V Q 22 STN-2SC2712
C99 CC P - B A 3 3 0 P 5 0 V Q23 S T P - 2 S A 1 162
C I O C - 1 01 C CP - B B R 1 U 5 0 V Q2 4 S FN - S S T 4 3 9 3
C 102 CCP-BA33P50V Q25 - 3 1 STN-2SC2712

A - 22
 R4131 SERIES
B L R -0 15117X02 (2 /4 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Q32 S T P - 2 S A 1 162 R 66 RMF-BJ100KFJ

Q33 SFN-SST4859 R67 RMF-AC200KFJ
Q35 STN-2SC2712 R 68 RMF-BJ1R2KFJ
Q36 ST P- 2 S A1 162 R70 RMF- BJ 3R9K FJ
Q38 SFT-SST406S R 71 RCP-AHIK
Q39 STP-2SA1162 R73 R MF - A C 2 R 4 9 K F J
R1 RC P - A H 8 2 R74 R M F - B J 1 0 K FJ
R2 RCP-AH10K R75 RMF-BJ680KFJ
R3 R C P - A H 15 K R76 - 8 1 RCP-AH10K
R4 RCP-AH150 R82 RCP-AHIK
R5 RCP - A H1 R5 K R83 RCP- AH1M
R6 RCP-AH82 R84 RC P - A H 2 2 0 K
R7 RM F - A C 6 R 2 K F J R85 RCP-AH820K
R8 -16 RC P - A H 18 R 86 RCP - A H 6 8 0 K
R17 RCP-AH10K R87 RCP- AH 2 R 2K
R18 RCP-AH820 R 88 RCP-AH680
R19 RCP-AH150 R89 RCP-AH100K
R 20 -21 RCP-AH15K R90 RCP-AH15K
R2 2 RCP- AH2 R 2 K R91 - 9 2 RCP-AH27K
R 23 -24 RCP-AH51 R93 R C P - A H 1 5K
R25 RCP-AH2R2K R94 RC P - A H 1 0 0 K
R26 -27 RCP-AH15K R9 5 RCP-AH330
R28 RCP-AH12K R97 RCP-AH100K
R29 RCP-AH10K R98 RCP-AH330
R30 RC P - A H 8 2 R99 - 1 0 0 RMF - A C2 K F J
R31 -32 RC P - A H I K R101 RMF- BJ 6 R 8 KFJ
R33 RCP-AH47K R1 0 3 REE-AR510-1
R34 RC P - A H 1 2 K R1 0 4 RCP - A H3 R9 K
R35 RCP-AH390 R1 05 RCP-AH15K
R36 R CP - A H1 K R1 0 6 R M F - B J 15 K F J
R37 R C P - A H 1 50 R10 7 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R39 RCP-AH82 R1 0 8 RMF- BJ 2 0 K F J
R41 RCP-AH390 R 110 RMF- BJ 6 8 KFJ
R42 RCP-AH47K R ill RCP-AH15K
R43 R C P - A H 18 R 112 RCP- AH1M
R44 RCP-AH10K R1 1 3 RCP-AHIK
R45 -46 RCP- AH 5R6K R1 1 4 RCP-AH100
R47 RCP-AH470 R1 1 5 RCP - A H2 R2 K
R48 RCP - A H1 R2 K R1 1 6 RCP-AH47K
R49 RCP-AH22K R1 1 7 RC P - A H 1 0 K
R 50 -51 RCP - A H1 R2 K R1 1 8 RCP- AH2 20
R5 2 R C P - A H 6 R8 K R1 1 9 RC P- AH1M
R5 3 RCP - A H3 R3 K R 120-121 RCP-AH10K
R 54 RCP-AH1R5K R 122 RCP- AH1 K
R55 RC P - A H 1 0 K R1 2 3 RCP-AH150
R56 RCP-AH180K
R 58 RMF-BJ1R5KFJ
R5 9 -60 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R 61 RMF - BJ 3 R3 KF J
R62 RCP-AH100K
R63 RMF - BJ 39K FJ
R64 RMF- BJ 3 3 K F J

A - 23
 R4131 SERIES
B LR -015117X02 (3 /4 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

R1 2 4 - 1 2 7 RCP-AH680 R1 9 7 - 1 9 9 RCP - A H4 R7 K
R 12 8 RCP - A H1 K R2 0 0 R CP - A H 4 7 0
R1 2 9 RCP-AH100K R201-202 RCP-AH10K
R1 3 0 RMF- BJ 6 8 0 Q F J R2 0 3 RCP - A H4 R7 K
R131 RCP-AH47K R 20 5 RCP-AH47K
R132 R C P - A H 1 OK R2 0 6 RCP-AH39K
R1 3 3 RCP - A H3 R9 K R2 0 7 - 2 1 1 RCP-AH47K
R1 3 4 - 1 3 5 RCP - A H3 R3 K R2 1 3 - 2 1 8 RCP-AH47K
R1 3 6 - 1 3 7 RCP-AH10K R232 RMF- BJ 4 R7 KF J
R1 3 8 RCP-AH100K R2 3 4 RCP - A H1 R8 K
R1 3 9 - 1 4 0 RCP- AH1M R 23 5 R C P - A H4 R7 K
R141 RCP-AH200K R2 3 6 RC P - A H 2 2
R1 4 2 - 1 4 3 RCP- AH1M R2 3 7 - 2 3 8 RMF-BJ10KFJ
R1 4 4 RCP-AH200K R2 3 9 RCP-AH10K
R1 4 5 RCB - A K 1 0 M R2 4 0 RCP- AH1 K
R1 4 6 - 1 4 7 R CP - A H 2 7 K R242 RCP- AH 2 R 2 K
R149-150 RC P - A H 1 0 K R2 4 3 RCP-AH100
R1 51 RC P - A H 2 7 0 K R2 4 4 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R15 2 RC P - A H 4 7 K R245 RCP-AH150
R1 5 3 - 1 5 6 R CP - A H 1 0 K R2 4 6 R C P - A H 6 R8 K
R1 5 7 RCP-AH330 R2 4 7 R C P - A H 1 50
R1 5 8 RCP-AHIK R248-249 RCP-AH33
R159 RCP-AH220 R 2 50 RCP - A H1 K
R1 6 0 RCP-AH15K R251-252 RCP - A H 1 8 0
R1 61 RCP-AH10K R2 5 3 RC P - A H 8 2 K
R16 2 RMF-BJ10KFJ R 2 54 RCP - A H2 R2 K
R1 6 3 RMF-BJ12KFJ R255 RC P - A H I K
R1 6 4 RMF- BJ 5 R6 KFJ R 2 56 RCP - A H4 R7 K
R165 RMF- BJ 2 R2 KFJ R3 0 4 R C P - A H1 5 K
R1 6 6 RCP- AH1M R305-306 RMF-BJ10K FJ
R1 6 7 RCP-AH180K R307 RCP-AH22
R1 6 8 RCP-AH220K R309 R MF - A C 1 6 K F J
R1 6 9 RCP-AH270K R311 RMF-BJ1R2KFJ
R170-171 RCP-AH15K R312-313 RCP-AHIK
R1 7 2 RCP-AH100K R3 1 4 RMF-BJ3KFJ
R1 7 3 R CP - A H 3 R 9 K R315 RMF- BJ 2KFJ
R174-175 RCP-AH100K R3 1 8 R CP- AH 22
R1 7 6 RCP-AH47K U1 -9 SHB-001464
R1 7 7 RCP-AH100K U10 SIA-318C
R1 7 8 RMF-BJ10KFJ U ll SIA-TL072
R1 7 9 RCP-AH47K U 12 SIA-318C
R1 8 0 R C P - A H 10 K
U13 - 1 6 SIA-TL072
R1 81 RCP-AH180
U17 S I A - H A 1 127
R182-184 RCP-AH47K U 18 SIA-4558
R18 5 RCP-AH100 U19 SIA-4066
R186-187 RCP-AH47K U 20 SIA-4558
R1 8 8 R CP - A H 4 R 7 K
U 21 -22 SIA-TL082
R1 8 9 R C P - A H 15 K U23 SIA-4558
R1 9 0 RC P - A H 1 K U24 SIA-393
R191 RCP-AH180K
U25 SIM-74HC4538
R1 9 2 R CP - A H1 K
U26 SIM-74HC03
R1 9 3 - 1 9 6 RMF- BJ 2 2 K F J
U 27 SIM-74HC00

A - 24
 R4131 SERIES
B LR -015117X02 (4 /4 )

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

U2 8 SIM-74HC74
U29 SIA-4066
U31 -33 SIM-74HC138
U34 S I M - 7 4 H C 174
U35 S IM-74HC 273
U36 -37 S I M - 7 4 H C 174
U38 SIT-DN8650
U39 -40 SIT-74LS06
U41 -42 SIM-74HC74
U45 SIA-6012
U46 SIA-REF01D
U47 SIA-311N
U48 SIM-74HC107
U49 SIM-74HC175
U 50 -51 SIM-74HC393
U5 2 SIM-74HC574
U 53 SIM-74HC74
U 54 SIM-74HC125
U5 6 SIM-74HC32
U57 SIM-74HC04
U 58 SIA-2525D
U 61 SIA-393
U 66 SIM-74HC74
U67 SIM-74HC4538
U71 SIM-74HC08
U72 SIA-6012
U73 SIA-311N
U74 SIM-74C905
U75 SIM-74HC08
U76 SIM-74HC30
U77 SIM-74HC574
U78 S I M - 7 4 H C 107
U79 SIM-74HC175
U80 SIM-74HC74
U81 SIM-74HC04
U82 SIM-74HC02
U83 SIM-74HC00
U85 S I A - D G 2 01
U 88 SIM-74HC32
U89 SIA-398

A - 25
 R4131 SERIES
BLC-015115

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Dl N L D - 0 0 0 1 11
D2 -11 NL D - 0 0 0 0 1 0
D 12 N L D - 0 0 0 1 11
D13 -17 NL D - 0 0 0 0 1 0
D18 -75 SDS-1SS270
J1 DCB-RR0726X02-1
R1 -17 RCB-AG820
SI -29 KSP-000609

A - 26
 R4131 SERIES
B L C - 0 1 5 1 18 X01

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Cl -2 CCP-BA1000P50V L14 LCL-C00010

C3 CCP-BA1P50V LI 5 LCL-A00066
C4 CCP- BARO1U 50V L20 LC L - A 0 0 0 6 6
C5 CCP-BA7P50V Ml -2 DEE-000736
C6 CCP-BA100P50V Q1 STN-2SC2759
C7 -9 CC P - B A R 0 1 U 50 V Q2 -3 STN-2SC2757
CI O CCK-CD22U16V Q4 STN-2SC 2 75 9
C ll C CP - B A 1 0 P 5 0 V Q5 STN-2SC2757
C 12 -14 CCP-BAR01U50V Q6 S T P - 2 S A 1 2 26
C15 CCK- CD1 0 U 2 5 V R1 RCP - A J 56
C16 -17 CCP-BA15P50V R2 RCP-AJ10K
C18 CCP-BA27P50V R3 RCP-AJ5R6K
C19 CCP-BA5P50V R4 RCP- AJ 33
C 20 CTM- BM 6 P R5 RCP - A J 2 2 0
C21 CCP-BA7P50V R6 RCP-AJ33
C2 2 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50 V R7 RCP - A J 4 7 0
C23 CCK-CD10U25V R8 -9 RCP - A J 56
C24 -25 C CP - B A R 0 1 U 5 0 V RI O RC P - A J 1 0 K
C 26 CCP-BA100P50V R ll RCP - A J 5R6K
C27 CCP-BA47P50V R 12 RCP - A J 33
C28 CCP - B A R0 1 U 50 V R13 RCP - A J 4 7 0
C 29 CCK-CD10U25V R14 RE E - A S 4 7
C30 CCP-BA100P50V R16 RCP - A J 2 2 0
C31 CCP-BA33P50V R17 RCP-AJ10K
C32 CCP-BA5P50V R18 RCP - A J 33
C33 CCP-BA2P50V R19 RCP - A J 5R6K
C34 CCP-BA33P50V R 20 RCP - A J 2 2 0
C35 CCP-BA3P50V R 21 R C P - A J 15
C36 CTM- BM10 P R22 - 2 3 RCP - A J 6 8 0
C37 CC P - B A 3 3 P 5 0 V R24 RCP - A J 56
C38 CCP-BA7P50V R2 5 R C P - A J 180
C39 CCP-BA2P50V R2 6 R C P - A J 10
C40 CCP-BA33P50V R 28 RCP-AJ100
C41 CCP-BA7P50V R29 RCP- AJ 2R2K
C42 CC P - B A 5 P50V R30 RCP-AJ1R2K
CB1 DCB-FQ0973X05A-1 R31 RCP - A J 5 6 0
Dl SDS-1SV34 R32 RCP - A J 2R2K
D2 SDZ-M110 R33 - 3 4 RCP-AJ10K
FBI DEE-001484 R3 5 R C P - A J 1R2 K
FL1 DNF-001089 XI DXD-001084
J1 -3 J CP-AA003PX05 X2 DXD - 0 0 1 0 8 3
LI LCL-E00940
L2 LCL-E00388
L3 LCL-E00936
L4 -5 LCL-E00942
L6 -7 LCL-E00960
L8 LC L - C 0 0 1 0 2
L9 LCL-E00388
L10 LCL-C00010
L 11 LCL-E00936
L 12 LCL-E00940
LI 3 LC L - C 0 0 3 2 9

A - 27
 R4131 SERIES
B T B - 0 1 5 1 19 X 0 1

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Cl CCP- • ADR47 U5 0 V
K1 -3 KRL- •000350
R1 RCP- ■AM91
R2 RCP- •AM68
R3 RCP- ■AM91
R4 RCP- •AM62
R5 RCP- AL120
R6 RCP- AL130
R7 -8 RCP- ■AM62
R9 RCP- ■AL120
RI O RCP- • AL130
R 11 RCP- •AM62

A - 28
 R4131 SERIES
BTB-015120

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Dl SDS- DMJ 4 3 1 7 - 1
R1 -3 RCP-AJIOO

A - 29
 R4131 SERIES
BTB-015122

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Rl -2 R CP -A J 100

A - 30
 R4131 SERIES
B T C -0 1 51 21

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Cl -2 CCP-AC100P50V
C3 -4 CCP-AGR01U50V
C5 CCP-ADR47U50V
C6 -8 CCP- AC R01U 50V
C9 CC P - A C 1 5 P 5 0 V
CI O CCP-AC1000P50V
C ll -12 CC P - A C R 0 1 U 5 0 V
C13 CCP-AC2P50V
Dl SDS-ND587T
LI LCL-E00932
L3 LCL-A00671
L4 LCL-E00934
L5 LCL-E00939
L6 LCL-E00388
Q1 SFN-2SK571
Q2 STN-2SC2585
Q3 STN-2SC3356
R1 -2 RCP-AJIOO
R3 RCP - A J 82
R4 RCP-AJIK
R5 RCP-AJ100K
R6 RCP - A J 2R7K
R7 RCB - A G 1 0 K
R8 RCP-AJIOO
R9 RCP - A J 62
RI O RCP-AJIOO
R ll RCP - A J 6 8 0
R12 -13 RCP-AJ2R2K
R14 R CB - A Q 3 3 0
R15 RCP-AJ10K
R16 RCP - A J 3R3K
R17 RCP - A J 8R2
R18 RCP - A J 2 2 0
R19 RCP-A J180
U1 SHB-001697
Y1 -2 DX D - 0 0 0 7 9 2
Y3 DXD-001050

A - 31
 R4131 SERIES
WFU-4131CE

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

B1 DMF-001^96
CB1 DCB-FF1223X03-1
CB2 DCB-FF1223X12-1
CB3 DCB-FF2023X32-1
CB4 DCB-FF2023X26-1
CB 6 DCB-FF2680X15-1
CB7 DCB-QQ2805X01-1
CB 8 DCB-RR2791X04-1
CB9 DCB-QF2802X01-1
CB10 DCB-QF2 8 0 3 X 0 1 - 1
CB11 DCB-QF2 8 0 4 X 0 1 - 1
CB12 DCB-QF2801X01-1
CB13 DCB-QQ2799X01-1
CB14 DCB-QS2 8 0 0 X 0 1 - 1
J1 JCI-AF003JX05-3
J2 -5 J C F - A B 0 0 1 J X03
J6 J C S - A V 0 0 4 J X01
J8 JCD-AV003PX01
NF1 DEE-001427
PI J TE-AG001EX01
R1 RVR-BA10K
R2 RVR-BL200K
VI AAA- M E 5 8 1 3 A

A - 32
 R4131 SERIES
W B L - 4 1 31 AFC

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

FLl -7 DNF-001052
J1 -2 J C F - A A 0 0 1 J X01
J3 YE E - 0 0 0 8 6 8 - 1

A - 33
 R4131 SERIES
W BL-4131ARF

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

FLl -10 DNF-001052

J1 JCF-AF001JX09-1
J2 JCF-AA001JX39-1
J3 JCF-AAOOIJXOI
J4 JCF-AA001JX06-1
J5 -6 JCF-AAOOIJXOI
J7 -9 J C F - A C 0 0 1 J X02
J ll J C R - A E 0 1 0 J X02
J 12 JCS-BZ010JX01

A - 34
 R4131 SERIES
W B L - 4 1 3 1 BNRF

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

CBl DCB-FF0934X07-1
CB2 DCB-FF0934X09-1
CB3 DCB-FF2680X08-1
FLl -10 DNF-0Q1052
J2 JCF-AA001JX39-1
J3 JCF-AAOOIJXOI
J4 JCF-AA001JX06-1
J5 -6 JCF-AAOOIJXOI
J7 -9 J C F - A C 0 0 1 J X02
J ll J C R - A E 0 1 0 J X02
J 12 J C S - B Z 0 1 0 J X01
B1 DM F - 0 0 1 4 9 6
CBl DCB-FF2416X01-1
CB2 DCB-FF1223X12-1
CB3 DCB-FF2 02 3 X 3 2 -1
CB4 DCB-FF2023X26-1
CB5 DCB-FF0934X16-1
CB 6 DCB-FF2680X15-1
J1 JCI-AF003JX05-3
J2 J C F - A B 0 0 1 J X03
J3 J C F - A B 0 0 1 J X03
J6 -5 JCS-AV004JX01
J8 JCD-AV003PX01
NF1 DEE-001427
PI J T E-AG001EX01
R1 RVR-BA10K
R2 RVR-BL200K
VI AAA- M E 5 8 1 3 A

A - 35
 R4131 SERIES
B TB -015245

Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No. Parts No. ADVANTEST Stock No.

Cl CC P - A C 1 0 0 P 5 0 V J2 -5 J C F - A B 0 0 1 J X03
C2 -3 C CP - A C R 0 1 U 5 0 V J6 J C S - A V 0 0 4 J X01
C4 C CP - A C 1 0 0 P 5 0 V J8 J CD-AV003PX01
C5 -6 CCP-ACR01U50V NF1 DEE-001427
C7 CCP-AC100P50V PI J TE-AG001EX01
C8 -9 CCP- AC RO1U 50V R1 RVR-BA10K
CI O CCP-AC1000P50V R2 RVR-BL200K
C ll CCP-ACR01U50V VI AAA-ME5813A
C12 CCP-AC1000P50V
C13 - 1 4 CCP-ACR01U50V
C15 CCP-AC4700P50V
C16 CC P - A DR 1 U5 0 V
LI -2 LC L - A 0 0 6 7 0
Q1 -2 SFN-2SK878
R1 -2 RCP-AJIOO
R3 -4 RCP- AJ 39
R5 -6 RCP- AJ 5 6 0
R7 -8 RCP-AJ39
R9 RCP-AJIK
RI O RCP- AJ 120
R11 RCP - A J 82
R12 RCP-AJ2R7K
R13 RCP-AJ100K
R14 RCB - A G 1 0 K
R15 - 1 6 RCP - A J 3 9
R17 - 1 8 RCP - A J 5 6 0
R19 - 2 0 RCP - A J 39
R2 1 RCP-AJIK
R 22 RCP- AJ 6 8
R23 RCP - A J 51
R 24 RCP-AJ100K
R2 5 RCP-AJ10K
U1 -2 SHB-001697
U3 SIM-2833
U4 SIC-566
U5 SIC-50106C F - l
B1 DM F - 0 0 1 4 9 6
CBl DCB-FF122 3 X 0 3 -1
CB2 DCB-FF1223X12-1
CB3 DCB-FF2023X32-1
CB4 DCB-FF2023X26-1
CB5 DCB-FF0934X16-1
CB6 DCB-FF2680X15-1
CB7 DCB-QQ2805X01-1
CB8 DCB-RR2791X04-1
CB9 DCB-QF2 8 0 2 X 0 1 - 1
C B 10 DCB-QF2803X01-1
CB11 DCB-QF2 8 0 4 X 0 1 - 1
CB12 DCB-QF2801X01-1
CB13 DCB-QQ2799X01-1
CB14 DCB-QS2800X01-1
J1 JCI-AF003JX05-3

A - 36
01 FAN

R4131 SERIES
SCHEMATIC SECTION
WFU-4131CE/CNE/DE/DNE
CB2

R4131 SERIES
RF BLOCK
W B L-4131A R F/B N R F
A - 38
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < J <
rt rt rt QQ n -Q *A <o
a m O<-> a
g
" d =-E
< =>
o

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR —015114 1/14
A - 39
< < < < < < < < < < < < <<<

O Qt QD (s |
/i ^ si #- r*

O ^ P* ro ■J ^ JJ ^ <0 iy\0^ ” 2 3 q cool ir

< < < < < < 4 4 < < < 4 < 4 < << < 4 < < 4 < < ,t<

QQQQ DOOD
TXT? n~n

/ / / / / / / /

O *■ N ( *- a
Q Q O O*)ONfO OUDO <H

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR —015114 2/14
A - 40
< < < < < < < < < < < < <

\ \ \ \ \

<< <<< < < < < < <

OOP o o o o o
0 0 0 0“0TF

/ / / / / /

OOOQOODD
R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR —015114 3/14
A - 41
 SA 11

5A12
SA13
5AU

* WAI T

X BUSRQ

X INT

X CSROM 2

X C SRAM 1

X CSRAM 2
X CSSAVE
X CSCRAM
X CSV5CL
X CSCNT

X CS X S C L
X LED 1

X LEO 2

X CS L S I
X CRTC
X CSAD

X GPI 8A
X G PI BC

X LOCK

X ATT

X EXT8US
X A NAL OG
BLR-015114
LOGIC
R4131 SERIES
4/14
KH
l/>V/1
Dl S P T M G
 <
3> Q Q Q O O Q Q D O * X
! * * 3
C
* III 2 I 2
U X * X X X X

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 5/14
A - 43
 o oo O
III UJ U
Q
IU (u
q
(li
O O
UJ UJ
O Q Q
UJ Ui UJ UJ
Q

■-Q-Q---O-O-O-O--
5 6 7 6T 9 10 11 12 13] 1A 15 16 17 3[4] 1 2J39|40

OEa
A

C47
OO lp

HI—fc

lf» U) O' ® (Ji

u u U 'u u OOOQOQOO

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 6/14
A - 44
a
u
O ^
o o o <O*> ^o Q n?o
U. li. U. u. u. U. U.

U30

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 7/14
A - 45
 . QC
X ... * CV<MCN
X > NJ >« >. M
~i V) ^
ami 2
ZC Z*Z2£ * Z
I * 2
*
K X X * * X X * *

XRA MW R
*0E

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 ^ 1 4
A - 46
 UJ
<
u
t/i

O
2
> >2
in
> <isi
**
* XOI SP

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 9/14
A - 47
 G V1DE0

V ID E O

HO

VO

BVR1
3r
BVR2

BVR 3

3/

C V ID EO
BLR-015114 10/14
LOGIC
R4131 SERIES

C S lfN C
 *G P |B A

D 0
D ^
D2
D 3
D U

D 5
06
D 7

A 0
A 1
A 2

4MCLK

READ

*WR
K R E SET

XGP1BC
 D101
0102
D 10 3
0104
0105

0106
0107
010 B

SRQ
AT N
EOI
D AV

N RF D
NO AC

IFC
RE N

’ «28
! 3.9k

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 11/14
A - 49
J5

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 12/14
A - 50
*EXTBUS
R 26
X ANALOG 18 y 25C
* ATT 16 V 26(
14 V 27,
*CSAD H > 26,
*WR 12 V
----
*BUSAK 9 30

7 33J
D1SPTMG
5
NORMAL H > 34,
3 35,
*RESET

1 MCLK

LINE

*BR
* ADCS
*ADWE
*SWPEND
* 1NTRAMP
DO

X L OCK

PHONE

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 13/14
A - 51
J6

R4131 SERIES
LOGIC
BLR-015114 14/14
 QU 5
O.Otu
-lh-- UT2 -1 p>n

tM0 --

R 4 131 SERIES
YTO C N T /IF
BLR—015116 1/6
A - S3
 47u/25V

+ 15V-

R 4 131 SERIES
YTO C N T /lF
BLR—015116 2 / 6
A - 54
 /n x'to! LC
^ (n)

J9
IK Out

3k (£>

R 4 131 SERIES
YTO C N T/lF
BLR—015116 3/fc
A - 55
R 4 131 SERIES
YTO C N T /lF
BLR—015116 4 /6
A - 56
R4131 SERIES
YTO c n t / i f
BLR—015116 5 /6
 J3

R4131 SERIES
YTO CNT/lF
BLR—015116 6 /6
A - 58
Ji

R4131 SERIES
ANALOG (Lo9)
BLR-015117 1 /8
A - 59
*-15V

R 4 131 SERIES
ANALOG(LoQ)
BLR-015117 2/8
A - 60
U 22

R 4 131 SERIES
ANALOG (RamP)
BLR-015117 3/8
A - 61
ZV/GHz <J>^-

R 4 13 ISERIES
ANALOG
BLR-015117 4 /8
A - 62
J1

R4I31 SERIES
ANALOG (A /D )
BLR-015117 5 /8
A - 63
 YHOLO

C 13 0 H304
lO Op 15k

C J12- ricm

H4131C/CN
ANALOG (A/D)
BLR-015117 6 /8
A - 64
R 4 131O/DN
ANALOG (A/D )
BLR-015117 7/8
A - 65
 r a -

,!9 D-Q ,
18 D-1 ,
n 0 - 2 ,
16 0 - 3 ,
15
1A o - s /
13 0 - 6 .
12 0 - 7 ,

0-6 J
XYADS

*01STMG

*BUSRQ

XAOVE

*ADCS

R 4 131 SERIES
ANALOG ( A / 0 )
BLR-015117 8 /8
A - 66
 CC80 CC88 CC90 CC98 CCAO C C A8 CCBO CCB8

HC 7 O ’6

S11 P RE S E T

R4131 SERIES
KEY
BLC-015115 1 /2
A - 67
intensity

R4131 SERIES
KEY
BLC-015115
A - 68
 ( 3rgf MIXER A
G a in = + ld B \ ^L O S S - 6 d B J
at 226MHz. /
SLOPE

R 4 13 ISERIES
RF 3rd
BLC-015118
A - 69
o-
R 12
SI
R13
51
________ J
X 0 2 ONLY

(lOdB ) < 20dB )

R4131 SERIES
RF ATT
BTB-015119X01/X02
A - 70
R4131 SERIES
RF 1st
BTB —015120
A - 71
 OUT

100 100
— -W*—
i.~ 7 5GHz

IN

10<J6 CO U PLER

OUT

R4131 SERIES
COUPLER
BTB—015122
A - 72
 (9 d B PAD)

U O H z BPF
Uoss : 2d B

/G A IN 19d 0 \
( NF : 2.S d B )
\ at 2 2 6 M H i/

R4131 SERIES
RF 2nd
BTC-015121
A - 73
( G = IZ d B )

R4131D/DN
AFC
BTB—015245
A - 74 *
 300*3 -45-
f

177 ±3
FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

EXT1-9405-C
 460±3

^SaSgSsSgggSgSsSsSs
ouowoVJouoy o 0v owoy o

ills!lifl|§!Pi!!l|iilll!li!|l!
il!ill|!ll!!!flll!l!l!lllHIlilllili
0 o o 0 o o o 0o0o o o 0o0oao ° o o o o 0o0o

"CJ
in
SIDE VIEW

Unit : m m

R4131

EXTERNAL VIEW
 ~r — )

R4131C

EXT2-9405-A FRONT VIEW

 o o RMT
o o o o o
CTR FREO MARKER OFF
o
RBW | |AUTO j |SPAN
O -W R IT E NORM N O IS E /H z ZERO

□
O — MAX
STORE

O — VIEW
REFERENCE LEVEL

CF CAL PEAK MKR-CF

□ □
ZERO CAL SIG TRK
SAVE
• COARSE
0 “ SH IFT XX FINE INPUT ATTENUATOR
t
v_
□ C H □
LINE AR O — OdB

- INPUT 75Q -
SWEEP VIDEO 1O kH z- 3 . 5 GHz
R4131CN SPECTRUM ANALYZER FREE RUN O TIME/DIV FLTR 127 dBu KAX
STAWT
O
125 VDC MAX
/RESET LIN E
POWER PHONE AMPTD IN TE N SITY CAL OUT TRIGGER
OFF CN CAL

1 6
( ) (O)
SAMPLE POS PK
2.
NORMAL
DET DET DET
200MHz
aOdBu

1 T 1 J L J

R4131CN

EXT3-9405-A FRONT VIEW

r

VJ j

\ j i j i i

R4131D
EXT4-9405-A
FRONT VIEW
 RMT
o o O o o
A. ▲ CTR FREO MARKER OFF
o
RBW AUTO SPAN
O - w r i t f: NORM NO IS E /H z ZERO

O —■ m ax
STORE

Q — VIEW
REFERENCE LEVEL

G1OdB/O
OIV
O D 2 d B /0 IV
CF CAL PEAK MKR-CF

ZERO CAL SIG IRK AFC

SAVE
• COARSE A,
O- SH IFT x x f in e V UN ITS INPUT ATTENUATOR

□ I—
L
8
j
I
0
O — OdB
L*
- INPUT 750 -
SWEEP VIDEO 10 h H z -3 .5 C H z
Q TIMf/DIV ELTR
jJ g ftM M M fl R4131DN SPECTRUM ANALYZER
STAliT
/H I SET LIN E O
POWER PHONE AMPTD IN TE N SITY CAl OUT
OFF DN
fN VIDEO
CAL

D 20D M H ;
■SINGLE
s am ple
de r
p u s pk
i ;e t
NOIiMAI
DET
80dBM

TT. T

R4131DN
EXT5-9405-A FRONT VIEW
 roi

'ROTECTION AGAINST FIRE

:E‘ ONLY KITH THE SAME
c
OF FUSE. AS SPECIFIED
LTAGE BEING UTILIZED.

AUTION
SIDE ENTRY BY TRAINED
RVICE PERSONNEL ONLY.

LINE V FUSE
90-132V

I9S-250V
75A 250V r

R4131
EXT6-9405-B REAR VIEW
 IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR ADVANTEST SOFTWARE
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY: This is an important notice for the software defined herein. Computer programs
including any additions, modifications and updates thereof, operation manuals, and related materials provided by
Advantest (hereafter referred to as "SOFTWARE"), included in or used with hardware produced by Advantest
(hereafter referred to as "PRODUCTS").

SOFTWARE License
A ll rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including, but not lim ited to, copyright) shall be and remain vested
in Advantest. Advantest hereby grants you a license to use the SOFTWARE only on or with Advantest
PRODUCTS.

Restrictions
(1) You may not use the SOFTWARE for any purpose other than for the use o f the PRODUCTS.
(2) You may not copy, modify, or change, all or any part of, the SOFTWARE w ithout permission from
Advantest.
(3) You may not reverse engineer, de-compile, or disassemble, all or any part of, the SOFTWARE.

Liability
Advantest shall have no liability (1) for any PRODUCT failures, which may arise out o f any misuse (misuse is
deemed to be use o f the SOFTWARE for purposes other than it's intended use) o f the SOFTWARE. (2) For any
dispute between you and any third parly for any reason whatsoever including, but not limited to, infringement o f
intellectual property rights.

06.11
 LIMITED WARRANTY
1. Unless otherwise specifically agreed by Seller and Purchaser in w riting, Advantest w ill warrant to the
Purchaser that during the Warranty Period this Product (other than consumables included in the Product) w ill
be free from defects in material and workmanship and shall conform to the specifications set forth in this
Operation Manual.

2. The warranty period for the Product (the "Warranty Period") w ill be a period o f one year commencing on the
delivery date of the Product.

3. I f the Product is found to be defective during the Warranty Period, Advantest w ill, at its option and in its sole
and absolute discretion, either (a) repair the defective Product or part or component thereof or (b) replace the
defective Product or part or component thereof, in either case at Advantest's sole cost and expense.

4. This limited warranty w ill not apply to defects or damage to the Product or any part or component thereof
resulti ng from any of the following:

(a) any modifications, maintenance or repairs other than modifications, maintenance or repairs (i) performed
by Advantest or (ii) specifically recommended or authorized by Advantest and performed in accordance
with Advantest's instructions;

(b) any improper or inadequate handling, carriage or storage o f the Product by the Purchaser or any third
party (other than Advantest or its agents);

(c) use o f the Product under operating conditions or environments different than those specified in the
Operation Manual or recommended by Advantest, including, without limitation, (i) instances where the
Product has been subjected to physical stress or electrical voltage exceeding the permissible range and (ii)
instances where the corrosion o f electrical circuits or other deterioration was accelerated by exposure to
corrosive gases or dusty environments;

(d) use o f the Product in connection with software, interfaces, products or parts other than software,
interfaces, products or parts supplied or recommended by Advantest;

(e) incorporation in the Product o f any parts or components (i) provided by Purchaser or (ii) provided by
a third party at the request or direction o f Purchaser or due to specifications or designs supplied by
Purchaser (including, without limitation, any degradation in performance o f such parts or components);

(f) Advantest’s incorporation or use o f any specifications or designs supplied by Purchaser;

(g) the occurrence o f an event o f force majeure, including, without limitation, fire, explosion, geological
change, storm, flood, earthquake, tidal wave, lightning or act o f war; or

(h) any negligent act or omission o f the Purchaser or any third party other than Advantest.

5. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, ADVANTEST HEREBY EXPRESSLY

DISCLAIMS, AND THE PURCHASER HEREBY WAIVES, ALL WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, (A) ANY
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND (B)
ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AS TO THE VALIDITY, SCOPE, EFFECTIVENESS OR
USEFULNESS OF ANY TECHNOLOGY OR ANY INVENTION.

6. THE REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN SHALL BE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE
PURCHASER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT.

7. ADVANTEST WILL NOT HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE PURCHASER FOR ANY INDIRECT,
IN C I D E N T A L , S P E C I A L , C O N S E Q U E N T I A L O R P U N I T I V E D A M A G E S , I N C L U D I N G ,
W IT H O U T LIMITATION, LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR REVENUES, IN ANY AND
ALL CIRCUMSTANCES, EVEN IF ADVANTEST HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF S U C H D A M A G E S A N D W H E T H E R A R I S I N G O U T OF B R E A C H O F C O N T R A C T ,
W A R R A N T Y , T O R T ( I N C L U D I N G , W I T H O U T L I M IT A T IO N , N E G L I G E N C E ) , S T R IC T
LIABILITY, INDEMNITY, CONTRIBUTION OR OTHERWISE. TORT (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
L IM IT A T IO N , N E G L I G E N C E ), S T R IC T L IA B IL IT Y , IN D E M N IT Y , C O N T R IB U T IO N OR
OTHERWISE.

8. O T H E R TH A N THE R E M E D Y FO R THE B R E A C H OF W A R R A N TY SET FO RTH H ER EIN ,

ADVANTEST SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, AND HEREBY DISCLAIMS TO THE FULLEST
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ANY LIABILITY FOR, DAMAGES FOR PRODUCT FAILURE
OR DEFECT, W H ETH ER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, NEGLEGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY, INDEMNITY, CONTRIBUTION
OR OTHERWISE.
 CUSTOMER SERVICE DESCRIPTION
In order to maintain safe and trouble-free operation o f the Product and to prevent the incurrence o f unnecessary
costs and expenses, Advantest recommends a regular preventive maintenance program under its maintenance
agreement.

Advantest's maintenance agreement provides the Purchaser on-site and off-site maintenance, parts, maintenance
machinery, regular inspections, and telephone support and w ill last a maximum o f ten years from the date
the delivery o f the Product. For specific details o f the services provided under the maintenance agreement,
please contact the nearest Advantest office listed at the end o f this Operation Manual or Advantest's sales
representatives.

Some o f the components and parts o f this Product have a lim ited operating life (such as, electrical and
mechanical parts, fan motors, unit power supply, etc.). Accordingly, these components and parts w ill have to
be replaced on a periodic basis. I f the operating life o f a component or part has expired and such component
or part has not been replaced, there is a possibility that the Product w ill not perform properly. Additionally, i f
the operating l ife o f a component or part has expired and continued use o f such component or part damages the
Product, the Product may not be repairable. Please contact the nearest Advantest office listed at the end o f this
Operation Manual or Advantest’s sales representatives to determine the operating life o f a specific component
or part, as the operating life may vary depending on various factors such as operating condition and usage
environment.
 SALES & SUPPORT OFFICES
Advantest Korea Co., Ltd.
22BF, Kyobo KangNam Tower,
1303-22, Seoc-ho-Dong, Seocho-Ku, Seoul #137-070, Korea
Phone:+82-2-532-7071
Fax: +82-2-532-7132

Advantest (Suzhou) Co., Ltd.

Shanghai Branch Office:
Bldg. 6D, NO.1188 Gumei Road, Shanghai, China 201102 P.R.C.
Phone:+86-21-6485-2725
Fax: +86-21-6485-2726

Shanghai Branch Office:

406/F, Ying Building, Quantum Plaza, No. 23 Zhi Chun Road,
Hai Dian District, Beijing,
China 100083
Phone:+86-10-8235-3377
Fax: +86-10-8235-6717

Advantest (Singapore) Pie. Ltd.

438A Alexandra Road, #08-03/06
Alexandra Technopark Singapore 119967
Phone:+65-6274-3100
Fax: +65-6274-4055

Advantest America, Inc.

3201 Scott Boulevard, Suite, Santa Clara, CA 95054, U.S.A
Phone: +1-408-988-7700
Fax: +1-408-987-0691

ROHDE & SCHWARZ Europe GmbH

MtihldorfstraBc 15 D-81671 Miinchcn, Germany
(P.O.B. 80 14 60 D-81614 Miinchen. Germany)
Phone: +49-89-4129-13711
Fax: +49-89-4129-13723

ADVANTEST, h ttp ://w w w .a d va n te s t.c o .jp

ADVANTEST CORPORATION
Shin-Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-2 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0005, Japan
Phone: +81-3-3214-7500